Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutREMODELING/ASHTON HOUSE/2013REMODELING/ ASHTON HOUSE/ 2013 p.x,oAr-4lNc. / ASg`To&-i go,�E- /�w3 l9- APR- 13 _� Pf<cn5r Spet'cwl',p, iror�i� F eon�r�[�. RjAIcw I 23�-G�2- l3 4I (K�esof(J-iw, 33 Se-Jo;rt� a c��;c tle4r"nq �n Nla� �`r�� a -0/j t 7 � y? io is t C; -C-, ok4;0 "S %r.� OppCvwrac/f/ cAs� I��rOnC/j �'TV �/iIiGT��1�L✓ �6 pI0.C.[- SG(L Piro ., 6!] ^Fife �ON pWj//iC <n sP.�c�i /c,.,. NO,! C -e O'T Rk b /; C fleeLNrng 1Vu11c� o� l��bl:c Aear;n9 -�rap� a� lncc�l;cc �,or7 ly-Airy- /3 Tes,5fk.4 t - /3-/l/o 60*'Jjtng f(t7 sl Spec; �;ck� mzs 4�r,r.�. 04- l/ JJ +c 1-7� 9 ev ¢;m r 6c � ms/- 4I r �f-/,{41i cans -fru ��-� of f/,.e sP� Y. . Pbus� Jtitr,,DOwe(,ny 1"rc)J"cc-�-, eS1'C ,6i�.Sh�nq- cern a -t n'F ui {�iGi $ecur; 4o a-cclOV) pany ejC4 I;d d rec�:ny �� /er/� �u Pr�J� 1:rsLr2 nr re -4c7 .C) oqt✓�f� F `i-•kinc� �.me q,7(! �/1R[.t _ray, Cec� Psa'r .b.dS. I / ti1a.I rca �t, �: dde� c J$ J,w- /g >�esolwj;trn �$1)^�� =ZD1 QWccrc�;n� eDn c 5 OJ,1-�oriztvv5 At �or St9nn�- 'F+W C-�.(�e12rK -1D R4{2&�- Q C-"rm,241 A,.- -44s"6r7 �rrJetS-e Ktrr�D�Qe.1•rt0� `roJ{�-• CITY OF IOWA CITY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE Ned Ashton House Renovations 2013 IOWA CITY, IOWA ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PROJECT MANUAL FOR ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 OWNER: City of Iowa City 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 ARCHITECT: Thomas McInerney Architect 1208 Marcy Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Telephone: (319) 331-0365 Project Architect and Contract Administration: Thomas McInerney e-mail: thomas@thomasarchitect.com BIDS DUE: June 14, 2013 2:30 PM City Clerk's Office 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52245 PREBID MEETING: May 30, 2013, 10:00am, on-site at 820 Park Road, Iowa City, Iowa. ISSUE FOR BID: May 15, 2013 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000001- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 000107 - SEALS PAGE p1„uunuggr c ; •CIIRISTOPNEIf ••• G J. VARO n NO 145GG "'/ry11I IIIIIPPA FXPIRES DEC. 31, 2014 Oft551oA, certify that this engineering document was prepay d \mac F,x ) ; idOnAMMED ••• c -rr diensed nd r e ows of thy= Frofescionn! tote of Iowa. ADUTA5AN A = NO. 20051 _ •' EXPRES DEC. 31, 7%13 ! 05242 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepay d by e or under my direct supervision and a Ennee -rr diensed nd r e ows of thy= Frofescionn! tote of Iowa. p 1 U: QED ARG,+° END OF SEALS PAGE Un w er ic. No. 14'866 /Dcitp My license renewal date is December 31, .2n,14 Pages or sheets covered by -,his seal: I her y certify thct this engineering document was prg1h y m me or under my direct supervicion an t aduly I icensed Professional F e u oder the,lows of the State of Iowo. L4- ej- 2- ngii eeP-renew:cl Ij— .. 081 _ Date M date is December 31, 2013 Pae s or sheets covered by this teal: I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge_ I am a duly registered ArchiteclIpeirr the laws of the State of Iowa. HO A5 A. McINERNEY HTOL3 see"IL-- - �� , Registration expires- June 3C, 2013 Date issued -JAN NARY 2001 t - I SEALS PAGE 00 0107- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY TABLE OF CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 0001 01 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 01 -1 thru 1 0001 05 CERTIFICATIONS PAGE 00 01 05 -1 thru 1 0001 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 -1 thru 4 0001 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 05 -1 thru 1 NP -1 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING 01 40 00 -1 thru 3 NTB-1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 01 50 00 -1 thru 2 NB -1 NOTE TO BIDDERS 01 60 00 -1 thru 4 IB -1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 01 73 00 -1 thru 7 FP -1 FORM OF PROPOSAL 01 77 00 -1 thru 4 BB -1 BID BOND 01 78 00 -1 thru 4 AG -1 FORM OF AGREEMENT 01 78 23 -1 thru 3 PB -1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT 01 79 00 -1 thru 3 CC -1 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE (ANTI -DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) GC -1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 02 41 00-1 thru 2 SC -1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 02 41 19 -1 thru 5 R-1 RESTRICTION ON NON-RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON -FEDERAL -AID PROJECTS DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 SUMMARY 01 10 00 -1 thru 1 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 -1 thru 3 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES 01 21 00 -1 thru 2 013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 -1 thru5 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 -1 thru 3 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 -1 thru 2 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 -1 thru 4 01 7300 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 -1 thru 7 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 -1 thru 4 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 -1 thru 4 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 -1 thru 3 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 -1 thru 3 DIVISION 02 -EXISTING CONDITIONS 0241 00 DEMOLITION 02 41 00-1 thru 2 0241 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 -1 thru 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1 thru 10 DIVISION 05 — METALS 05 10 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 10 00 - 1 thru 4 05 30 00 METAL GRATING 05 30 00-1 thru 2 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-1 thru 4 DIVISION O6— WOOD 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-1 thru 3 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1 thru 3 DIVISION 07— THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05-1 thru 4 DIVISION O8 — OPENINGS O8 11 00 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 10 00-1 thru 5 08 80 00 GLAZING 08 80 00-1 thru 3 DIVISION 09— FINISHES 22 05 53-1 thru 2 -09 21 16- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 1 thru 4 09 30 00 ' TILING 09 30 00 - 1 thru 4 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00 -1 thru 12 DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 22 40 00-1 thru 2 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 1 thru 2 1044 10 PLASTIC SIGNS 10 44 10 -1 thru 2 10 81 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 81 00 -1 thrni 4 DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00-1 thru 4 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 29-1 thru 6 22 95 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 05 53-1 thru 2 2207 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 2207 11-1 thru 4 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-1 thru 4 22 11 23 NATURAL GAS PIPING 22 11 23-1 thru 2 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00-1 thru 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC -' 23 05 00-1 thru 4 2305 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13-1 thru 2 23 05 19 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC 2305 19-1 thru 4 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 23 05 53-1 thru 4 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING 23 05 29-1 thru 8 23 0548 VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 05 48-1 thru 2 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 23 05 53-1 thru 4 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93-1 thru 4 2307 13 DUCT INSULATION 2307 13-1 thru 4 23 07 19 PIPE INSULATION 2307 19-1 thru 4 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00.1 thru 2 2331 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-1 thru 6 23 33 00 AIR DUCTACCESSORIES 23 33 00-1 thru 6 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00-1 thru 2 23 40 00 HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES 23 40 00-1 thru 4 23 63 13 AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 23 63 13-1 thru 2 2373 13 EVAPORATIVE COILS 2373 13-1 thru 2 2381 01 UNITARY HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 23 81 01-1 thru 2 DIVISION 26 -ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-1 thru 16 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-1 thru 2 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-1 thru 2 26 08 00 COMMISSIONNING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 08 00-1 thru 2 2624 16 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1 thru 2 26 28 00 LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 00-1 thru 2 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 16-1 thru 2 2629 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13-1 thru 4 26 29 33 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 26 29 33-1 thru 2 2651 00 LIGHTING 26 51 00-1 thru 4 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 2831 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-1 thru 14 END OF SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-4 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR THE NED ASHTON HOUSE 2013 RENOVATIONS PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Ned Ashton Renovations 2013 Project in said city at 7 PM on the 14th day of May, 2013, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 DRAWING SHEET INDEX: ARCHITECTURAL A-010 COVER SHEET A-100 BASEMENT PLAN A-101 UPSTAIRS PLAN A-301 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-302 BUILDING SECTION HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) M00 NOTES AND LEGEND mol DEMOLITION PLANS M02 PLANS M03 CEILING PLANS M04 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES PLUMBING P00 NOTES AND SYMBOLS POl DEMOLITION P02 PLANS ELECTRICAL E00 PLANS & GENERAL NOTES E01 BASEMENT LEVEL E02 PPER LEVEL E03 SYMBOLS & ONE -LINE E04 DETAILS & SCHEDULES NOTICE TO BIDDERS NED ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 11 A.M. on the 14th day of June, 2013. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 18th day of June, 2013, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. A pre-bid meeting will be held on site at 820 West Park Road, Iowa City, Iowa on May 30, 2013 at 10:00 AM. The Project will involve the following: the interior renovation and modification of an existing 5,000 square foot building, resulting in the converting of the building use from a residential type occupancy to an assembly type occupancy with the intended purpose and use as a public and community gathering place. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Thomas McInerney Architect, of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council_ The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of 1 (one) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Working Days: 115 (one -hundred -fifteen days) Specified Start Date: June 19, 2013 Liquidated Damages: $ 100 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Technigraphics, 415 Highland Avenue, Suite #100, Iowa City, Iowa, 52240, phone number (319) 354-5950, by bona fide bidders. A $60 refundable and a $15 non-refundable shipping fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Technigraphics. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422 Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract- This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa. and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK NOTE TO BIDDERS 1.The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. 2. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. 3. Bid submittals are'. Envelope 1: Bid Bond Envelope 2: Form of Proposal ME INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 7 - DEFINITIONS 1. Bidding documents include the bidding requirements and the contract documents. The bidding requirements include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instructions'to Bidders, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the Contract Forms including addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 The contract documents for the work consist of the Owner/Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.3 Definitions set forth in AIA document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 2007 edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the bidding documents. A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deflection, clarifications or correction. B. A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the bidding documents. C. The base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described in the bidding documents as the Base, to which work may be added, or from which work may be deducted for sums stated in alternate bids. D. An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in the work, as described in bidding documents, is accepted. E. A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the bidding documents or in the contract documents. F. A bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. G. A sub -bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the work. ARTICLE 2 — BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2. The bidder by making a bid represents that the bidder has read and understands the bidding documents, and the bid is made in accordance with those documents. 2.2 The Bidder has read and understands the bidding documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted. 2.3 The bidder has visited the site, has become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the contract documents. M 2.4 The bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 — BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.Copies A. Complete sets of the bidding documents may be obtained from the office of Office of Technigraghics 415 Highland Avenue, Suite #100, Iowa City, IA 52240, (319) 354-5950, for the deposit sum as indicated. The deposit will be refunded to plan holders who return the bidding documents in good condition within 15 days after receipt of bids. A bidder receiving a contract award may retain the bidding documents, and his deposit will be refunded. Successful sub -bidders, including material suppliers, may retain their bidding documents, and their deposit will be refunded If the Architect receives written notification within the 30 calendar day period following receipt of bids. B. Bidders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing bids. Neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of bidding documents. No partial sets will be issued. C. In making copies of the bidding documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the work, and do nor confer license or grant permission for any other use of the bidding documents. D. Copies of the reports and drawings that are not included with the Bidding Documents may be examined at Engineering Division at City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa during regular business hours, or may be obtained from the Owner at Owner's reproduction cost, plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are not part of the contract documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which the bidder may rely as identified and established above, are incorporated therein by reference. 2. Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. Bidders and sub -bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.Substitutions A. The materials, products and equipment described in the bidding documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. Refer to for substitution requirements in Section IC1V: 013000. B. If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of bids, such approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 4. Addenda A. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have a complete set of bidding documents. B. Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever bidding documents are on file for that purpose. C. No addenda will be issued later than four (4) days prior to the date for receipt of bids, except for any one or more of the following reasons: 1. An addendum withdrawing the request for bids. 2. An addendum which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. 3. An addendum issued after receipt of bids and prior to execution of the contract. D. Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a bid that he has received all addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the proper location on the bid form. ARTICLE 4— BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.Form and Style of Bids A. A separate copy of the bid form is contained within the back cover of this document. B. Fill in all blanks on the bid form by typewriter or manually in ink. C. Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and numerals, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words will govern. D. Interlineations, alterations or erasures shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. E. All requested alternates shall be bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter "No Change". F. Where two or more bids for designated portions of the work have been requested, the bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids stipulated by the bidder. The bidder shall make no additional stipulation on the bid form, nor qualify the bid in any other manner. G. Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the bidder. H. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the date of 1M opening. 2.Bid Security A. Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of ten percent (10 %) of the base bid and in the form of surety bond pledging that the bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner on the items stated in his bid and will, if requested, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Should the bidder refuse to enter into such contract or fail to furnish such bond if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. A cashier's check, cash or certified check will not be an accepted bid bond. B. Surety bond shall be written on enclosed "Bid Bond" form bound within the project manual and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of power of attorney. C. The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered until either: 1. The contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished. 2. The specified time has elapsed so that the bids may be withdrawn. 3. All bids have been rejected. 3.Submission of Bids A. All copies of the bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in sealed opaque envelopes as instructed in Section NB — Note to Bidders. Both envelopes shall be addressed to the party receiving the bids ("City Clerk, City of Iowa City"), and shall be identified with the project name, the bidder's name and address, and the envelope's contents. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face of that envelope. B. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids. 1. Location: Office of City Clerk, City Hall, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 2. Time and Date: Bids due before and opened at 2:30 p.m., June 14, 2013. C Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. D. The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of bids. Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.Modification or Withdrawal of Bid A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled the bidder after the stipulated time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting his bid. B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, a bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place IB -4 designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing, signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. If written notice is electronic, written confirmation from the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract shall also be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. D. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 — CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.Opening of Bids A. The properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. 2.Rejection of Bids A. The Owner will have the right to reject any or all bids, and to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid security or by another data required by the bidding documents, or to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) A. It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsive responsible bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents, and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a bid received, and to accept the bid which, in his judgment, is in his own best interest. B. The Owner will have the right to accept bid alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the accepted alternates. ARTICLE 6 — POST -BID INFORMATION 6.Submittals A. The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. B. The bidder shall, within seven (7) days of notification of selection for the award of a contract for the work, submit the following information to the Architect: 3. A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with the bidder's own forces. am 4. The proprietary names and the suppliers or principal items or system of materials and equipment proposed for the project. C. The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the work described in the bidding documents. D. Prior to the award of the contract, the Architect will notify the bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. If the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at the bidder's option: 1. Withdraw the bid. 2. Submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. D. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or may disqualify the bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ARTICLE 7 — PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.Bond Requirements A. The bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Bonds may be secured through the bidder's usual sources. The cost of furnishing such bonds shall be included in the bid. B. If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the bidder's usual source, all change in cost will be adjusted as provided in contract documents. 2 The Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds A. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three (3) days following the date of execution of the contract. If the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered. B. The bonds shall be written on the "Performance and Payment Bond" form bound within the project manual, or a copy thereof. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the contract sum. C. The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the contract. D. The bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix a current and certified copy of power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 — PRE-BID CONFERENCE 8.Conference A. Bidder is encouraged to attend a pre-bid conference on May 30, 2013, 10:OOam, on-site at 820 Park Road, Iowa City, Iowa Parking available on-site or along Normandy Drive. IB -6 FORM OF PROPOSAL Ned Ashton House Renovations 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY BIDDERS PLEASE NOTE: 1, PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 2:30 PM local time on June 14, 2009 TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete Ned Ashton House Renovations 2013 in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawings dated April 17, 2013 including Addenda numbered and , inclusive, prepared by Thomas McInerney Architect, for the Base Bid Lump Sum of BASE BID Dollars The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount. The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. HVAC: Plumbing: Electrical: Paint: FP -1 NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before October 11, 2013. Firm: Signature: _ Printed Name Title: Address: Phone: Contact: FP -2 BID BOND as Principal, and as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated for Project. NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this A. D-, 20 Witness RM (Seal) Principal By_ (Seal) Surety Attach Power -of -Attorney day of (Title) (Attorney-in-fact) FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City"), and ("Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the day of 20, for the Project ('Project'), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW. THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a. Addenda Numbers b. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201-2007, as amended; C. Plans, d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions, e. Notice to Bidders; f. Note to Bidders, g. Performance and Payment Bond; h. Restriction on Non -Resident Bidding on Non -Federal -Aid Projects, L Contract Compliance Program (Anti -Discrimination Requirements), j. Proposal and Bid Documents: and k. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): 4.Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 5.The Project base bid submitted by form of proposal is in the amount of: To be completed after award and no/100 Dollars 0.00 . DATED this day of 20 [DATE BASED ON FORMAL COUNCIL MEETING AWARDING CONTRACT BY RESOLUTION NUMBER ) City (Signature) (Printed name) ATTEST: Contractor (Signature) (Printed name) Title ATTEST: City Clerk (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of ($ ) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of (date) entered into a written Agreement with Owner for Project; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications -prepared by which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed-upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determination by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with PB -1 any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of () years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontractors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF 20 IN THE PRESENCE OF: Witness (Principal) (Title) (Surety) Witness (Title) (Street) (City, State, Zip) (Phone) 91-10 Contract Compliance Program CITY OF 10 WA CITY No SECTION GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: 1. All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC -2 and CC -3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. 6.All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead," and instead use gender neutral signs. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors abide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City City Code section 2-3-1. CC -1 SECTION II ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES CC2 AND CC3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion. or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et sec.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. 3. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print) Phone number Address S.The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining the necessary posters. CC -2 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6, are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business re Print Name CC -3 Title Number SECTION 111 SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. 2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equal employment opportunity laws. 4. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This can be done by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity employer". (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. Wordofmouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory barriers. (d) Select and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to support equal employment opportunity goals. (e) Review periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for successful job performance. (f) Review the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for?" Only use jobrelated tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. (g) Monitor interviews carefully_ Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective judgments in personal interviews can be a major source of discrimination. (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use nonbiased promotion, transfer and training policies to increase and/or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based ' upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record- Furthermore, all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them. CC -4 '00�0, City or� Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 — 3 — 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a contract with the City. CC -5 2-3-1 CHAPTER 3 DISCRIMINATORY PRACTICES SECTION: 2-3-1: Employment; Exceptions 2-3-2: Public Accommodation; Exceptions 2.3-3: Credit Transactions; Exceptions 2-3-4: Education 2-3.5: Aiding Or Abetting; Retaliation; Intimidation 2-3-1: EMPLOYMENT; EXCEPTIONS A. It shalt be unlawful for any employer to refuse to hire, accept, register, classify, upgrade or refer for employ- ment, or to otherwise discriminate in employment against any other person or to discharge any employee be- cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexuai orientation. B. It shall be unlawful for any labor orga- nization to refuse to admit to member- ship, apprenticeship or training an applicant, to expel any member, or to otherwise discriminate against any applicant for membership, apprentice- ship or training or any member in the privileges, rights or benefits of such membership, apprenticeship or train- ing because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such ap- plicant or member. CC -6 2.3-1 C. It shalt be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organiza- tion or the employees or members thereof to directly or indirectly adver- tise or in any other manner Indicate or publicize that individuals are unwel- come, objectionable or not solicited for employment of membership be- cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) D. Employment policies relating to preg- nancy and childbirth shall be governed by the following: 1. A written or unwritten employment policy or practice which excludes from employment applicants or employees because of the employee's pregnancy is a prima facie violation of this Title. 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to by the employee's pregnancy, miscar- riage, childbirth and recovery there- from are, for all job-related purposes, temporary disabilities and shall be treated as such under any health or temporary disability Insurance or sick leave plan available in connection with employment or any written or unwrit- ten employment policies and practices involving terms and conditions of employment as applied to other tem- porary disabilities. E. It shall be unlawful for any person to solicit or require as a condition of employment of any employee or pro - Sawa cce> 597 2-3-1 2-3-1 spective employee a test for the pies- 2. An employer or employment agency ence of the antibody to the human which chooses to offer employment or immunodeficiency virus. An agree- advertise for employment to only the ment between an employer, employ- disabled or elderly. Any such employ- ment agency, tabor organization or ment or offer of employment shall not their employees, agents or members discriminate among the disabled or and an employee or prospective em- elderly on the basis of age, color, ployee concerning employment, pay creed, disability, gender identify, mari- or benefits to an employee or pro- fat status, national origin, race, reft- spective employee in return for taking gion, sex or sexual orientation_ (Ord. a test for the presence of the antibody 95-3697, 11-7-1995) to the human immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this 3. The employment of individuals for subsection do not apply if the State work within the home of the employer epidemiologist determines and the if the employer or members of the Director of Public Health declares family reside therein during such em - through the utilization of guidelines ployment. established by the Center for Disease Control of the United States Depart- 4. The employment of individuals to meet of Health and Human Services, render personal service to the person that a person with a condition related of the employer or members of the to acquired immune deficiency syn- employer's family. drome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human immunode- 5. To employ on the basis of sex in ficiency virus to other persons in a those certain instances where sex is a specific occupation. bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal F. The following are exempted from the operation of a particular business or provisions of this Section, enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted nar- 1. Any bona fide religious institution or rowly. its educational facility, association, corporation or society with respect to 6. A State or Federal program de - any qualifications for employment signed to benefit a specific age classi- based on religion when such qualifica- fication which serves a bona fide pub - tions are related to a bona fide reli- lic purpose. gious purpose. A religious qualifica- tion for instructional personnel or an 7. To employ on the basis of disability administrative officer, serving in a in those certain instances where pres- supervisory capacity of a bona fide ence of disability is a bona fide occu- religious educational facility or reli- pational qualification reasonably nec- gious institution shall be presumed to essary to the normal operation of a be a bona fide occupational qualifica- particular business or enterprise. The tion. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-6-1994) bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-6-1994) 8B7 Iowa City CC -8 GENERAL CONDITIONS "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201-2007 amended, shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. CC -1 INSERT SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE AIA DOC A201-2007 CC -1 RESTRICTION ON NON-RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON -FEDERAL -AID PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: TYPE OF WORK: DATE OF LETTING: A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a non-resident bidder from a state or foreign country which gives or requires a preference to bidders from that state or foreign country. That preference is equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the non-resident bidder is a resident. 'Resident bidder" is defined as a person authorized to transact business in this state and having a place of business within the state, and has conducted business for at least six months prior to the first advertisement for the public improvement. In the case of a corporation, the above requirements apply as well as the requirement that the corporation have at least fifty percent of its common stock owned by residents of this state. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the bidder and his/her contractors and subcontractors at the work site until the project is completed. I hereby certify that the undersigned is a resident bidder as defined above and will remain such from the start of the project until its completion. COMPANY NAME: CORPORATE OFFICER: TITLE: DATE: INSERT FORM OF PROPOSAL TO SUBMIT TO CITY CLERK ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Ned Ashton House Renovations 2013. B. Owner's Name: City of Iowa City. C. Architect's Name: Thomas McInerney Architect. D. The Project consists of the interior renovation and modification of an existing 5,000 square foot building, resulting in the converting of the building use from a residential type occupancy to an assembly type occupancy with the intended purpose and use as a public and community gathering place. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document AG -1 - Form of Agreement. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A. Scope of demolition and removal work is the responsibility of the Landlord. B. Plumbing: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. C. HVAC: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. D. Electrical Power and Lighting: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY B. OWNER intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion, C. Cooperate with OWNER to minimize conflict and to facilitate OWNER's operations. D. Schedule the Work to accommodate OWNER occupancy. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. OWNER occupancy. 2. Use of site and premises by the public and adjacent Tenant. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law, Landlord, adjacent Tenants and by OWNER: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. C. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage. D. Time Restrictions: 1. Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to the hours of 9PM to 8AM. 1.06 WORK SEQUENCE A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with OWNER and Landlord. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SUMMARY 01 1000-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 012000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Change procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 0 A. Section AG -1 - Form of Agreement: Contract Sum, payment period. B. Section GC -1 - General Conditions: Additional requirements for progress payments, final payment, changes in the Work. C. Section SC -1 - Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 -Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractors standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance, and Contractor's overhead and profit. D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Make applications for progress payments in amounts equal to ninety-five percent of the value of Work completed, including cost of materials and equipment properly stored at the jobsite, less the amount of previous payments. B. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. C. Present required information in typewritten form. D. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. F. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. G. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. H. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. I. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements. 2. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. J. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on Architect's form. B. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a document, signed by OWNER, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change in Work. C Proposal Request: Architect may issue a document which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 15 days. D. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6000. E. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: 1. For change requested by Architect for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect. 3. For pre -determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will based on the fixed unit prices. 4. For change ordered by Architect without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by Architect based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. On request, provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment_ b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. C, Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e: Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a: Origin and date of claim. b_ Dates and times work was performed, and by whom - c: Time records and wage rates paid. d.. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. G'_ Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract on AIA G701. H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub - schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents, 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Final Payment shall be the remaining balance of five percent of the final contract sum (contract retainage). B. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. C. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 2. Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work. D. Final Payment shall become due after 30 days following the Owner's final acceptance of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 - - CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 012100 -ALLOWANCES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cash allowances. B. Contingency allowance. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures: Additional payment and modification procedures. 1.03 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts, less applicable taxes. B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances: Product handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage, and labor for installation and finishing. C. Architect Responsibilities: 1. Select products in consultation with OWNER and transmit decision to Contractor. 2. Prepare Change Order. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Obtain proposals from suppliers and offer recommendations. 2. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. 3. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order. 1.04 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance, B. Funds will be drawn from the Contingency Allowance only by Change Order. C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 1.05 INSPECTING AND TESTING ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Inspecting and Testing Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspecting or testing agency; execution of inspecting and tests, and reporting results. B. Costs Not Included in the Inspecting and Testing Allowances: 1. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency. 2. Costs of testing services used by Contractor separate from Contract Document requirements. 3. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect. C. Payment Procedures: 1. Submit one copy of the inspecting or testing firm's invoice with next application for payment. 2. Pay invoice on approval by Architect. D. Differences in cost will be adjusted by Change Order. 1.06 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE ALLOWANCES 01 2100-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY A. Contingency Allowance: Include the stipulated sum/price of $32,000 for use upon Owner's instructions. B. HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Allowance: Include the sum of $2,000 for testing, adjusting, and balancing mechanical systems as specified in Section 23 05 93. PART PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES 01 2100-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. _ E. Number of copies of submittals. F. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Stages of the Work, occupancy, B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. D. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Instruction of Owner's operating personnel. 1.04 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Coordinator: Owner's designated contact person. B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site, for field offices and sheds, for construction access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. D. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Owner's "Notice to Proceed". B. Attendance Required: 1. OWNER. 2. Architect, 3. Contractor. 4. Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 3. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, the Owner's jobsite representative, the Contractor's key administrative and field personnel, and Architect. 4. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 5. Scheduling. D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with two copies to OWNER, Contractor participants, and those affected by decisions made. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3.02 CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, OWNER, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations. problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to Work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, OWNER, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - See Section 01 3216 A. Within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review. submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Incorporate the following schedule for contract closeout: 1. Closeout Meeting: Schedule at least 45 days prior to anticipated date of Substantial Completion. Submit initial copy of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for review. 2. Demonstration and Instruction: Schedule at least 15 days prior to Substantial Completion. 3. Contractor's Punchlist and Notification of Substantial Completion: Submit at least 10 days prior to anticipated date of Substantial Completion. a. Architect will schedule verification inspection of Work within 5 days of receipt of Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. 4. Architect will issue "Certificate of Substantial Completion" in accordance with provisions in the Conditions of the Contract. 5. Closeout Submittals: See Section 01 7800 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. Submit within 25 days following Substantial Completion. 6. Final Change Order: Architect will prepare and issue within 5 days after Substantial Completion. 7. °- Contractor's Notification of Final Completion: Architect will schedule Final Inspection of the Work within 5 days of receipt of Contractor's Notice. 8. Architect will issue Final Certificate for Payment upon Owner's Final Acceptance of the Work. 9. Final Payment: See Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures. Payment due and payable 30 days after Owner's Final Acceptance of the Work. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3.04 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Bar Charts: Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. C. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches. D. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. '.. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for OWNER. No action will:be taken. 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for OWNER's benefit during and after project completion. 3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A_ Documents for Review - 1 . eview:1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-112 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect. 2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 24 x 36 inches: Submit one reproducible transparency and two opaque reproduction. B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make three reproductions of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier: pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission. Identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 3.10 ATTACHED FORMS A. Transmittal Form for "Construction Submittals". END OF SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-4 Construction Submittal THOMAS MCINERNEY ARCHITECT Ashton House Renovations 2013 TO (CONTRACTOR): Transmittal A FROM (SUBCONTRACTOR): SUBMITTAL NUMBER: BY: DATE SUBMITTED: OUANITY REFERENCE/NUMBER TITLE /DETURERON/ SPECIFICATION SECTION/DRAWING DETAIL FROM (CONTRACTOR): IM DATE RECEIVED BY CONTRACTOR: c. DATE TRANSMITTED BY CONTRACTOR: {rl� Approved Revise and Resubmit - © Approved as Noted JW Rejected f Resubmit - Transmittal TO(CONTRACTOR): FROM (ARCHITECT/ENGINEER): ' DATE RECEIVED BY A/ E: Submitted for Review and Approval ',,,_yI Substitution involved -Substitution request attached. kJ Resubmitted for review and approval 1v� Other remarks on above submission. Transmittal D COPIES Cu Owner { Consultant bit TO(SUBCONTRACTOR): FROM (CONTRACTOR): DATE RECEIVED BY CONTRACTOR: DATE TRANSMITTED BY CONTRACTOR: One copy retained by sender 1 TO (ARCHITECT/ENGINEER): Transmittal B B FROM (CONTRACTOR): DATE RECEIVED BY CONTRACTOR: c. DATE TRANSMITTED BY CONTRACTOR: {rl� Approved Revise and Resubmit - © Approved as Noted JW Rejected f Resubmit - Transmittal TO(CONTRACTOR): FROM (ARCHITECT/ENGINEER): ' DATE RECEIVED BY A/ E: DATE TRANSMITTED BY A / E: Q Approved Revise and Resubmit (,_J Approved as Noted Q Rejected / Resubmit L:j No Action Required Remarks: Transmittal D COPIES Cu Owner { Consultant bit TO(SUBCONTRACTOR): FROM (CONTRACTOR): DATE RECEIVED BY CONTRACTOR: DATE TRANSMITTED BY CONTRACTOR: One copy retained by sender 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance submittals. B. Mock-ups. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Testing and inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 REFERENCES 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time specialist and responsible officer. B. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test reports are submitted for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the OWNER, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the OWNER's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for OWNER. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. OWNER will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and inspection. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. PART PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B.- Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust'. products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWACITY performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/ inspected. G. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with OWNER's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. 3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telephone service. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. H. Project identification sign. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. Existing facilities may not be used. C. New permanent facilities may not be used. D. Use trigger -operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.03 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to Field office at time of project mobilization. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of- way and for public access to existing building_ C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.07 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from OWNER - occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into OWNER -occupied areas, and TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: 1.08 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and OWNER'S operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with OWNER's security program. 1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and OWNER. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. D. Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic, E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. 1.10 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. C. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers: locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. D. Open free -fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.11 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment. facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. L. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. E. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances - PART 2 ppliances. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.03 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to OWNER. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. ,. 5. Will reimburse OWNER and Architect for review or redesign services associated with acceptance of substitutions and re -approval by authorities. E. _- Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision'to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. Requests shall be submitted on Form 01 6000A: REQUEST/ CERTIFICATION FOR PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS (this form is found after ` the end of this Section). 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. Thomas McInerney Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY FORM 01 6000A REQUEST/CERTIFICATION FOR PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS TO: PROJECT. BID DATE: The undersigned hereby states the following: 1. Having examined the Drawings. Specifications and other Bidding Documents. and being familiar with the conditions surrounding the installation of materials/products/systems herein proposed for acceptance for the above project, do hereby certify that the function, appearance, quality and performance of the following: complies with requirements contained in the Drawings and the following specifications sections: 2. Upon acceptance of the above materials/products/system, full compliance with the proposed Contract Documents shall be maintained. Submitted by: Signature Title Firm Address Telephone Date Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/ or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Pre -installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. G. Starting of systems and equipment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy, work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated equipment and materials. B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures, heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities. D. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout procedures related to achieving Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the Work. E. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. G. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Training Owner personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. H. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: t. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. D. Project Record Documents. Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. E, Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 2. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. F. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. G. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. 1.06 COORDINATION A. See Section 01 1000 - Summary, for occupancy -related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. D. _Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit; as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. . Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. H. After OWNER occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of OWNER's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections. match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C_ Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over -ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work_ Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, OWNER, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect reference points. _ D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. E. Protect and preserve permanent reference points during construction. - F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. I. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. J. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading and fill placement; utility EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation and ground floor elevations. K. Periodically verify layouts by same means. L. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.06 ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Separate areas in which alterations are being conducted from other areas that are still occupied - 1 . ccupied.1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings. C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications: take care to prevent water and humidity damage. 1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior enclosure weatherproof. 2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by alterations work. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. _ 2. •Relocate items indicated on drawings. 3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish, remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. E 7�;Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition, repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work, 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. G. Adapt existing work to fit new work: 1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect. 2. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. 3. Where a change of plane of 114 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review and request instructions. H. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match. 3. Patch as specified for patching new work. I. Clean existing systems and equipment. J. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury. K. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.. L. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. 3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, td uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non- conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. B. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. C. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. E. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. H. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. 1. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site, do not burn or bury. 3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffds of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.10 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Nofify Architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-6 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY correctly. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training. 3.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Section 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by OWNER prior to final completion before OWNER occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean filters of operating equipment. F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. G. Clean site, sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site, dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Refer to Section 01 7700. B. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and OWNER. C. OWNER will occupy all of the building as specified in Section 01 1000 - Summary. 3.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections for 1 (one) year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of the OWNER. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-7 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contract closeout procedures related to - 1 . o:1. Substantial Completion of the Work and 2. Final inspection and Owner's acceptance of the Work. B. Closeout submittals including: 1. Substantial Completion documents. 2. Final Application for Payment with supporting documents. 3. Project Record Documents. 4. Warranties and Bonds. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section GC -1 - General Conditions: Performance and Payment Bonds, warranty, and correction of work. B. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures for shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section 01 7800 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. D. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Operation and maintenance instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Individual product sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. F. Individual product sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion: Submit three copies of required forms and related documentation certifying that status of Work is consistent with "Substantial Completion". B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide three sets of revised documents in final form for use by Owner's personnel. Submit at least 45 days prior to date of Declaration of Substantial Completion. C. Material and Product Warranties: Submit fully executed manufacturers' warranties within ten days following Date of Substantial Completion except as follows: 1. For equipment and component parts of equipment put into service during construction with OWNER"S permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance; list date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period . 2. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance; list date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. D. Contractor's Statement of Final Completion: Submit two copies of required forms certifying that Work has been fully completed; make submittal within 45 days after Date of Substantial Completion. E. Claim for Final Payment: Submit two copies of required final Application for Payment forms together with supporting documents. F. Evidence of Payments and Release of Liens: Submit two copies of required forms with claim for Final Payment. G. Project Record Documents: Submit required Record Documents with claim for Final Payment. 1.04 COORDINATION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and inspection of the work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly closeout procedure. with provision for accommodating items installed later. B. Final Utility Connections: Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements for final connections. 1.05 PRE- SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION MEETING A. Convene 30 days before submitting Declaration of Substantial Completion for purpose of reviewing required closeout procedures with representatives of Owner and Architect. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate completion and ensure clean-up of work of separate sections of the Project Manual. B. The Owner intends to occupy the entire project area at Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Comply with additional requirements in Section 01 7800. 2. Include operating instructions and maintenance data prepared by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described equipment and systems. 3. Use Operating and Maintenance Manuals as reference for instruction of Owner's personnel. B. Demonstration and Training: 1. Comply with additional requirements in Section 01 7900. 2. Prior to Substantial Completion, perform demonstration and train Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of equipment and systems designated in individual sections of the Project Manual. C. Preliminary Inspection for Substantial Completion: - - 1. Schedule and conduct preliminary inspection of the Work accompanied by Owner's Project L'"' -Representative. a. Determine and identify items to be listed for correction and completion (punchlist) on Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion. 2. Verify that surface finish materials are properly installed in accordance with manufacturer's .recommendations and exposed surfaces are clean and free from damage. 3. Verify final adjustment of operating items, equipment and system components to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. ',. 4. Verify specific operating and performance requirements described in individual specification sections. a. Secure certification by TAB contractor that testing, adjusting and balancing work has been completed, and respective systems are performing in accordance with specified design requirements. b. Replace filters of operating equipment. 5. Verify that utility services are properly connected and of the correct characteristics. 6. Verify inspection and acceptance of the respective portions of the Work by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DOCUMENTS A. Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion: 1. Provide the necessary assurance that the progress of the Work is consistent with Substantial Completion as defined by the Contract Documents. 2. Upon receipt of the required forms the Architect will schedule and conduct a Substantial Completion Inspection. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Certificate of Substantial Completion: Upon verification of Contractor's Punchlist, and subsequent determination by Architect that status of Work is suitable for occupancy by the Owner, the Architect will prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA Doc G704-2000). C. Complete and correct respective items of work listed and attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion within 30 days following Date of Substantial Completion. 3.03 FINAL CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS A. Contractor's Statement of Final Completion: Certify that the Work is complete and has been inspected and found to be in compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Claim for Final Payment: 1. Prepare application for payment on approved forms. 2. Amount of final payment shall be the Contractor's retainage (5% of the contract amount). 3. In accordance with Iowa law, final payment shall become due and payable 31 days after the date of Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work. C. Evidence of Payments and Release of Liens: Prepare the following: 1. "Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" (AIA Doc G706). 2. "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens" (AIA Doc G706A). a. Include separate waivers of lien from subcontractors, suppliers, and others with lien rights against property of the Owner. 3. Obtain "Consent of Surety to Final Payment'' (AIA Doc 5707). D. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit one set of the following Record Documents; record actual revisions to the Work: a. Drawings b. Specifications - - c. Addenda - d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. e. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by the Owner. 3. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: a. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. b. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. c. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. 4. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: a. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. b. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. c. Field changes of dimension and detail. d. Details not on original Contract Drawings. E. Material and Product Warranties, - 1. Obtain required warranties executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with OWNER'S permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial Completion is determined. 2. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. 3. Co -execute warranty documents when required. 4. Retain warranties until time specified for submittal. 5. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals; indicate on Table of Contents. 3.04 FINAL INSPECTION OF THE WORK A. Following submittal of required closeout documents, the Architect will conduct a Final Inspection CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWACITY of the Work. B. Accompany Owner's Project Representative and Architect on final inspection of the Work. C. Complete items of work determined and identified during final inspection. 3.05 OWNER'S FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK A. Upon satisfactory completion of the Work, the Architect will recommend acceptance of the completed Work by the Owner and final payment to the Contractor. B. The Owner will notify the Contractor in writing of the effective date of their acceptance of the Work. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. D. Evidence of payments and release of liens. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section GC -1 - General Conditions: Additional requirements for progress payments, final payment, changes in the Work. B. Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. D. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Operation and maintenance instruction of Owners personnel. E. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. F. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 45 days prior to "Substantial Completion". This copy will be reviewed and returned, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets required prior to final submission. 3. Submit three sets of revised final documents in final form at least 15 days prior to "Substantial Completion" for use by Owner's personnel during demonstration and training activities. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with OWNER'S permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. D. Evidence of Payments and Release of Liens: Submit required documents to Architect with Application for Final Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by OWNER. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction. referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A�:'. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B.. Produef.Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to Installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. _Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. _ Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product. Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data; with catalog number, size, composition. and color and texture designations. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories. Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions, and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. L. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. M_ Include test and balancing reports. N. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. , 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. - c:' B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project, identify subject matter of contents. E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. J. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with OWNER's permission, leave dale of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. 3.07 EVIDENCE OF PAYMENTS AND RELEASE OF LIENS A- Execute "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims' (AIA Doc G706)_ B. Submit "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens" (AIA Doc G706A), together with: 1. Separate waivers of lien from subcontractors, suppliers, and others with lien rights against property of the Owner. C- Obtain "Consent of Surety to Final Payment" (AIA Doc G707). END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 017823 • OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Operation and Maintenance Data. B. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section GC -1 - General Conditions: Warranty, and correction of work. B. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Contract closeout procedures. D. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Operation and maintenance instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. F. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Preliminary Draft: Prepare two copies before start of Work. Indicate proposed formats and outlines of contents. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 45 days prior to "Substantial Completion". This copy will be reviewed and returned, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets required prior to final submission. 3. Submit three sets of revised final documents in final form at least 15 days prior to "Substantial Completion" for use by Owner's personnel during demonstration and training activities specified in Section 01 7900. B. Product and Material Warranties: Obtain required manufacturer's warranties; assemble original documents in separate three-ring binder to be submitted within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 1. Ensure that manufacturer's warranties have been completed in OWNER's name and registered with respective manufacturer. 2. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. 1.04 PRE -SUBMITTAL MEETING A. Convene 15 days before starting work on revised Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the purpose of reviewing Architect's comments on preliminary draft. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project, identify subject matter of contents. E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text: fold larger drawings to size of text pages. H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect. Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the fallowing: a. Significant design criteria. 4-b. List of equipment. C. Parts list for each component. d.. Operating instructions. _ e.: Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a, Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. J. -Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect and Contractor with name of responsible parties, schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenances Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions,- and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. L. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. M. Include test and balancing reports. N. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 WARRANTIES A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with OWNER's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. C. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of OWNER personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. All software -operated systems. 2. HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Plumbing equipment. 4. Electrical systems and equipment. 5. Conveying systems. 6. Items specified in individual product Sections. C. Training of OWNER personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for: 1. Roofing, waterproofing, and other weather -exposed or moisture protection products: 2. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes. 3. Fixtures and fittings. - 4. Items specified in individual product Sections. - 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 7800 -Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Training Plan: OWNER will designate personnel to be trained, tailor training to needs and skill - level of attendees. 1. Submit to Architect for transmittal to OWNER. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. G. Name of firm and person conducting training: include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor. C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data. D. Training Reports: 1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. 2. Sign -in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to supporting documentation required for clarification: include answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session. 4. Include Owner's formal acceptance of training session. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate preparation of operation and maintenance data specified in Section 01 7823. B. Schedule work to ensure demonstration and training sessions are completed prior to request for Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by OWNER. B. Demonstration may be combined with OWNER personnel training if applicable. C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Non -Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. B. OWNER will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor. .G. Provide training in minimum two hour segments. D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of OWNER'spersonnel to be trained, re- schedule training sessions as required by OWNER; once schedule has been approved by OWNER failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for OWNER to charge Contractor for personnel "show -up" time. E., Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals. F. Product- and System -Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal and disposal of existing equipment, structures, and associated work. PART 2 PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION " 3.01 PREPARATION 4/17/2013 A. Site Inspection: 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect entire site and work areas, and all objects designated to be removed and to be preserved. 2. Contractor is responsible for determining actual site conditions, extent to which demolition is required, and method of demolition, 3. Demolition work shown on Drawings is intended to represent general intent only. Demolition shall be complete and adequate for intended purpose and all necessary work, in addition to work indicated on plans and specifications, shall be included. 4. 5. Locate all existing utilities and determine all requirements for disconnecting and capping. B. Clarification: 1. Drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site or work areas. Review Work shown on Drawings and sections and verify that conditions as indicated are representative of in-place construction, C. Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility services within demolition areas shown on Drawings. D. Mark location of disconnected utilities. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Exercise extreme caution in removing adjoining construction, walls, structure and framing so as to preserve the structural integrity, finish and appearance of the existing construction or wall shown to remain B. Protect Work from injury by keeping all piping capped and plugged or otherwise protected. This includes damage by freezing and/or stoppage from building materials, sand, dirt, or concrete. C. Protect all equipment from damage during project; provide all tarpaulins, drop cloths, barricades, or auxiliary equipment D. Provide temporary shoring, bracing, and staging as may be required to ensure stability of construction and adjoining structures shown to remain. E. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary enclosures, barriers and security devices. F. Contractor shall be repair damagets) to surfaces not identified to be demolished to match existing at no cost to Owner. 3.03 TIME SEQUENCE COORDINATION A. In general, coordinate removals with replacement Work such as to coordinate with Owner's occupancy and construction phases, maintain security at building openings, fire exit requirements, etc. B. Coordinate removal of items from exterior walls with installation of permanent or temporary replacement materials such that the buildings are maintained weather tight at the end of each day. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. DEMOLITION Project #10140 0241 00-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3.04 REMOVAL OF PORTIONS OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. Cutting of structural support members shall not be permitted without prior approval of Owner. B. General: Following verification that active utilities serving work areas have been disconnected or rerouted, remove all designated existing construction as indicated, including all mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, etc., except for elements required to remain. C. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing foundation, supporting structural members, and construction. D. Completely remove items of construction so shown or specified to be completely removed. Where not shown to be completely removed, remove existing construction as necessary to clear new construction and properly receive or member with new construction in a neat and finished manner. E. Relics, antiques, and similar objects remain Owner's property. Notify the Owner in writing prior to removal and obtain written acceptance regarding removal method. F. All existing piping and equipment which interferes with the new work shall be removed and relocated. G. Where existing mechanical equipment, devices, control valves, piping, etc. interferes with any work, it shall be removed and relocated to another location where required. All existing equipment relocated shall be left in good operating condition. H. Existing piping in remodeled areas which are required to be extended, altered, or reconnected, shall be left in proper working order. Where existing pipes are required to be revised or which will be essential to the functioning of a particular system are cul or exposed due to construction changes, new connections shall be made in the most expeditious manner as required. Attention is called to the fact that all new piping and apparatus shall be connected to the existing systems so as to function as complete systems. Maintain continuity of all systems which pass through the remodeled areas and serve loads in other areas of building. I. Where existing piping is shown on the drawings, it is shown for reference only and exact routing of existing piping shall be determined on the job site by Contractor. 3.05 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL A. All items of material removed, except those to be reused or turned over to Owner are to be removed from site. B. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses- Site shall remain thoroughly clean of all - rubble, debris, unused material, and left in good order. Upon completion of work, leave areas in clean - condition_ C. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered- D_ ' No burning or burying of materials on site will be permitted. E. Disposal shall be in accordance with all applicable requirements for disposal of construction waste. 3.06 s REPAIRS AND PATCHING A. Provide repairs, patching, and patch painting of existing structure as required for installation of Work. B. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by skilled craftsmen in respective craft. C. Furnish lintels and supports for openings. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. DEMOLITION Project #10140 0241 00-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 02 4119 — SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with all applicable requirements and standards. 2. SUBMITTALS A. Record Documents: 1. Schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition Work to Owner's Representative for review prior to start of Work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. a. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal Work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations. b. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building and with Owner's partial occupancy of completed new addition. 2. Photographs of existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations. File with Owner's Representative prior to start of Work. 3. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition Work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations_ Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations. B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition Work. C. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition Work. D. Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets. walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. E. Do not use cutting torches for removal until Work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame cutting operations. F. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities. except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. 2. Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. G. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. PART 2 PRODUCTS GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall be become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the Site with further disposition of the Construction's option. B. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to the Owner, which may be encountered during demolition, remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119- 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 3 EXECUTION- 1. PREPARATION A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 1. Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. 2. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. a. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. 2. INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. 3. DEMOLITION A. Perform selective demolition Work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete Work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power driven masonry saw or hand tools, do not use power driven impact tools. 2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing, 3. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Demolish foundation walls to a depth of not less than 12 inches below existing ground surface. Demolish and remove below grade wood or metal construction. Break up below grade concrete slabs. 5. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible. 6. Completely fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition Work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches in diameter, roots, or other organic matter. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119- 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Remove culvert or sewer pipe for reuse by careful excavation of all material on the top and sides so that the pipe will not be damaged. Removal of sewer appurtenances shall be included for removal with the pipe. Remove pipe which are unsatisfactory for reuse, and dispose of, off the Project Site. C. Concrete parts of structures below the permanent ground -line shall be neatly squared off with reinforcement cut off close to the concrete. D. Dismantle steel structures or steel portions of structures in sections determined by the Owner's Representative. 1. The sections shall be of such weight and dimensions which permit convenient handling, hauling and storing. 2. Rivet and bolts connecting steel rail members, steel beams or girder spans and steel stringers of truss spans will be removed by cutting the heads with a cold cut then punching or drilling by a method that will not injure the member for reuse. 3. The removal of rivets and bolts from connections will not be required unless specifically indicated. 4. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall have the option of dismantling these members by flame cutting immediately adjacent to the - connection. 5. Flame -cutting will not be permitted when Drawings call for the structural unit to be salvaged in such a manner as to permit re -erection. In such cases, all members shall be carefully dismantled without damage, match marked with paint, and all rivets and bolts removed from the connections. E. Remove brick and stone structures by sledging the masonry into removal sizes. Portions of such structures below the permanent ground -line, which will not in any manner interfere with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least two feet below the permanent ground -line and neatly squared off. F. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. 4. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Back -fill to the level of the original ground -line, all excavation made in, and all openings below, the natural ground -line caused by the removal of old structures or portions thereof. B. That portion of the back -fill which will support any portion of the roadbed or paving shall be placed in layers of the same thickness as those required subgrade preparation. 1. Material in each layer shall be wetted uniformly, if required, and shall be compacted to the density required in the adjoining embankment. In places inaccessible to blading and rolling equipment, mechanical or handtampers shall be used to obtain the required compaction. C. Place that portion of the back -611 which will not support any portion of the roadbed or paving in such a manner, and compact, to preclude settling. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119- 4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 5. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove from building Site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off Site. 1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on the Project Site. 6. CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of demolition Work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from the Project Site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. 1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition Work. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119- 5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floors and slabs on grade. B. Separate concrete floor toppings. C. Concrete foundation walls and footings. D. Joint devices associated with concrete work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete, American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 1999, C. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988. G. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. H. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. I. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2004a. J. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2004a. K. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic -Cement Concrete, 2003. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY L. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2004a. M. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. N. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2001. O. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2004. P. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2003. Q. ASTM C 1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999. R. ASTM C 1116 - Standard Specification for S. ASTM C 1240 - Standard Specification for T. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004. U. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs, 1997 (Reapproved 2004). 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A: The project design is based on the following minimum compressive strengths for various cast -in-place concrete components: 1. Foundation walls and footings: 3500 psi. 2. Interior Slabs -on -grade: 4000 psi. 3. Exterior Paving: 4000 psi. B. Do not permit superimposed loads to be applied to concrete components until at least 75 percent of minimum design compressive strength has been achieved. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction for concrete accessories. D. Proposed Mix Design(s): Material proportions for each class of concrete; indicate compressive strength development at 7, 28, and 90 days; indicate alkalinity (pH) of hardened concrete sample at 90 days. E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B, Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. 1. Take precautions to minimize plastic shrinkage cracking. Coordinate with additional requirements in Section 03390. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK 2.02 REINFORCEMENT 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal Portland type. _ B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100. Provide "GranCem" cement supplied by Holcim Inc. E. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. 1. Provide products manufactured by one of the following: CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY a. The Euclid Chemical Company; www.euclidchemical.com. b. Grace Construction Products, www.na.graceconstruction.corn. 2. Do not use air entrainment admixture in concrete for interior floor slabs. Provide products from same manufacturer as other admixtures used. B. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 4941C 494M, Type A - Water Reducing. 1, Provide mid-range water -reducing admixture allowing 12-15 percent reduction of water content in concrete mix. Z Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. 3. Acceptable Products: a. "Eucon MR" manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. 'Daracem 65" manufactured by Grace Construction Products. 2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II acrylic non-redispersable type. B. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi -layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum -reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 2.06 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 114 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile. B. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel; 0.028 inch thick, formed to tongue and groove profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge. C. Bond Break Material: Self -adhering flexible flashing. Acceptable product: "Flex -Flash" Cavity Wall Flashing manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.: www.h-b.com. D. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 9005. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard, or as _ recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions. E. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Cementitious Materials Content: Minimum 525 Ib per cubic yard. a. Fly Ash Content (Contractor's Option): Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. b. Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag Content (Contractor's Option): Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 2. Ratio of Water to Cementitious Materials (percent by weight): a. Footings and foundation walls (air -entrained): Maximum 50 percent. b. Reinforced building framing members (water reducing admixture): Maximum 45 percent. c. Paving and exterior slabs -on -grade (air -entrained and water reducing admixture): Maximum 45 percent. 3. Total Air Content: 7 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size - Footings and Foundation Walls: 1 inch. 5. Maximum Aggregate Size - Floor Slabs: 3/4 inch. 6. Maximum Aggregate Size - Floor Toppings with depth less than 2-112 inches: 112 inch. 2.08 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. B. Reduce mixing and delivery time to less than 60 minutes when air temperature is 90 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY degrees F or higher. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. B. Verify proper installation of vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. B. Install self -adhering bond break material on interior vertical wall surfaces to separate perimeter of interior slabs on grade from vertical surfaces. Extend bond break material horizontally under slab at least 6 inches and tape seal to sheet vapor retarder. C. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. D. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non -shrink grout. F. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings; repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R; comply with requirements for "flat" floors. C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-6 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY E. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. F. Separate exterior slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. G. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. L Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07 9005. J. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. L. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. M. Place floor slabs in saw cut pattern indicated. N. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 1/8 inch thick blade, cut into 1/3 depth of slab thickness. O. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 3/16 inch in 10 ft. 3.04 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS A. Prior to placing floor topping, remove deleterious material. Broom and vacuum clean. B. Apply bonding agent to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels. Place topping in checkerboard panels not to exceed 20 ft in either direction. D. Screed toppings level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1:1000. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height, Provide additional finishing as follows: Grout cleaned finish for exposed wall surfaces: a. Begin cleaning operations after all contiguous surfaces to be cleaned are accessible and properly prepared for finishing. b. Grout: Use one part portland cement and 1-1/2 part fine sand mixed with sufficient water to produce a grout with the consistency of thick paint. c. Wet concrete surface to limit absorption of water from the grout; apply grout uniformly with brushes or rubber floats. d. Immediately after application of grout, scrub surface vigorously with firm rubber float to coat the surface and completely fill air bubbles and holes. e. While grout is still plastic, remove excess grout by working surface with cork float. f. After the surface whites from initial drying (about 30 minutes at normal temperatures), rub vigorously with clean burlap. g. Immediately after finishing, apply water mist to wall surfaces, maintain damp surface for at least 36 hours after final rubbing. 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION A. General, Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hat, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. A. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. B. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified. O- Provide moisture curing by the following methods' 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. - 2. Use continuous water fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. D. Provide moisture retaining cover curing as follows: CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-8 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. E. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: 1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete. F. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. G. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide an independent testing agency to perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 014000. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 391C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 75 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-9 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. 3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-10 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 05 10 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES 4/17/2013 A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment, services, and tools necessary to complete structural steel installation as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Suppliers and Personnel. 1 _ Steel fabricator shall have not less than five years' continuous experience in fabrication of structural steel_ 2. Steel erector shall have not less than five years' continuous experience in erection of structural steel_ 3. All welding shall be performed by operators who have been recently qualified as prescribed in "Qualification Procedure" of American Welding Society (except for welds which do not carry calculated stress). Codes and Standards= 1. International Building Code. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction's (AISC) specifications for "Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings'_ 3. American Welding Society's (AWS) "Structural Welding Code - Steel", AWS D1.1, latest edition. 4. AISC specification for "Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administrator's (OSHA) "Occupation Safety and Health Standards'. 6. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Specifications. 7. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 8. ASTM A53 - Hot -dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. - 9. ASTM A233 - Structural Welding 10. ASTM A325 -H - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints- _ - 11. ASTM A307 - Anchor bolts - 12. ASTM A500 - Cold -formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. _ 13. ASTM A500 Grade B - Steel Tubing - 14_ ASTM A992 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS r A. Prior to fabrication, and in accordance with General Conditions, three (3) sets of shop drawings shall be submitted to Architect/Engineer for approval. No fabrication shall begin until drawings have been approved by Architect/Engineer. B. Shop drawings shall show size, shapes, locations, quantities, and materials. Drawings shall also indicate methods of connection, anchoring, fastening, and bracing (all clearly distinguishing field welding and bolting from shop work). Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Where field dimensions are possible to obtain before shop drawings are made, those dimensions shall be shown on drawings and noted as having been verified in field. D. All steel members shall be matchmarked on erection drawings. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: 1. Store structural steel members at project site above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. 2. Store other materials in a weather -tight and dry place until ready for use in work 3. Store packaged materials in their original unbroken package or container. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC_ STRUCTURAL STEEL Project #10140 05100C_ 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 4/17/2013 A. All materials shall conform to following standard unless otherwise noted. 1. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36, or ASTM A992 Grade 50, as indicated on drawings. 2. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. 3. High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325 -F. 4. Structural Welding Materials: ASTM A233, Class E70 series electrodes. 5. Anchor bolts: ASTM A-307, size and type as indicated on Drawings. 6. Grout: Non -shrink, non-metallic grout. Five Star Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; V-1 Grout by W. R. Meadows; Sonogrout by Sonneborn; Masterflow 713 Grout by Master Builders. 7. Miscellaneous Anchors: 8. Primer: Prime all structural steel with primer compatible with finish coatings to be received, equal to: a. Sherwin Williams: B-66 Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. Verify that structural steel may be fabricated and erected in strict accordance with original design, approved shop drawings, and referenced standards. B. Discrepancies: 1. In event of discrepancy, immediately notify ArchitecVEngineer. 2. Do not proceed with fabrication or installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 FABRICATION A. All design and fabrication shall be done in accordance with latest edition of AISC specifications. AWS code, and OSHA standards. -B. Fabricate all structural steel in strict accordance with approved shop drawings and referenced standards. C. Connections: -- _ 1. All connections shall be standard framed, double angle, web connections unless otherwise shown on ` - - drawings. If no reaction or details are shown at end of a beam on drawings, beam's connections shall - be designed for one-half total uniform load capacity of a laterally supported beam. 2. - All shop and field connections shall be made with 314 inch diameter A325 high strength bolts unless - - otherwise shown on drawings or approved by Architect/Engineer. 3. All beams framing into existing columns or beams shall have slotted holes for adjustments. After steel is plumbed and connections tightened, field weld connection to beam. 4. Joints of beams or bracing member shall be concentric about their center of gravity to avoid eccentric loadings on connections. Where this is not possible, connection shall be designed for eccentricity. 5. Connections and splice plates of bracing members shall be designed to develop total capacity of net section of bracing members. D. Shop Cleaning and Priming: 1. Shop paint all structural steel one coat, except: a. Steel to be encased in concrete. b. Surfaces to be field welded. c. Contact surfaces to be high strength bolted_ 2. Thoroughly clean all steel to be encased in concrete, E. Appearance: 1. Exposed welds are to be tiniform and neat: edges cut or sheared (not burned): faces free of globs or runs of paint. F_ Punch or drill for temporary field connections and for attachment of work by other trades. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. STRUCTURAL STEEL Project #10140 05 10 00 - 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/1712013 CITY OF IOWA CITY G. Straightness of Structural Members 1. Members: Per AISC Specifications. 2. Straightness of architecturally exposed structural steel comply with AISC Specification for Architecturally Exposed Steel. 3.03 PAINTING A. Structural steel surfaces at steel in exterior walls and at exterior exposed steel and canopies, shall be prepared for shop painting as required for prime paint application as specified herein. 6. Immediately after cleaning or sandblasting (on same day) one shop coat of primer shall be applied to all structural steel surfaces except those surfaces which will be field welded. All areas within 2 inches of these filed welds shall not be painted C. Apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 2 mils (0 050 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2- Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Each structural steel member shall he clearly match marked in coordination with erection shop drawings so as to aid steel erection. E- After structural steel is erected, all field welds, areas around field welds, and all scratches and mars of paint shall be power tool cleaned per SSPC-SP3 and touched up with shop prime paint. 3.04 WELDING A. General_ 1. For details of joints, comply with requirements for AWS joints accepted without qualification tests. 2. Use ASTM A-233, E-70 series electrodes. , 3. Follow applicable sections of AWS specifications. 3.05 ERECTION A- General: - 1. All erection shall be done in accordance with latest edition of AISC specifications, -AWS code, and OSHA standards. 2. Erect all structural steel in strict accordance with Drawings, approved shop drawings, and all pertinent regulations and standards- - B. Contractor shall be responsible for unloading and storing steel at site. Storage areas shall be approved by Owner prior to actual steel shipment. C. All bearing plates and column base plates shall beset on steel shims of sufficient size to support dead load of structure. After structure has been plumbed, leveled, and bolted, grout beneath plates per grout manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Areas of grout net vertically contained shall be formed as required to contain flow of grout. D. No finish materials shall be used for erection or temporary purposes. E. Material shall be handled so that members will not be bent, broken or otherwise damaged. F. Members shall not be distorted by hammering. G. Field burning and cutting is not permitted. H. Each day before leaving site, Contractor shall securely brace structural steel using permanent and temporary bracing as necessary to take care of all loads to which structure may be subjected. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety. L As erection progresses work shall be securely bolted or welded to take care of all stresses to which structure may be subjected. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC- STRUCTURAL STEEL Project #10140 051000-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/1712013 J- Do not told cut or alter members without approval of Architect/Engineer through UI Construction Manager. K. After erection is completed structure shall be plumb and level, and shall conform to elevations and dimensions as shown on Contract Drawings. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of erection, structural steel frame may be tested for plumb and lightness of connections by an independent agency employed by Owner. B. Inspection of Field Assembled High Strength Bolted Construction will be in accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Joints. C. Inspection of Field Welds will be in accord with AWS Building Code or ASTM. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS,. INC. STRUCTURAL STEEL Project #10140 051000-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 05 30 00 GRATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed metal grating. 1.02 REFERENCES 4/17/2013 A. AWS A2 4 -Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society, 2007. e, AWS D1.101.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel, American Welding Society; 2006. C. NAAMM MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual; National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2000 (ANSIINAAMM MBG 531). 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A_ Load Design: NAAMM MEG 531. B Design Live (Truck) Load: H-20 (8000 Ib concentrated force min.). C. Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240; size components by single support design. D. Maximum spacing between bars: 1-318" 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide span and deflection tables. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate details of component supports, openings, perimeter construction details, and tolerances. 2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special requirements for opening and perimeter framing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A_ Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. B. Coordinate work with placement of frames. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. McNichols Co., Rectangular Bar Grating HWC series. GHB series, or pre -approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cross Bars: ASTM b211 (ASTM 8211 M) solid bars. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. GRATING Project #10140 053000-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Saddle Clips. B. Perimeter Closure: of same material as grating. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Grating Type: NAAMM MBG 531, Pressure Locked Type. B. Fabricate grates to accommodate design loads. C- Mechanically clinch joints of intersecting metal sections. D. Fabricate support framing for openings. E. Top Surface: Smooth unless noted otherwise on Drawings. F. Finish: Black powder coat. G. Heavy weld 3" x %" bars 1-3/8" an center with 4" bearing bars. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes and dimensional tolerances are acceptable. B. Verify that supports are correctly positioned. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place frames in correct position, plumb and level. C. Anchor by clips. D. Set perimeter closure flush with top of grating and surrounding construction_ L. Secure to prevent movement. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to NAAMM MBG531. B- Maximum Space Between Adjacent Sections: 1 - 3/8". C- Maximum Variation from Top Surface Plane of Adjacent Sections: V8% - END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. GRATING Project #10140 053000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. B. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2004a. C. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2004. E. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2004. F. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. G. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2000. H. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 1998. I. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel, American Welding Society; 2004. J. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - CARBON STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 572 or A 36.. B. Steel Tubing (HSS): ASTM A 500, Grade B cold -formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 36. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black and hot -dip galvanized finish, as indicated. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: Modified alkyd; "Series 10 Tnemec Primer" manufactured by Tnemec Company Incorporated, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. H. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: "Series 27 Typoxy" manufactured by Tnemec Company Incorporated., complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. www.secosouth.com. , 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and -shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. ' Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY A. Steel Pipe Railing: 1. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, Pipe: galvanized finish after fabrication to ASTM A 123; 1.3 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. B. Steel Rail Posts: 1. ASTM A 36 steel plates and shapes in sizes and configuration indicated on Drawings. Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123; 1.3 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. C. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish. D. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of masonry; galvanized finish. E. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish. F. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel sections; prime paint finish. 2.04 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry and items specified for Galvanized finish. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Prime Painting: One coat. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC- SP6. D. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. E. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out -of -Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 05 53 00 GRATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 4/17/2013 A. Formed metal grating. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007. B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel, American Welding Society; 2006. C. NAAMM MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual; National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2000 (ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531). 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Load Design, NAAMM MBG 531. B. Design Live (Truck) Load: H-20 (8000 Ib concentrated force min.). C. Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240; size components by single support design. D. Maximum spacing between bars: 1-3/8" 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide span and deflection tables. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate details of component supports, openings, perimeter construction details, and tolerances. 2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths - C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special requirements for opening and perimeter framing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings_ B. Coordinate work with placement of frames. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. McNichols Co., Rectangular Bar Grating HWC series, GHB series, or pre -approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cross Bars: ASTM b211 (ASTM B211 M) solid bars. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. GRATING Project #10140 055300-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4117/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Saddle Clips. B. Perimeter Closure: of same material as grating. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Grating Type: NAAMM MBG 531, Pressure Locked Type. B_ Fabricate grates to accommodate design loads. C_ Mechanically clinch joints of intersecting metal sections. D. Fabricate support framing for openings. E. Top Surface: Smooth unless noted otherwise on Drawings. F. Finish: Black powder coat. G. Heavy weld 3" x'/" bars 1-3(8" on center with 4' bearing bars. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes and dimensional tolerances are acceptable. B_ Verify that supports are correctly positioned. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place frames in correct position, plumb and level. C. Anchor by clips. D. Set perimeter closure flush with top of grating and surrounding construction. E. Secure to prevent movement 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to NAAMM MBG531. B. Maximum Space Between Adjacent Sections: 1 - 3(8". C. Maximum Variation from Tap Surface Plane of Adjacent Sections: 118". END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. GRATING Project #10140 055300-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES B. Preservative treatment of wood. C. Fire retardant treatment of wood. D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. E. Telephone and electrical panel boards. G. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AFPA T10 - Wood Frame Construction Manual; American Forest and Paper Association; 2001. B. ASTM A 1531A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2004. C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. D. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood -Preservers' Association; 2002. E. AWPA C9 - Plywood -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood - Preservers' Association; 2003. F. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber -- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Woad -Preservers' Association; 2002. G. AWPA C27 - Plywood -- Fire -Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood - Preservers' Association; 2002. H. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood - Preservers' Association; 2005- L PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood, National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce), 1995. J. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard, National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005, 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: Any agency with rules approved by American Lumber Standards Committee. B. Preservative -Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC- accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation - PART 2 nstallation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings. B. Moisture Content: S -dry or MC19. C. Stud Framing (2 x 2 through 2 x 6) 1. Species: Douglas Fir -Larch. 2. Grade: Structural Select. D. Joist and Small Beam Framing (2 x 6 through 4 x 16 ): 1. Species: Douglas Fir -Larch. 2. Grade: Structural Select. E. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring. and Nailers: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 1 or Construction Grade. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Wall or Roof Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C -D, Exposure I. B_ Other Applications: 1. Concealed Plywood: PS 1, C -C Plugged, exterior grade. 2. Exposed Plywood: PS 1, A -D, interior grade. 3. Electrical Component Mounting: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative -treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2.._ Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. B,- $ill•Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 114 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from coritinuous rolls. 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A.,, Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. B. Preservative Treatment: C. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC313, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC2 and UC3B. Commodity Specification F (Treatment C9) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Wen ft retention. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY c. Treat plywood in other locations as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Extend partition framing to structure above in all locations. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing at each end. F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. G. Frame openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. H. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD A. Place sill gasket directly on cementitious foundation. Puncture gasket cleanly and fit tightly to protruding foundation anchor bolts. B- Coordinate installation of wood decking and glue laminated structural units. C. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. D. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A- Wall SheathingSecure with long dimension parallel to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails or screws. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000- 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood door frames, glazed frames. ; C. Wood casings and moldings. D. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004. B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) -Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2003. C. HPVA HP -1 -American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood, Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2004. D. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce), 2005. F. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, accessories, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to 1 ft. D. Samples: Submit two samples of finished wood trim 12 inch long. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom grade. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. B. Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. FINISH CARPENTRY 062000- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Lumber. NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade II/Custom, average moisture content of 5-10 percent: species as follows: 1. Exposed Surfaces for transparent finish: Species Red Oak. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Species Poplar. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Hardboard: AHAA135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 114 inch thick, smooth one side (SIS). 2.04 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application: Paint finish in concealed locations and paint finish in exposed locations. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, and Backing: Softwood lumber of S/PIF species. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color_ 2.06 HARDWARE A. Selected by fabricator subject to approval of Architect. B. Comply with BHMAA156,9. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide thin for scribing and site cutting. 2.08 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work in accordance with Woodwork Institute Manual of lvlillwork, Section 5, System #5 - catalyzed polyurethane. E. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building Items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work_ 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000- 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1132 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. C. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: See Section 09 9000 - Paintings and Coatings. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1116 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1132 inch. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000- 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 07 9005 - JOINT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Precompressed foam sealers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2000. B. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002. C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2002. D. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005. E. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials --Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2000. F. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed -Cell Foam); 1997. G. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products, www.baagmd.gov, current edition. H. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168, current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 1!4x2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. JOINT SEALERS 079005- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; multi- component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Acceptable products: a. Product: "NP 2" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. b. Product:'DYmeric" 511 manufactured by Tremco Incorporated. c Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. C. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Sealing under thresholds at exterior doors. e. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. C. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with water repellent; 1. Color: Black. 2. Size as required to provide weathertight seal when installed. 3. Provide product recommended by manufacturer for traffic -bearing use. 4. Acceptable products: a. Product: "Polytite Standard" manufactured by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. b. Product: "Will -Seal 250" manufactured by Illbruckl USA. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior wall expansion joints. D. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Acceptable products: a. Product: 'Tremco 440 Tape" manufactured by Tremco Incoporated. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Non -compression glazing of vision lights in metal frames. b. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. E. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. C61or. Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Acceptable products: a. Product: "Sonolac" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. b. Product: "Tremflex" 834 manufactured by Tremco Incorporated. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Applications. Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. G. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. F. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone: ASTM C 920. Uses I, M and A, single component, mildew resistant. 1. Acceptable products: JOINT SEALERS 07 9005- 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY a. Product: 'Dow Corning 786" Mildew -resistant silicone sealant manufactured by Dow Corning Corporation. b. Product: "OmniPlus" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. G. Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-112, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non -skinning. 1. Product: "TremcoAcoustical Sealant' manufactured byTremco Incorporated. 2. Applications: Use for concealed locations only: a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor. H. Interior Floor Joint Filler: Semi -flexible epoxy; ASTM D 638; multi-component. 1. Calor: Gray. 2. Shore A hardness: 80-85. 3. Acceptable products: a. Product: "Joint -Loc 80" manufactured by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. b. Product: "Epolith - P" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. - 4. Applications: Use for: a. Saw -cut contraction joints in floors. I. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self -leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T, 1, M and A; single component. 1. Calor: Gray. 2. Product: "SL 1" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. J. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, neutral curing, non -sagging, non -staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Acceptable products: a. Product: 'Dow Corning 795' Silicone Building Sealant manufactured by Dow Corning Corporation. b. Product: "Spectrem 2" manufactured by Tremco Incorporated. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 6. Applications: Use for: a. Structural and nonstructural glazing of glass, metal and plastic.. b. Weatherproofing perimeter joints around metal frames. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing, Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1056, sponge or expanded rubber; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION JOINT SEALERS 07 9005- 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193, D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width -to -depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch, avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections, install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 07 9005-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 08 1100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -fire -rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 087100 -Door Hardware, B. Section 088000 -Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 099000 -Paints and Coatings: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council, 1998, B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI -100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. C. ANSI A250.10 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998. D. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2004a. E. DHI A115 Series -Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1100- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSUICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smoothfaces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non -removable stops on non -secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.02 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 1, full flush. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -Iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1100-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Interior Doors, Non -Fire -Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush. 2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb or polystyrene foam. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2.03 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. C, a. Interior Level 2 Doors: 16 gage frames. b. Exterior Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames. c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 2 2. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing 4. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 5. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 6. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 6531A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710. C. Interior Door Frames, Non -Fire -Rated: Fully welded type. D. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1100-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800. B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C. Astragals for Double Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Steel, Z-shaped. D. Grout for Frames installed in masonry walls: Portland cement grout of maximum 3 - inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop -assembled frames. 2.05 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust -inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high -build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1100-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1100-5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: interior window components with requirement for glass. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. C. Section 08 1100 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 16 CFR 1201 -Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 1999 (Reapproved 2005). C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2002. D. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001, E. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass --Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2004. F. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005. G. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings, 2004, H. GANA (GM) -GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004, I. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990, 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures of 20 Ib/sq ft positive and negative. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE GLAZING 08 8000- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. S. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Clear Float Glass: Clear, annealed. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. 6 mm minimum thick. B. Safety Glass'. Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select) and ASTM C 1048. 2. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 3. 6 mm minimum thick. 4. Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code. a. Glazed lites in doors except fire doors. b: Glazed sidelights to doors. C. Low E Glass: Float type, heat strengthened, clear. 1, Coating on inner surface. 2. -Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type L transparent flat, Quality 03 (glazing select). 3. Comply with ASTM C 1048. 4. 6 mm minimum thick. D.` Laminated Glass: Laminated glass conforming to ASTM C1172, consisting of 2 sheets of clear float glass, 1(8 inch thick, complying with ASTM C 1036. Type I, Class 2, laminated with a 0.030 inch thick polyvinyl butyral interlayer by manufacturer's standard heat -plus -pressure process with dirt, air pockets, and foreign substances excluded. 2.02 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS. Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color, non -skinning. B. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non -staining, non-bleeding; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; Share A Hardness Range 20 to 35. C. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non -staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M. A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25. 2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square fool of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1116 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. GLAZING 08 8000- 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. C. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C 864 Option I. D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's glazing recommendations. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on glazing materials to attain full weathertight contact. D. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. E. Apply cap bead of silicone type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION GLAZING 08 8000- 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 092116 -GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. Fire rated area separation walls. B. Acoustic insulation. C. Gypsum wallboard. D. Joint treatment and accessories. E. Level 5 finish system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 1999. B. ANSI A118.9 -American National Standard Specifications for Cementiticus Backer Units; 1999. C. ASTM C 36/C 36M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 2001. D. ASTM C 442/C 442M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board, 1999a. E. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002. F. ASTM C 514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board, 2004. G. ASTM C 557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing, 2003. H. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing, 2001. I. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2004a. J. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2004. K. ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2004. L. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board, 2004. M. GA -600 -Fire Resistance Design Manual, Gypsum Association, 2003. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA -600 for fire -rated assemblies. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum five years of documented experience. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY A. Gypsum Wallboard. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Regular Type: a. Application: Use for ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. b. Thickness: 518 inch. c. Edges: Tapered. 2. Type X: Fire resistant, HE or WH rated. a. Application: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Thickness. 5/8 inch. C. Edges: Tapered. 3. Abuse -Resistant Type. Gypsum wallboard especially formulated for increased impact resistance, with enhanced gypsum core and heavy duty face and back paper. a. Application: Vertical walls around areas Vestibule 116, Safe Deposit 126, and Drive Up 125 . b. Core Type: Type X, as indicated. C. Thickness: 5/8 inch. d. Edges: Tapered. B. Gypsum Shaftwall or Corebcard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; Type X core, sizes to minimize joints in place, 1 inch thick, square, tongue and groove, or double beveled edges, ends square cut. 2.02 FIBERGLASS FACED BOARD MATERIALS A. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9, aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces, 1/2 inch thick. 2.03 LEVEL 5 FINISH SYSTEM A. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex -based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish. B. Acceptable Products: 1. "Level Coat' manufactured by Magnum Products: www.levelcoat.com. 2. "SHEETROCK Brand Primer-Surfaceer, TUFF -HIDE" manufactured by US Gypsum Company. 3. "ProForm Brand Surfacer/Primer" manufacturered by National Gypsum Company. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, thickness matching depth of wall framing, unfaced. B. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C 1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise -indicated. __ 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. --2. at Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U -bead atezposed panel edges. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. E. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self -piercing tapping type. F. Nails: ASTM C 514. G. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application: to rigidly secure materials in place. H. Adhesive for Attachment to Wood: ASTM C 557, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116- 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence' " 3.02 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install as follows: 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 3. In non -fire -rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough -in boxes. 3.03 GYPSUM BOARD AND GLASS MAT FACED BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single -Layer Non -Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Double -Layer Non -Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. D. Gypsum Soffit Board: Install perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints over framing members or other solid backing. E. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over wood framing members where walls are to receive tile. 1. Comply with ANSI A108.11. 2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. F. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing authority. For non -rated assemblies, install as follows: 1. Single -Layer Applications: Adhesive application. 2. Double -Layer Application: Install base layer using screws or nails. Install face layer using adhesive. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as follows - 1 . ollows:1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 25 feet long. 2. Locate over doors aligned along each jamb. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.05 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 and as scheduled below. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and fixed cabinetry. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116- 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications. C. Apply skim coat of topping compound over entire surface after joints have been properly treated to achieve Level 5 finish. D. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness, 118 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.07 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE A. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view. B. Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry. C. Level 5: Walls and ceilings exposed to view_ END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 09 3000 - TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for Non -ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 -American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 1999. 1. ANSI Al08.1a -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 2. ANSI Al 08.1 b -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 3. ANSI A108.1 c -Specifications for Contractors Option. Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wel-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 4. ANSI Al 08.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999. 5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 1999- 6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999. 7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout; 1999. 8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999. 9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999. 10. ANSI All 8.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999. 11. ANSI A118.4 -American National Standard Specifications for Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 12. ANSI A118.7 -American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 1999. 13. ANSI All 8.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout: 1999. 14. ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile; 1999. 15. ANSI A137.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 1988. B. TCA (HB) -Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. TILING 09 3000- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 4 sq. It of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products of each type by the same manufacturer. 1. Dal -Tile: www.daltile.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 PORCELAIN TILE A. Homogeneous porcelain tile; ANSI Al 37. 1, and as follows: 1. Basis of Design: "Daltile', style: "Colorbody Porcelain / Timber Glen" 2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 3. Size and Shape: 4 inch x 24 inch, square. 4. Pattern: Perpendicular to the simulated grain surface of the adjacent laminate flooring. 5. Group: "Rustic". ., 6. Color: "Hickory", P611. 2.04 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A— Non -Ceramic Trim: Solid brass, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Transition between floor finishes. 2. Manufacturer: a. Schluter -Systems: www.schluter.com. b. Model: "RENO -T". 2.06 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 1. Portland Cement type: thin -set, unmodified, dry set mortar complying with ANSI All 8.1. 2.07 GROUT MATERIALS A. Grout: Polymer modified cement grout, sanded, complying with ANSI All 8.7. 2.08 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Uncoupling Membrane: 118 inch thick polyurethane matting with three-dimensional grid structure with dovetail shaped cavities and fleece webbing laminated to the underside to provide TILING 09 3000- 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY a mechanical bond to the substrate adhesive. 1. Acceptable Product: "DITRA" by Schluter Systems. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor -mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed_ F. Install non -ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. L Allow file to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. J. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated_ K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN -SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dry - set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated_ B. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile. 3.05 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. Over cementitious backer units install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W223, organic adhesive. 3.06 CLEANING TILING 09 3000- 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION TILING 09 3000- 4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 09 9000 — PAINTING AND COATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards. 2. DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. B. "Substrate" as used herein means the surface to which paint is to be applied. In the case of previously painted existing surfaces, substrate means the surface to which the existing paint was applied. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. C. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. E. Odor Eliminating Additive: At all locations scheduled to receive solvent or alkyd - based coatings, provide an odor -eliminating additive to minimize the presence of odor from wet and drying paint films. 1. Provide additive recommended and approved by the primer/finish coat manufacturer for use with their paint. Benjamin Moore does not recommend an "odor eliminator additive' for Benjamin. Moore Paints. 2. Subject to compliance with above requirements, "Bio Zapp Paint Odor Eliminator" by Bio Zapp Laboratories, (941/922-9199) is acceptable. 4. SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 1. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY :-J a. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 2. Samples for verification purposes: a. Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. b. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. c. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. d. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. e. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. f. Submit samples an the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: B. Product Data: 1. Concrete: Provide two 4 inch square samples for each color and finish. 2. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4 by 8inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. 3. Painted Wood: Provide two 12 by 12inch samples of each color and material on hardboard. 4. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 by 8inch samples of natural and stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces. 5. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4 inch square samples of flat metal and two 8 inch long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 6. Drywall: Provide two 12 by 12 -inch samples of each color and finish. 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts and descriptive information on each product used. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. C. Record Documents: Provide record approved samples and product data. DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.' 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 degrees C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 6. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterbased paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). B. Apply solventthinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1. MANUFACTURES PPG Industries, Inc. www.ppq.com Benjamin Moore Paints www.ben'aminmoore.com Glidden Professional www.gliddenprofessional.com 2. PAINT SCHEDULE One PPG Place Pittsburgh, PA 15272 101Paragon Drive Montvale, NJ 07645 15885 West Sprague Road, Strongsville, OH 44136 A. Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. Provide only the listed prime and finish coat materials unless otherwise recommended in writing by the paint manufacturer for each specific substrate. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Where specific finish paint material is not indicated, refer to notes and finish schedules for finish paint material and gloss levels for each surface to be painted. 3. EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete and Concrete Block, 2 finish coats of Exterior Flat Acrylic Emulsion (over block -filler on CMU): 1. Block Filler for CMU: a. PPG: 4-603 Perma-Crete Alkali Resistant Primer. b. Benjamin Moore: 160 super spec Latex Block Filler. c. Glidden Professional: 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler. 2. Finish Coat: a. PPG: SunProof Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex 72-45. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec H.P. Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss. G. Glidden Professional: Fortis 350 Exterior Semi -Gloss Paint 2406V Series. 3. Ferrous Metal; 2 finish coats of water borne <semigloss><gloss> acrylic enamel over primer: 4. Rustlnhibiting Primer: -- ; _- a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Primer 90-712. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss Rust Inhibitive. c. Glidden Professional: Devflex 4020 PF Direct to Metal Primer and Flat Finish . 5. Finish Coat: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Satin Direct to Metal 90-474- b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss Rust Inhibitive. c. Glidden Professional: Devflex Lifemaster Oil Interior/Exterior Eggshell 1502 Series. B. Galvanized Metal; 2 finish coats of water borne <semigloss><gloss> acrylic enamel over primer: 1. Galvanized Metal Primer: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Primer 90-712. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY c. Glidden Professional: Devflex 4020 PF Direct to Metal Primer and Flat Finish. 2. Finish Coat: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Satin Direct to Metal 90-474. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi - Gloss. c. Glidden Professional: Devflex Lifemaster Oil InterioOExterior Eggshell 1502 Series. C. Aluminum; 2 finish coats of water borne <semigloss><gloss> acrylic enamel over primer. 1. Aluminum Metal Primer: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Primer 90-712. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi -gloss. c. Glidden Professional: Devflex 4020 PF Direct to Metal Primer and Flat Finish. 2. Finish Coat: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Satin Direct to Metal 90-474. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss. c. Glidden Professional: Lifemaster Oil Interior/Exterior Eggshell 1502 Series. D. Plaster -Stucco; 2 finish coats of Exterior Flat Acrylic Emulsion over primer: 1. Exterior Primer: - a. PPG: 4-603 Perma-Crete Alkali Resistant Primer. b. Benjamin Moore — N066 Super Spec 100% Acrylic Masonry" Sealer. c. Glidden Professional: 3030 Concrete Coatings Bond -Prep. Bonding Primer. 2, Finish Coat: a. PPG: Sun Proof Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex 72-45. b. Benjamin Moore: N105 Moorlife 100%Acrylic flat house paint. c. Glidden Professional: 2200V Fortis 350 Flat Finish. E. Wood; 2 finish coats of Exterior Flat Acrylic Emulsion over primer: 1. Exterior Primer: PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY a. PPG: Sun Proof Exterior House & Trim Flat Latex 100 percent Acrylic Primer 72-1. b. Benjamin Moore: 046 BM Fresh Start All 100% Acrylic Superior Primer. c. Glidden Professional: 6001 Hydrosealer Exterior Primer. 2. Finish Coat: a. PPG: Sun Proof Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex 72-45. b. Benjamin Moore: N105 Moorlife 100% Acrylic Flat House Paint. c. Glidden Professional: 2200 Fortis 350 Flat Finish. 4. INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete and Concrete Block, 2 finish coats (over block -tiller on CMU): 1, Block Filler for CMU' a. PPG: Speedhide 6-7 Latex Block Filler. b. Benjamin Moore: 160 Super Spec Latex Block Filler. c. Glidden Professional: 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler. 2. Finish Coat: a- PPG: Pure Performance Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 9-500. b. Benjamin Moore: N376 Eco Spec WB Semi -Gloss Finish. c. Glidden Professional: Lifemaster 9200 Interior 0 VOC Semi -gloss. _ 3. Heavy duty block filler for CMU industrial grade. a. PPG: 16-90 Pitt -Glaze Acrylic Block Filler. b. Benjamin Moore: P31 Super Spec HP Waterborne Epoxy Block Filler. c. Glidden Professional: 4000-1000 Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler. 4, Finish Coat Industrial Grade: a. PPG: 16-551 Pitt -Glaze WB Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy. h. Benjamin Moore: P42 Waterborne Polyamide Epoxy coating. c. Glidden Professional: Tru Glaze WB 4415 Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy B. Gypsum Drywall, 2 finish coats over primer. 1. Primer 1A: a. PPG: Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer 9-900. b. Benjamin Moore: N372 Eco Spec WB interior latex primer. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-6 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY c. Glidden Professional: LM 9116 Lifemaster 0 VOC Primer. 2. Finish Coat 1A: a. PPG: Pure Performance Interior Latex Eggshell 9-300. b. Benjamin Moore: N374 Eco Spec WB Eggshell Finish. c. Glidden Professional: LM 9300 Lifemaster 0 VOC Interior Eggshell. C. Plaster; 2 finish coats over primer: 1. Primer: a. PPG: Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer 9-900. b. Benjamin Moore: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer N372. c. Glidden Professional: LM 9116 Lifemaster 0 VOC Interior Primer. 2. Finish Coat: a. PPG: Pure Performance Interior Latex Eggshell 9-300. b. Benjamin Moore: N374 Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell. c. Glidden Professional: LM 9300 Lifemaster 0 VOC Interior Eggshell. D. Ferrous Metal; 2 finish coats of water borne semi -gloss acrylic latex enamel over primer: 1. Waterborne Acrylic Primer: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Primer 90-712. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss. c_ Glidden Professional: Devflex 4020 PF Direct to Metal Primer and Flat Finish, 2. Finish Coat: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Satin Direct to Metal 90-474. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss. c. Glidden Professional: Lifemaster Oil Interior/Exterior Semi -Gloss Paint 1506 Series. E. Galvanized Metal; 2 finish coats of water borne semi -gloss acrylic latex enamel over primer: 1. Waterborne Acrylic Galvanized Metal Primer: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Primer 90-712. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-7 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY c. Glidden Professional: Devflex 4020 PF Direct to Metal Primer and Flat Finish. 2. Finish Coat: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Satin Direct to Metal 90-474. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- glass - c. Glidden Professional: Lifemaster Oil Interior/Exterior Semi -Gloss Paint 1506 Series. F. Aluminum: 2 finish coats of water borne acrylic latex enamel over primer: 1. Waterborne Acrylic Galvanized Metal Primer: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Primer 90-712. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss. c. Glidden Professional: Devflex 4020 PF Direct to Metal Primer and Flat Finish. 2. Finish Coat: a. PPG: Pitt -Tech 100 percent Acrylic Satin Direct to Metal 90-474. b. Benjamin Moore: P29 Super Spec HP Direct to Metal Acrylic Semi- gloss. c. Glidden Professional: Lifemaster Oil Interior/Exterior Semi -Gloss Paint 1506 Series. G. Wood, 2 finish coats over primer: 1. Primer: a. PPG: Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer 9-900. b. Benjamin Moore: 046 BM Fresh Start All 100% Acrylic Superior Primer. c. Glidden Professional: Lifemaster 9116 0 VOC Primer. 2. Finish Coat: a. PPG: Pure Performance Interior Latex Eggshell 9-300. b. Benjamin Moore: N374 Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell. c. Glidden Professional: 9300 Lifemaster 0 VOC Interior Eggshell. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-8 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 3 EXECUTION 1. PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers and existing surfaces, or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral fiber reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation_ a. Use abrasive blast cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application_ Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and rinse, allow to dry and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-9 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2. INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations 3. APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-10 a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean non -galvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. . - a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPCSP 10. a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. _- a. Touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire brush, clean with solvents recommended by the -J paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. 2. INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations 3. APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-10 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. Painting of mechanical, electrical, and plumbing items is limited to exposed natural gas piping, exposed fire sprinkler piping, and roof top exhaust fan hoods. Items in mechanical and electrical rooms shall not be field painted unless otherwise scheduled on Drawings. C. At "unoccupied" interior areas, painting is not required on prefinished items or finished metal surfaces. 1. Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 2. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 3. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or builtin fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. E. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-11 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4. CLEANING F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 1. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 5. PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning. repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "wet paint' signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING AND COATINGS 09 90 00-12 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers- _ B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 10. B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions and rough -in measurements for recessed cabinets. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features and color and finish. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Dry Chemical Type: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class 4A-60B:C. 2. Size 10 lbs. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, red color. B. Carbon Dioxide Type: Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage - 1 . age.1. Finish: Baked enamel, red color. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type. 1. Exterior nominal dimensions of 13 Inch wide x 27 inch high x 6 inch deep. 2. Trim: Flat, 5/16 inch wide face. 3. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles. C. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity, latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch. D. Door Glazing: Full Glass, clear, 118 inch thick tempered. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre -drill for anchors. F. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish. G. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome -plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 28 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers in cabinets and on wall brackets, 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Provide a Dry Chemical Type with Cabinet for both upstairs and downstairs. Reference the drawings for location. END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400- 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 10 4410 - PLASTIC SIGNS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Engraved plastic signs. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plastic Signs: 1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.corn. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ENGRAVED SIGNS A. Engraved Signs: Laminated colored plastic; lettering engraved through face to expose core color: 1. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/ICC A117.1, including Braille. 2. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch. 3. Edges: Square. 4. Character Font: Helvetica. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Hardware: Chrome screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION PLASTIC SIGNS 104410-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install signs after surfaces are finished, in locations indicated. C. Position sign on the wall adjacent to the strike side of the door, 60" above the floor. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Rest Room Door Graphic: 6 inches (150 mm) high, "male' and "female" graphic image; black color, located adjacent to restroom doors. END OF SECTION PLASTIC SIGNS 104410-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet Room Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS B. Section 09 2621 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ATBCB ADAAG -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; 2004. B. ASTM A 240/A 240M -Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2005. C. ASTM A 554 -Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2003. D. ASTM F 446 -Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area; 1985 (Reapproved 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected options and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project. 2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project. 3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied by manufacturer of products of this section. D. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product. E. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer of TOILET ACCESSORIES 108100-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY products of this section, and countersigned by Contractor. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing products of the types specified in this section. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ADAAG requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory -apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight -exposed surfaces after finishing of products; ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in product workmanship and materials. C. Manufacturer's 15 -year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: www.bobrick.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: www.bobrick.com. 2. Bradley Corporation, Washroom Accessories Division: www.bradleycorp.com. 3. Substitutions: Section 016000 -Product Requirements. C .Supply'all products of this section from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 2401A 240M, Type 304, 18-8 alloy. No.4 satin finish. TOILET ACCESSORIES 108100-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2.03 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Basic Construction Requirements: 1. Doors: Fabricated from minimum 0.0313 inch stainless steel sheet, formed hems at sight -exposed edges; welded corners, finished to match sheet finish. 2. Cabinets: Fabricated from minimum 0.0313 inch stainless steel sheet, formed hems at sight -exposed edges; all joints welded, sight -exposed welds finished to match sheet finish. 3. Hinges: Stainless steel piano hinge, 3/16 inch diameter barrel, full length of cabinet; hinge leaves spot-welded to door and cabinet body. 4. Locks: Tumbler locks, keyed alike other toilet accessory locks, with two keys for each lock. 5. Stainless Steel Finish: No.4 satin B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Model B-2620. C. Paper Towel Disposal: Model B-275. D. Toilet Paper Holder: Model B-6867. E. Heavy Duty Wall Hook (WH): Model B-2116. 2.05 GRAB BARS A. Grab Bars - Basic Requirements: Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a 900 pound force, from ASTM A 554 stainless steel tubing, 0.050 inch, Type 304, 18-8 alloy; formed 1-1/2 inch radius return to wall at each end; each end heliarc- welded to minimum 11 gage stainless steel circular flange; welds finished to match tube finish. B. Grab Bars (GB): Series B-6806. 1. Sizes and configurations: As indicated on drawings. C. Grab Bar Snap -on Mounting Flanges: Snap -on stainless steel cover, 3-1/4 inch diameter by 1/2 inch deep, for concealing grab bar mounting flange. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 8100 - 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work to be performed under this Division shall include all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, construction plant and facilities necessary to provide a complete and satisfactory system ready to use. Examine all drawings and all sections of specifications to ascertain to what extent other contracts affect work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of contractor: All materials and equipment shall be new and all work shall be executed with maximum speed consistent with current accepted trade practices. Furnish materials and equipment promptly after authorization to proceed, and proceed with work in progress with contractor on project. Perform all work included in contract in a manner that will not cause interferences or delays to, or interfere with, progress of contractor. B. Requirements of regulatory agencies: 1. Permits: Arrange and pay for all permits, inspections and utility connections required. 2. Referenced standards: a. Comply with specified codes and standards. If conflict exists between codes or standards and drawings, project manual or addenda requirements, request clarification from Architect/Engineer. b. Conform to installation rules and regulations of standards listed including all subsequently published amendments thereto issued prior to date of bidding documents. c. Conform to requirements of all local, state and federal agencies, which have authority over this project. Include all items of labor and material required to meet such requirements regardless of failure to specify in project manual or indicate on drawings each individual item. d. All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and installed with applicable industry standards. e. Applicable portions of latest editions of following standards form a part of this project manual to same force and effect as if repeated herein. 1) American Gas Association, Inc. (AGA) 2) American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 3) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 4) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5) American Water Works Association (AWWA) 6) National Electrical Code (NEC) 7) National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 8) National Fire Protection Association (NEPA) 9) Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): 10) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 11) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 12) Department of Public Health (DPH) 13) Iowa Plumbing Code, Current Edition -- 1.03 COORDINATION & SUBMITTALS ._ A. Contractor shall resolve all conflicts before actual installation begins. Order of space preference throughout building shall be: -- 1. Recessed light fixtures 2. Duct work 3. Soil, waste, vent and storm piping 4. Domestic water piping 5. Sprinkler piping 6. Electrical conduit 7. Exception: Plumbing lines below or behind plumbing fixtures shall have precedence over all other work. Electrical conduit above or below switchgear, panel boards and control panels shall have precedence over all other work. Do not install any fluid conveying piping over electrical or elevator equipment. 8, Submit following Certifications: a. Fire Protection INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #10140 220500-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY b. Welding c. Insulation d. Air & Water Balance e. Domestic Water Disinfection 1.04 STARTING, TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING A. See sections 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1.05 WARRANTY A. Guarantee all work including labor, material and equipment for this project for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. In order to become familiar with scope of work involved, visit existing site, before submitting bid, and carefully examine existing condition in order to have full knowledge and understanding of conditions and restrictions affecting performance of work required. Include in bid all work which is reasonably inferred by contract drawings and specifications, whether specifically shown or not, as a result of existing conditions, construction, irregularities and interferences which may affect work. No additional compensation will be considered for misunderstanding conditions to be met. B. Layout shown on drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as other work will permit. Changes from these drawings required to make this work conform to building construction shall be made only with prior written approval of Architect/Engineer. All proposed changes shall be shown on shop drawings. All measurements shall be verified by actual observation and all work shall fit in place meeting approval of ArchitecUEngineer. C. Contractor shall provide openings required in new and existing construction that may be necessary for installation of mechanical work and all patching and workmen competent in trade required, at expense of contractor shall do repairing. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging work so that minimum cutting will be required. All rubbish and excess materials involved in such cutting shall be promptly removed from site and disposed of by contractor. Cutting through floor or roof systems or load bearing walls shall be done only with prior written approval of Architect/Engineer so as to avoid damaging structural system. ` D. Sequencing, scheduling- 1. Confer with contractor regarding location and size of pipes, equipment, ducts, openings and special - - - architectural treatments in order that there may be no interferences between installation or progress of -_ - -work of contractor on project. order of space preference shall be as listed above. 2. In case of interconnection of work of two or more contractors, verify at site or on shop drawings all dimensions relating to such work. All errors due to failure to so verify any such dimensions shall be :promptly rectified. All line voltage wiring and final connections to complete mechanical systems shall be provided by Electrical Contractor. All electrical conduit, wire, and connections relating to mechanical equipment - controls and all wiring associated with starter holding coils, shall be responsibility of contractor installing mechanical equipment unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Contractor installing mechanical equipment shall be responsible for magnetic motor starters where such starters are part of control package of equipment supplied. All other starters shall be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor. Contractor installing starters that are part of a control package shall coordinate starter requirements with Division 26 of specifications_ 4. Access panels, in walls or ceilings, required for access and maintenance (i.e., automatic or manual damper, fire or smoke damper, coil or control instrument mounted in a duct or pipe) shall be provided by respective contractor. Access panels are not required in areas where ceiling system is lay -in tile: however, sufficient space must be available in and through ceiling system to allow maintenance and adjustment of dampers, and cleaning of coils as necessary, or a suitable access panel shall be provided for that purpose_ Access panels shall be approximately 15 inches by 18 inches wherever possible and shall be provided with flush trim and an allenkey operated camlock fastener. Karp, Milcor, or Bilco shall manufacture panels. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #10140 220500-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/1 712 01 3 5. Items of equipment may be specified in singular however, provide and install number of items of equipment as indicated on drawings and as required for a complete system. 6. Each contractor shall provide excavating, pumping, backfilling, and compacting required for installation of their respective work as shown on drawings. 7. Equipment and devices furnished and installed by mechanical contractors, which have factory prime coat, or final surface finish shall be replaced, repaired or refinished 9 defective or damaged during installation. 8. Arrange all work so a minimum period of interruption or outages will occur in temporary or permanent transfer of services as required for all mechanical revisions. Not less than 48 hours notification to Owner shall be required before approval will be granted for any disruption of gas, water, or sanitary services. Outage request shall include extent of work to be done, length of outage time required, and time at which outage is to begin. No allowance will be made for extra payment as a result of scheduling "overtime" work necessary to perform before or after normal or regular working hours to accomplish work intended. 9. Submit a "Sequence of Work Schedule" in respect to all temporary and permanent utility and service cutovers after final determination. This schedule shall be submitted for approval to Architect/Engineer. Submittal shall designate priority order, service or utility affected, date of cutover, and time of day to start and finish. 3.02 CLEANING A. Upon completion of contract all remaining materials and rubbish shall be removed from building and premises and work areas shall be left clean and free from stains, mortar, paint spots, etc B. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with embossed or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in presence of Owner's designated representative to insure that their function and purpose is understood. C. Upon completion of work, put systems into service maintaining responsibility for equipment during all testing operations including lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus. END or SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC- COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #10140 220500-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 4/17/2013 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hangers and supports for Plumbing Systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute, ACI: 1. ACI 301: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 304: Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 3. ACI 347: Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. 4. American Society of Testing and Materials, ASTM: a. ASTM A82: Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. b. ASTM A185: Welded Steel Wire Fabric For Concrete Reinforcement. c. ASTM C33: Concrete Aggregates. d. ASTM C150: Portland Cement. e. ASTM C171: Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. f. ASTM C260: Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. g. ASTM C309: Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. In ASTM C404: Aggregates for Masonry Group. 1) American National Standards Institute, ANSI: a) ANSI B31, 1: Power Piping. (1) Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI: (2) CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. (3) Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, MSS: (4) MSS SP -58: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. (5) MSS SP -69: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. (6) National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA: (7) NEMA ML 1: Metal Framing (Continuous Slot Metal Channel Systems). (8) Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc., SMACNA- (9) Duct Hangers: SMACNA Duct Manuals. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA: 1. NFPA 13: Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2, NFPA 14: Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 3. NFPA 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 4. Underwriter's Laboratories/Factory Mutual, UL/FM: a. Provide products UL listed and FM approved. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Hangers and Supports: 1. Mason Industries: www.mason-industries.com. 2. Nibw: www.nibco.com. - 3. PHD Mfg, Inc: www.phd-mfg.com. 4. ITT Grinnell Corp: www.grinnell.com. _ a. Saddles and Shields: 1) Mason Industries: www.mason-industries.com 2) Pipe Shields, Inc: www.pipeshieldsinccom. ' 3) PHD, Mfg., Inc.: www.l)hd-mfg.corn. - 2.02 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide factory fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports, in compliance with ANSI SP -6,8 and ANSI SP -69. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Project #10140 220529-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. 2. Select hangers and supports sized to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping; and to exactly fit around pipe insulation with saddle and shield for insulated piping. 3. Provide rubber or neoprene lined pipe ring isolators and copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping systems. 4. Type: a. Adjustable Steel Clevises: MSS Type 1, 2.03 VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS A. Provide factory fabricated vertical piping clamps, in compliance with ANSIIMSS SP -58 and ANSI/MSS SP - 69. 1. Select vertical piping clamps sized to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. 2. Provide rubber or neoprene lined pipe ring and copper plated clamps for copper piping systems. a. Type: 1) Four -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. 2.04 HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS A. Provide factory fabricated hanger rod attachments, in compliance with ANSI/MSS SP -58 and ANSI/MSS SP - 69. 1. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. 2. Select Size of hanger rod attachments to suit hanger rods. 3. Provide copper plated hanger rod attachments for copper piping systems. a. Type: 1) Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. 2.05 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. Provide factory fabricated building attachments, in compliance with ANSIIMSS SP -58 and ANSIIMSS SP -69. 1. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. 2. Provide copper plated building attachments for copper piping systems_ a. Types: 1) C -Clamps: MSS Type 23. 2) Steel Brackets: One of following for indicated loading: a) Light Duty: MSS Type 31. b) Medium Duty: MSS Type 32. c) Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33. 2.06 SADDLES AND SHIELDS _ A. Provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory fabricated, for all insulated piping . _ 1.. • Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. a. Types: 1) Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. 2) Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing -- insulation. 3) Thermal Hanger Shields: a) Constructed of 360 insert of high density, 100 psi waterproofed calcium silicate. encased in 360 sheet metal shield. b) Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. 2.07 SPRING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A_ Provide factory fabricated spring hangers and supports, in compliance with ANSI/MSS SP -58 and ANSI/MSS SP -69. 1. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. 2. Select spring hangers and supports to suit pipe size and loading. a Types: 1) Spring Cushion Hangers: MSS Type 48 2) Constant Supports: Selected to suit piping system, including auxiliary stops for erection and hydrostatic test, and field load adjustment capability. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Project #10140 220529-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY a) Horizontal Type: MSS Type 54. b) Vertical Type: MSS Type 55. c) Trapeze Type: MSS Type 56. 2.08 PIPE SLEEVES A. Where pipes pass through walls and suspended ceilings, provide pipe sleeves of No. 18 gauge galvanized iron, V2 inch larger than insulated pipe or bare pipe outside diameter. B. Pipe passing through floors and foundation shall be provided with sleeves of standard weight galvanized steel pipe. Sleeves shall be at least 1 inch largerthan bare pipe and 1/2 inch larger than insulated pipe outside diameter. Ends shall be cut square and smooth and finish flush with surface of building construction. Where specifically noted, ends shall extend 1 inch above floor and edges chamfered. 2.09 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Provide locations of roof penetrations to Roofing Contractor for Coordination. 1. Roofing Contractor provides flashing material specified in Division 7. a. Provide flashings for each penetration of plumbing systems through floors, roofs or waterproof membranes. 2.10 FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL A. Caulk wall opening with fire retardant sealant whenever piping passes through fire rated walls or floors. B. Fire stopping materials shall consist of commercially manufactured products capable of passing ASTM E- 814 (UL 1479) Standard Method of Fire Test for Through Penetration Fire Stops. C. Fire stopping materials shall maintain the rating of the wall, partition or floor opening that penetration is made. D. Fire stopping materials shall be UL classified. E. Acceptable products: 1. 3M - Fire Barrier 2. Thomas & Betts - Flame Safe 3. Nelson Electric— Flameseal 4. Metacaulk 600-900 -- 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT MATERIALS A. Metal Framing: NEMA Standard ML 1. . B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ANSI/ASTM A36. - C. Hanger Rods: Steel; threaded both ends, threaded 1 end, or continuously threaded. D. Cement Grout: Portland cement: ANSI/ASTM C150, Type I or Type III; clean uniformly grades, natural sand, ANSIIASTM C404, Size No. 2; mix ration of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water for placement and hydration. E. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes. 1. Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads specified. 2. Weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. a. Pipe Guides: Factory fabricated cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated steel, including bolted 2 - section outer cylinder and base with 2 -section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe 1) Size guide and spiders to clear pipe, insulation, and cylinder. 2) Guides Length- Recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION PERFORMANCE A. Comply with MSS SP -69 for installation of hangers, supports, and anchors. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Project #10140 22 05 29 - 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/1712013 B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION A. Horizontal Steel and Copper Piping Support Spacing: 1 _ NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (INCHES) a. MAXIMUM HANGER SPAN (FEET) I HANGER ROD DIAMETER (INCHES) a) 1/2"to 1-1/4" 6' 3/8" b) 1-1/2" to 2" 10' 318" c) 2-1/2"to3" 10 1/2' d) 4` to 6' 10' 5M.. e) 8" to 12" 10' 7/8" f) 14' and over 20' 1" b. Install hangers, supports clamps, and attachments directly from building structure complete with inserts, bolts rods, nuts and washers, and accessories. ` - - 1) Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping; pipe support from other piping not permitted. _ 2) Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3) Place hanger within 1 foot of each horizontal elbow_ 4) Use hangers vertically adjustable 1-112 inch minimum after piping is erected_ 5) Horizontal Soil Waste and Storm Pipe Support: Near each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. B. Riser Pipe Support: Independent of connected horizontal piping where practical_ C. Prime Coat Finish 1. Prime coat all exposed steel hangers and supports. 2. Hangers and supports in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. D. Trapeze Hangers_ 1. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers_ 2. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers to accommodate smallest pipe; or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. E. Vertical Piping: 1. Support vertical piping at every other floor. F- Pipe Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems; to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors; and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement is not transmitted to connected equipment. G. Pipe Slopes: 1 _ Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes. 2. Do not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 _ H. Electrolysis. Prevent electrolysis to copper tubing with rubber or neoprene lined pipe ring isolators and copper plated hanger and supports or other recognized industry methods. I. Steel Joists: Connect at hangers and attachments to top chord of all steel joints. J. Insulated Piping: 1. Shields: a. Where low compressive strength insulations vapor barriers are specified on cold or chilled water piping, install coated protective shields. b. For pipe 8 inches and over, install wood insulation saddles. c. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Project # 10 140 220529-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 K. Structural support/anchor design is responsibility of the contractor unless otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings. Supportlanchor design calculation shall be provided to Engineer upon request. 3.03 BUILDING ATTACHMENT INSTALLATION A. Space attachments within maximum piping span indicated in MSS SP -69. B. Install additional building attachments when supporting additional concentrated loads; including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints and at changes in piping direction. C. Anchors: 1. Install anchors at locations preventing stresses from exceeding ANSI B31; and preventing transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. a. Install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. b. Preset anchors to accommodate loth expansion and contraction of piping. 1) Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure; in compliance with ANSI B31 and AWS. 2) Anchors for Expansion Compensators: Install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturers recommendations. a) Limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit. 3.04 PIPE SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. Pipe sleeves shall be securely bedded in the building construction. Sleeves shall finish flush with finished wall and ceiling lines. Note that where covering is provided, it shall extend continuously through sleeves. B. Sleeves installed in vertical positions shall be perfectly plumb. Provide with special collars secured to the pipes or to the ceiling construction to prevent the packing from falling out. Standard floor and ceiling plates herein specified for finished areas may be used for this purpose provided they are firmly secured to the pipes. C. Sleeves in horizontal positions shall be level. D. Locate, set, and maintained in position while surrounding construction work is being installed so that the center of each pipe shall be accurately installed in the center of the sleeve. E. Space between the pipe or the insulation and the sleeve shall be caulked to prevent light or air transfer. 3.05 FLASHING A. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through the roof, weather or waterproofed walls and floors. - 1. Accommodate specified roofing systems. 2. Ensure compatibility with number and type of roofing plies. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Lap flashings minimum 3 inches. 4. Embed metal flashing flanges in roofing or composition flashing or stripping, by extending flanges`' minimum 6 Inches for embedment. a. Pipes Through Outside Walls: Turn flange back into wall and seal. b. Curbs: 1) Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 12 inches minimum high. 2) Flash and counterflash with steel, soldered and waterproofed. 3) Provide flashing around ducts and pipes passing from equipment rooms, installed according to manufacturers data for sound control. 3.06 FIRE STOPPING A. All sleeves or openings shall be fire stopped to provide an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases and maintain the integrity of the partition, wall or floor. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Project #10140 220529-5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B_ Fire stopping materialsshallbe installed in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. 3.07 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Concrete: 1. Provide for major equipment reinforced concrete bases poured directly on structural floor slab 6 inches thick minimum, extended 4 inches minimum beyond machinery bedplates- 2. Formwork: ACI 347. a_ Chamfer external corners of exposed concrete work. b. Provide openings required by others. o. Use manufacturer's templates or certified setting diagrams for placement of equipment anchor bolts and other mounting accessories. d. Install accessories: Waterstops, expansion joints, and moisture barrier. 11 Reinforcement CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice. 2) Concrete Placement: ACI 301, 304. 3) Concrete Curing : ACI 301. 4) Concrete Finishing. a) Horizontal Surfaces: Float and trowel to level, smooth, uniform, dense finish; leave struck off surface untroweled; or scratch struck off surfaces. b) Depress top of concrete where supported work is set in mortar or sand bed. c) Curbs: Strip form while concrete is green; steel trowel to hard dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded and coved. (1) Concrete Grouting: Grout openings and recesses as indicated, around mechanical work using grouting mix, tamped, screeded, troweled and cured. (2) See individual equipment Sections for specification for fine grouting (nonshrink grout) of equipment base plates on foundation bases. (3) Field Quality Control: Contractor engages testing laboratory to take on site slump or compression tests to ensure compliance with specifications. e. Steel: Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure, 1) Supports: Structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. 2) Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration connections to equipment. f. Pipe Stands: Welded fabrication. 1) Provide flat plate supports for each leg, bolted to 6 inch high x 12 x 12 inch concrete base poured on floor. 2) Attach top of each leg to ceiling or roof structure as indicated or approved. 3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hangers and supports and place grout under supports to bring piping and ductwork to proper levels and elevations. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Project #10140 220529-6 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe Markers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number_ C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation: LA.bradvooro.00m. B. Champion America, Inc: LA .ChamQon-America.com. C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. 3. Background Color: Black. 2.03 TAGS A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. B. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.04 PIPE MARKERS A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1 or Iowa State University Standards or NFPA 13. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. C, Manufacturer: Seton Setmark, Brimar. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Project #10140 220553-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive paint. See architectural reflective ceiling plan for the extent and scope of work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers completely around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. E. Identify pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags. F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify valves In main and branch piping with tags. H. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install In clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. I. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T -bar type panel ceilings- Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment_ END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Project P10110 220553-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4/17/2013 s, A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007_ . B. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007. C. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004. D. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004, E ASTM C 534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2007a. F. ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2007. G. ASTM C 585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 1990 (Reapproved 2004). H. ASTM C 591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation; 2007. I. ASTM C 795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2003. J. ASTM D 2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006. K. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008. L. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. M. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. N. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description. 1. Indicate complete material data, mastics, and adhesives. 2. List of materials proposed for this project. Indicate thermal characteristics, list of materials, thickness for each service, and locations. a. Certification: 1) Certification to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. 2) Proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum 3 years of experience. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Project #10140 22 07 19 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4117/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver material to site in factory fabricated containers with manufacturers stamp or label, showing fire and smoke hazard ratings of products. B. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. C. Store material in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic. D. Protect against sun, dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. E. Remove damaged insulation from project site. Do not install. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation: _wwwAraufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www im com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscornino.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 5. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible. a. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 at 75*F. b. Maximum service temperature: 850`F. c. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 6. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film, moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 961E 96M of 0.02 perm -inches. 2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International: www.armacell.com. 2. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C 534 Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible. a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40'F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 220'1 c. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 3. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 2.04 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1.. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.Jm.com. 1) Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material in white color Conform to ASME 13.1 or ISU Standards a) Minimum Service Temperature: 0'F. - b) Maximum Service Temperature: 150"F. - - _ - c) Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with - _ ASTM E 96/11 96M. d) Thickness: 10 mil. e) Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Project #10140 2207 19-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.01 EXAMINATION A- Venfy piping has been tested before applying insulation materials - B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION - A. Insulation: Continuous through inside walls and at all hangers; pack insulation around pipes with fireproof self-supporting mineral wool insulation material, fully sealed. 1. Install adhesives at ambient and equipment temperatures recommended by adhesive manufacturer - 2. Fittings a. Hot Piping: 1) Do not insulate unions, flanges, strainers, valves, flexible connections, or expansion joints. 2) Terminate insulation neatly with mastic material troweled on bevel. 3) Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions or interruptions. 4) Ensure hangers and cradles are properly installed to avoid crushing insulation. 5) Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations. 6) Cold Piping: a) Cold Piping: Insulate all Fittings, including flanges, all valve bodies and devices, and all air separators associated with cold surfaces. Maintain vapor barrier integrity throughout. b) Cover fittings, valves, strainers, and flexible connections with equivalent thickness of insulation material. c) Apply 1 piece PVC cover on fittings and piping. d) Seal lap joints with 100% coverage of vapor barrier sealant and adhesive. e) Seal butt joints with 4 inch wide strips of vapor barrier sealed with vapor barrier adhesive; or use double self-sealing factory joints. f) Do not use staples on insulation for cold surfaces. 7) Hot Piping: a) Cover fittings with equivalent thickness of insulation material. b) Apply 1 -piece PVC cover on fittings and piping. 8) Insulate all condensate drains from equipment. 9) Install protective metal saddles and insulated inserts to prevent insulation compression. 10) Piping exposed to finish areas and in mechanical roams provide with white PVC jacket covers. 3. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: a. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. b. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 5. Inserts and Shields: a. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. It. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. c. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. d. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; maybe factory fabricated. e. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. 6. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Cold Water: a. Flexible elastomeric insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All a) Thickness: 1 inch INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC - Project #10140 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2, Domestic Hot Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: V2 inch to 1-1/2 inches a) Thickness: 1-1/2 inch 3. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2 inch to 1-1/2 inches a) Thickness: 1-1/2 inch END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 4/1712013 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 22 10 05 '• PLUMBING PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES , 4/17/2013 A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for domestic water piping systems. ' 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. B. ASME B16,3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006). C. ASME B16.4 -Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006). D. ASME B16.18 -Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18). E. ASME 316.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005). F. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2006. G, ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2001. H. ASME B31 A - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007 (ANSI/ASME B31.1). L ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004 (ANSI/ASME B31.9). J. ASME (BPV IV) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. K. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. L. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007. M. ASTM A 234/A 234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2007. N. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004. C. ASTM B 42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2002. P. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003. Q. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651). R. MSS SP -80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc-, 2003, S. MSS SP -110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PLUMBING PIPING Project #10140 22 10 05 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 1.03 SUBMITTALS 4/1 712 01 3 A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog Information. Indicate valve data and ratings. B, Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. Valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations. C. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Iowa plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B1 6.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.02 FLANGES, -UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A: Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1, Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2., Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. B. Dielectric Connections. Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.03 VALVES IN WATER LINES A. Check Valves 2.5 Inches Diameter and Smaller: Class 125 # SWP, 200 # WOG, horizontal swing check. body and cap shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze, TFE disc, integral bronze seats, MSS SP -80. B. Ball Valves 3 Inches Diameter and Smaller: 600 # WOG, 150 # SWP, 2 piece body style, CP brass tunneled ball, reinforced TFE seats, hex gland follower, bronze body of ASTM 8584, blow-out proof stem, lever handle. 2.04 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: 1. AGA Z21 22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, ASME rated. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC- PLUMBING PIPING Project #10140 22 10 05 - 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2.05 STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronainternational com. 2. Green Country Filtration: greencountryFltration.com. 3. WEAMCO: www.weamco.com. B. Size 2 inch and Under: 1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Strainers must be rated acceptable for domesticwater service. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. - B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. - -. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls, D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors. H. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. I. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. J. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. L. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. 3.03 EXECUTION A. Workmanship 1. Piping shown on Drawings shall be installed complete and shall be of size shown on Drawings. When a size is not indicated, request pipe size from Engineer. 2. All vertical offsets shall have a drip leg full size of pipe and a minimum of 6 inches long. 3. All piping shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the building construction. 4. All piping shall be installed to allow for expansion. 5. Perform all work in accordance with State of Iowa Plumbing Code. B. Joints 1. All pipe shall be reamed to full pipe diameter before joining. 2. Joints may be sweat or screwed. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PLUMBING PIPING Project #10140 221005-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 3. Screwed joints shall be made with standard pipe thread and approved compound applied to male thread only. 4. Use only shaped nipples, welding laterals, or saddle fittings for intersection welding of branches to mains. 5. Valves and specialties shall have screwed or flanged joints. C Testing 1. Entire system shall be tested per international plumbing code_ 2. Owner or Owner's representative to be present for all testing and provide final signature of acceptance. 3. See system startup. D. Sectionalized 1. Pipe may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate construction. Contractor will provide necessary fittings to accomplish testing. E. Protection 1. Piping shall be protected at all times from dirt and moisture. 2. During storage on job site or construction, keep pipe ends plugged or capped to prevent dirt or moisture from entering the pipe. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 3.05 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mglL residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinreclant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mgt L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 2 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AW WA C651. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PLUMBING PIPING Project #10140 22 1005-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 22 11 23 NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1,01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Natural gas pipe and pipe fittings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 411 712 01 3 A. Gas piping and connections to equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA-54, City of Iowa City Gas Code, and local utility company. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. 1. Pipe materials. 2. Pipe fittings ` 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME 631.9 and ASME B31.1 code for installation of piping system. - - - 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide factory -applied plastic end -caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent pipe -end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. - B. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NATURAL GAS PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A106 Carbon Steel, seamless black pipe. B. Flexible Stainless Steel Piping: ASTIR A240 Stainless Steel tubing with fire -retardant polyethylene plastic jacket. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A_ Ream pipe and tube ends- Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. D_ Whenever work is suspended during construction protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. E. After completion, fill, clean and treat systems. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements of ANSI Z 2231, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions, INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. NATURAL GAS PIPING Project #10140 22 11 23-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space. E Install gas shutoff plug valve in main, in each branch line and at each appliance. F. Install service plug valve at each outlet. G. Use sealants on metal gas piping threads that are chemically resistant to LP and natural gas. Use sealants sparingly and apply to only finale threads of metal joints. H. Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping. 1. Do not install defective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe with threads that are chipped, stripped or damaged. J. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with a threaded plug or cap immediately after installation, andretain until continuing piping or equipment connections are completed. K. Install dirt -legs in gas piping at connections to equipment and elsewhere as indicated, and where required by code or regulation. L. Install tee fittings with bottom outlet plugged, or capped, at bottom of pipe risers. M. Use dielectric unions where dissimilar metals are joined together. N. Install piping with 1/64" per foot (1 /8%) downward slope in direction flow. O. Installation of Valves: P. Gas Cocks: Provide at connection to gas train for each gas-fired equipment item; and on risers and braces where indicated. 1. Locate gas cocks where easily accessible, and where they will be protected from possible injury. 2 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 3.03 PIPE TESTING A. Prior to initial operation: Test and purge fuel gas piping in accordance with ANSI Z 223.1, National Fuel Gas Code. B. Piping Tests: 1. Using dry nitrogen, purge each segment to be tested. Cap or otherwise seal the segment to be tested. Fill system with dry nitrogen and test in accordance with NFPA 54. 2. Repair or replace fuel gas piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. 3. All welded pipe shall be pressure tested to 100 psig for a minimum period of one hour. Isolate equipment from piping during this test. Submit test results. C. Purge System: 1. After all segments have been tested and entire system completed, purge the system free of air in accordance with NFPA 54. Do not leave purge discharge points unattended. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. NATURAL GAS PIPING Project #10140 22 11 23-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mop (Utility) Faucet. B. Tankless Natural Gas Water Heater. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4117/2013 A. ASME At 12.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. B. ASME Z21.10-31CSA 4.3-2011 Gas Water Healers — Volume III. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. B. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Iowa State University's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MOP (UTILITY) FAUCET A. Acceptable manufacturers: t American Standard 8344.012 _ _- 2. Chicago Faucet 3. Aqua -Spec 4. Approved equivalent. - B_ Exposed yoke, wall -mount utility type with lever handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker spout, hose end spout, integral supply stops. Rough chrome finish. 2.02 TANKLESS NATURAL GAS WATER HEATER A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Navien NPE-240A. 2. Approved equivalent. B. Type: Factory -assembled and wired, natural gas instantaneous water healer domestic hot water with stainless steel heat exchanger in carbon steel casing with integral micro -processor controls. C. Performance: 1. Outlet (Hot) water temperature. 120"F, minimum_ 2. Outlet temperature accuracy: +1-1%. 3. Capacity: 5 gpm. 4. Built in buffer tank and recirculation pump. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PLUMBING FIXTURES Project #10140 224000-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY D. Fuel Characteristics, 1. Natural Gas. 2, Heat input: 19,900-199,000 Btu/hr, E. Electrical Characteristics: 120 volts, single phase, 60 12 Amps, max. F. Connections: 1. Cold Water: 3/4". 2. Hot Water: 3/4" 3. Natural Gas: 3/4". 4. Intake Air: 2" or 3 5. Vent. 2" or 3",.. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install components level and plumb. B. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. C. Solidly attach water heater to wall. 3.02 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING 4/17/2013 A. After plumbing fixtures have been installed, the fixtures and trimmings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease, oil, dirt, labels and stickers, and other foreign matter, and all packing materials shall be promptly removed from the premises. All valves and faucets shall be adjusted to suit the operating water pressure and all work maintained in clean and proper operating conditlon until accepted by the Architect/Engineer. B. Following completion of installation, clean all construction dirt dust, and debris from all plumbing fixtures. Verify that all flow or temperature settings have been made where required and that all necessary electrical connections are powered up. C, Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated. 1. Mop (Utility) Faucet: a. Standard: 32 inches to bottom of spout. 2. Tankless Natural Gas Water Heater: a. Standard: 44 inches to bottom of head. B, Fixture Rough -In 1. Mop (Utility) Faucet: a. Hot Water: 112 Inch. b. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PLUMBING FIXTURES Project #10140 224000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work to be performed under this Division shall include all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, construction plant and facilities necessary to provide a complete and satisfactory system ready to use. Examine all drawings and all sections of specifications to ascertain to what extent other contracts affect work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of contractor: All materials and equipment shall be new and all work shall be executed with maximum speed consistent with current accepted trade practices. Furnish materials and equipment promptly after authorization to proceed, and proceed with work in progress with contractor on project. Perform all work included in contract in a manner that will not cause interferences or delays to, or interfere with, progress of contractor. B. Requirements of regulatory agencies: 1. Permits: Arrange and pay for all permits, inspections and utility connections required. 2- Referenced standards: a. Comply with specified codes and standards. If conflict exists between codes or standards and drawings, project manual or addenda requirements, request clarification from Architect/Engineer. b. Conform to installation rules and regulations of standards listed including all subsequently published amendments thereto issued prior to date of bidding documents. c. Conform to requirements of all local, state and federal agencies, which have authority over this project. Include all items of labor and material required to meet such requirements regardless of failure to specify in project manual or indicate on drawings each individual item- d- All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and installed with applicable industry standards- e- Applicable portions of latest editions of following standards form a part of this project manual to same force and effect as if repeated herein. 1) American Gas Association, Inc. (AGA) 2) American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 3) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 4) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5) American Water Works Association (AWWA) 6) National Electrical Code (NEC) 7) National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 8) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 9) Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) 10) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL) ' 11) Environmental Protection Agency(EPA) , 12) Department of Public Health (DPH) - 13) Iowa Plumbing Code, Current Edition 1.03 COORDINATION & SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall resolve all conflicts before actual installation begins- Order of space preference throughout building shall be: - 1- Recessed light fixtures 2. Ductwork - c:: 3- Soil, waste, vent and storm piping 4. Domestic water piping 5- Sprinkler piping 6. Electrical conduit 7. Exception: Plumbing lines below or behind plumbing fixtures shall have precedence over all other work. Electrical conduit above or below switchgear, panel boards and control panels shall have precedence over all other work. Do not install any fluid conveying piping over electrical or elevator equipment. 8. Submit following Certifications .- a- Fire Protection INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 230500-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4)17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY b. Welding c. Insulation d. Air & Water Balance e. Domestic Water Disinfection 1.04 STARTING, TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING A. See sections 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1.05 WARRANTY A. Guarantee all work including labor, material and equipment for this project for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. In order to become familiar with scope of work involved, visit existing site, before submitting bid, and carefully examine existing condition in order to have full knowledge and understanding of conditions and restrictions affecting performance of work required. Include in bid all work which is reasonably inferred by contract drawings and specifications, whether specifically shown or not, as a result of existing conditions, construction, irregularities and interferences which may affect work. No additional compensation will be considered for misunderstanding conditions to be met. B. Layout shown on drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall he followed as closely as other work will permit. Changes from these drawings required to make this work conform to building construction shall be made only with prior written approval of Architect/Engineer. All proposed changes shall be shown on shop drawings- All measurements shall be verified by actual observation and all work shall fit in place meeting approval of Architect/Engineer. C. Contractor shall provide openings required in new and existing construction that may be necessary for installation of mechanical work and all patching and workmen competent in trade required, at expense of contractor shall do repairing. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging work so that minimum cutting will be required. All rubbish and excess materials involved in such cutting shall be promptly removed from site and disposed of by contractor. Cutting through floor or root systems or load bearing walls shall be done only with prior written approval of Architect/Engineer so as to avoid damaging structural system. D. Sequencing, scheduling: 1. Confer with contractor regarding location and size of pipes, equipment, ducts, openings and special architectural treatments in order that there may be no interferences between installation or progress of work of contractor on project. order of space preference shall be as listed above. 2.� In case of interconnection of work of two or more contractors, verify at site or on shop drawings all dimensions relating to such work. All errors due to failure to so verify any such dimensions shall be promptly rectified. 3. All line voltage wiring and final connections to complete mechanical systems shall be provided by -'Electrical Contractor. All electrical conduit, wire, and connections relating to mechanical equipment . = controls and all wiring associated with starter holding coils, shall be responsibility of contractor installing mechanical equipment unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Contractor installing mechanical equipment shall be responsible for magnetic motor starters where such starters are part of control package of equipment supplied. All other starters shall be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor. Contractor installing starters that are part of a control package shall coordinate starter requirements with Division 26 of specifications. 4. Access panels, in walls or ceilings, required for access and maintenance (i.e., automatic or manual damper, fire or smoke damper, coil or control instrument mounted in a duct or pipe) shall be provided by respective contractor Access panels are not required in areas where ceiling system is lay -in tile, however, sufficient space must be available in and through ceiling system to allow maintenance and adjustment of dampers, and cleaning of coils as necessary, or a suitable access panel shall be provided for that purpose_ Access panels shall be approximately 15 inches by 18 inches wherever possible and shall be provided with flush trim and an allenkey operated camlock fastener. Karp, Milcou or Side shall manufacture panels. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 230500-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/1 712 01 3 5. Items of equipment may be specified in singular however, provide and install number of items of equipment as indicated on drawings and as required for a complete system. 6. Each contractor shall provide excavating, pumping, backfilling, and compacting required for installation of their respective work as shown on drawings. 7. Equipment and devices furnished and installed by mechanical contractors, which have factory prime coat, or final surface finish shall be replaced, repaired or refinished if defective or damaged during installation. 8. Arrange all work so a minimum period of interruption or outages will occur in temporary or permanent transfer of services as required for all mechanical revisions. Not less than 48 hours notification to Owner shall be required before approval will be granted for any disruption of gas, water, or sanitary services. Outage request shall include extent of work to be done, length of outage time required, and time at which outage is to begin. No allowance will be made for extra payment as a result of scheduling "overtime" work necessary to perform before or after normal or regular working hours to accomplish work intended. 9. Submit a "Sequence of Work Schedule' in respect to all temporary and permanent utility and service cutovers after final determination. This schedule shall be submitted for approval to Architect/Engineer. Submittal shall designate priority order, service or utility affected, date of cutover, and time of day to start and finish. 3.02 CLEANING A. Upon completion of contract all remaining materials and rubbish shall be removed from building and premises and work areas shall be left clean and free from stains, mortar, paint spots, etc. B. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with embossed or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in presence of Owner's designated representative to insure that their function and purpose is understood. C. Upon completion of work, put systems into service maintaining responsibility for equipment during all testing operations including lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus. END OF SECTION c.� INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 230500-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 4/17/2013 INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 230500-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single phase electric motors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 112 horsepower. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. D. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures. E Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A, Conform to NFPA 70. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A, Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Service: 1. Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Motors 3/4 horsepower and larger or motors used in outdoor application (regardless of horsepower) shall be three phase, 60 Hertz. 3. Motors configured in duplex applications shall have an individual electrical circuit to each motor. 4. Motor starter coils and control circuits shall be powered by 120 volt control transformers located within the motor started enclosure. I Construction: 1. Open drip -proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. 2. Motors shall be of Cast Iron Construction. 3. Design for continuous operation in 40 °C environment. 4. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. C. All motors furnished shall be the manufacturer's premium efficiency design. The nominal efficiency and the minimum guaranteed efficiency shall be stamped on the nameplate of the motor. All efficiency testing and labeling shall be done in accordance with the NEMA MG 1 standard. D. Explosion -proof motors must be UL approved and labeled for hazard classification, with overtemperature protection. E. Visible nameplates must be stainless steel, indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, and efficiency. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Project #10140 23 05 13 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 F. Wiring Terminations 1. Motor leads shall be stranded copper and shall be permanently identified and brought out into the motor terminal box through a neoprene gasket. Conduit opening suitable for locknut type connector. Include UL listed ground lug in terminal enclosure. 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide conduit opening suitable for locknut type fitting in end frame. 2.02 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. D. Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50'C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50'C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. B, .Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. C: Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F. Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50'C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings. G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50'C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capacitor type. B. Motors located in exterior locations: Totally closed type. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. 3.03 MOTOR DYNAMIC BALANCING A. Perform dynamic balancing and test motors for vibration after manufacture. Self excite vibration velocity of motor shall not exceed 0.157/0.06 inches per second at the bearing caps. 3.04 STARTUP A. Inspect, test and start each motor and align with a dial indicator to 0.002" END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC_ COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Project #10140 230513-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Positive displacement meters. B. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps. C. Thermometers and thermometer wells. D. Static pressure gages. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. B. ASTM E 1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers; 2005. C. ASTM E 77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 1998 (Reapproved 2003). D. AWWA C700- Cold Water Meters -- Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case; American Water Works Association; 2002 (ANSI/AWWA C700). E. AWWA C706 - Direct -Reading, Remote -Registration Systems for Cold Water Meters; American Water Works Association; 1996 (R 2005) (ANSI/AWWA C706). F. AWWA M6 - Water Meters -- Selection. Installation, Testing, and Maintenance; American Water Works Association, 1999. G. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire -Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location for manufactured components. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough -in, taps, supports and test plugs. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METERS (LIQUID) A. Manufacturers: 1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com. 2. Venture Measurement Company: wvvw.venturemeasurernent.com. 3. McCrometer www.mccrometer.com. B_ AWWA C700, positive displacement disc type suitable for fluid with bronze case and cast iron frost -proof, breakaway bottom cap, hermetically sealed register, remote reading to AWWA C706. C_ Meter: Brass body turbine meter with magnetic drive register. 2.02 PRESSURE GAGES A_ Manufacturers: 1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www _dwyer-inst_mm. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC Project #10140 230519-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/1712013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2. Moeller Instrument Co., Inc: www.moellerinstrument.com. 3. Omega Engineering, Inc: vwwv.omeoa com. B. Pressure Gages: ASME 640.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background. 1. Case: Cast aluminum with phosphor bronze bourdon tube. 2. Size: 4-112 inch diameter. 3. Mid -Scale Accuracy: One percent. 4. Scale: Psi. 2.03 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS A. Gage Cock: Shall be 114 turn ballvalave with 114" NPT female threads and lever or T handle. They shall be rated for sevice at 600 # WOG. 2.04 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer inst.com. 2. Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omeoa.com. 3. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp: www.wekslerglass.com. B. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue -appearing non-toxic liquid in glass; ASTM E 1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device; adjustable 360' in horizontal plane, 180' in vertical plane. 1. Size: 7 inch scale. 2. Window: Clear glass. 3. Stem: 314 inch NPT brass. 4. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E 77. 5. Calibration: 'F. 2.05 DIAL THERMOMETERS -' A. Manufacturers: I. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwy. Eye. " 2. -Omega Engineering, Inc www.omega.com- -3:, • -Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp, www.wekslerglass.com. --B. Thermometer: ASTM E 1, stainless steel case, adjustable angle with front recalibration, bimetallic helix actuated with silicone fluid damping, while with black markings and black pointer hermetically sealed lens, stainless steel stein, - 1. Size: 3 inch diameter dial. 2. Lens. Clear glass. 3. Accuracy: 1 percent. 4. Calibration: 'F. 2.06 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain. 2.07 TEST PLUGS A. Test Plug: 114 inch or 112 inch brass fitting and cap for receiving 118 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 200'1 2.08 STATIC PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: 1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: vwvw.dwyer-inst,com. 2. Omega Engineering, Inc. www.omega.com. 3. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp. www.wekslerglass.com. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC Project #10140 230519-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. 3-1/2 inch diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy. C. Accessories: Static pressure tips with compression fittings for bulkhead mounting, 1/4 inch diameter tubing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet to AWWA M0. Provide full line size valve bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters. C. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation. D. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. E. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45° off vertical. F. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Stem Type Thermometers, Location and Scale Range: 1. Headers to central equipment, 0 to 200°F. 2. Water Heater - inlets and outlets, 0 to 200"F. 3. Domestic hot water supply and recirculation, 0 to 200°F. B. Thermometers, Location and Scale Range: 1. Each supply air zone, 0 to 100`F. 2. Outside air, 0 to 100'F. 3. Return air. 0 to 100°F. C. Static Pressure and Filter Gages, Location and Scale Range: 1. Built up filter banks, 0 to 100 inches W.C.. 2. Supply fan discharge, 0 to 100 inches W.C.- END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC Project #10140 230519-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 4/17/2013 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC 230519-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hangers and supports for all piping systems related to heating, cooling, and all other systems installed by this contractor. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute, ANSI: 1. ANSI B31, 1: Power Piping. B. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, MSS: 1. MSS SP -56: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP -69: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. C, National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA: 1. NEMA ML 1: Metal Framing (Continuous Slot Metal Channel Systems). D. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc., SMACNA: 1. Duct Hangers: SMACNA Duct Manuals. E. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA: . 1. NFPA 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, F. Underwriter's Laboratories/Factory Mutual, UUFM: 1. Provide products UL listed and FM approved. 1.03 GENERAL A. Hangers, structural supports, and attachments shall include all labor, supplemental steel or other material necessary for support of pipe furnished by Contractor. Factory fabricated items shall be complete with nuts, bolts, washers, etc. Where type and size are not indicated, proper selection shall be determined by Contractor. B. Do NOT hang/support any single point loads greater than 500 Ids- from steel beamslpurlins; and NOT greater than 250 lbs_ from concrete slab or steel barjoists; unless specifically noted otherwise on the structural drawings. Weights shall not exceed framing member allowance_ Where this Contractor violates allowances, any and all resultant damage and costs to correct, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, will be borne by this Contractor. C. Supports include equipment anchoring to floor slab, brackets to wall, hangers to equipment supported from structure above, etc. Refer to drawings for equipment and locations_ D. Submit for approval, complete calculations and details for field fabricated support installations (e.g. trapeze hangers, equipment supports, etc) designed by a Registered Structural Engineer, with Engineers' Seal affixed thereto_ E. Supplemental steel spanning structural framing elements may be steel angles or channels specifically sized for equipment/pipe weight. Supports shall be sized with a minimum safety factor of 5 to 1, or as required by code; most stringent requirement shall apply. Contractor may provide supplemental supports as manufactured by Unistrut or B -Line systems. F. Hangers and supports shall conform to recommendations of Standard Practice No. 55 and 69 of Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS). PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hangers and Supports: INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 239529-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY t ATO, Inc/Fee & Mason Mfg Co 2. Elcen Metal Products Co 3. ITT Grinnell Corp 4. PHD Mfg, Inc 5. Bang it. 6. Wood -Knocker 7. Drop -In Anchors 8. Saddles and Shields: 9. Elden Metal Products Co 10. Fee & Mason Mfg Cc 11. Pipe Shields, Inc 2.02 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide factory fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports, in compliance with ANSI SP -58 and ANSI SP -69. 1. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. 2. Select hangers and supports sized to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping; and to exactly fit around pipe _ .insulation with saddle and shield for insulated piping. 3. - Provide rubber or neoprene lined pipe ring isolators and copper plated hangers and supports for copper *. piping systems. 4. - Type: a. Adjustable Steel Clevises: MSS Type 1. 5. Pipe hangers and supports on insulated piping shall be installed outside the insulation and shall Include insulation supports/inserts between pipe and hanger/shield. EXCEPTION: Seismic restraint hangers/supports shall be installed in contact with the pipe; insulation shall be carried over hanger/support and sealed. - 6. Inserts and Shields. a. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. b. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. C. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickened and contour as adjoining insulation: may be factory fabricated. d. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. 2.03 VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS A. Provide factory fabricated vertical piping clamps, in compliance with ANSI/MSS SP -58 and ANSIlMSS SP -69. 1. Select vertical piping clamps sized to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. 2. Provide rubber or neoprene lined pipe ring and copper plated clamps for copper piping systems. 3. Type: a. Four -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. B. HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS 1. Provide factory fabricated hanger rod attachments, in compliance with ANSVMSS SP -58 and ANSI/MSS SP -69. a. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. b. Select Size of hanger rod attachments to suit hanger rods. C. Provide copper plated hanger rad attachments for copper piping systems. 1) Type: (a) Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. 2.04 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. Provide factory fabricated building attachments, in compliance with ANSI/MSS SP -58 and ANSI/MSS SP -69. 1. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. 2. Provide copper plated building attachments for copper piping systems. 3. Types: a. Steel Brackets: One of following for indicated loading: 1) Light Duty: MSS Type 31. 2) Medium Duty: MSS Type 32. 3) Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC 230529-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 2.05 SADDLES AND SHIELDS A. Provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory fabricated, for all insulated piping. 1. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 2. Types a. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. b. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. c. Thermal Hanger Shields: 1) Constructed of 360 insert of high density, 100 psi waterproofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 sheet metal shield - 2) Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. 2.06 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Strap Hangers: 18 gauge galvanized steel bands. - B. Angle Iron: Galvanized angle iron with 3/8 -inch rods. C Wall Supports: Galvanized steel band iron or fabricated angle bracket. _ D. Vertical Support at Floor: Rolled 1-1/4 inch x 3/16 inch angle. E. Cable Hangers: Support with stainless steel air -craft cable sized and rated for load, minimum size cable to be 7 x 9 - 3/32", with matching fastener rated for actual load installed with cable double looped on duct and at point of support. Acceptable products: Ductmate "Clutcher" or approved equal. 2.07 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Provide locations of roof penetrations to Roofing Contractor for Coordination. 1- Roofing Contractor provides flashing material specified in Division 7. 2. Provide flashings for each penetration of mechanical systems through floors, roofs or waterproof membranes. 2.08 SLEEVES A. Pipes through floors where no plumbing fixtures are installed: 18 gauge galvanized steel. B. Pipes through Beams, Walls, Fireproofing, Footings, Potentially Wet Floors: Schedule 40 steel pipe or 18 gauge galvanized steel. C. UL Labeled Sleeves: Prefabricated with insulation and fireproofing - D. Round Ducts: Galvanized steel. E. Rectangular Ducts: Galvanized steel. F. Sleeves through Fire and Smoke Walls: NFPA 90A. G. Size sleeves to allowfor expansion movement and to provide for continuous insulation. IT Prefabricated Wall or Floor Penetration Seals: Modular mechanical type; interlocking synthetic rubber links filling annular space between pipe and wall opening. 1. Manufacturer: a. Thunderline Corp: Link -Seal b. Bolt and pressure plate fasteners and rubber seal provide watertight seal between pipe and wall. C. Seal provides electrical insulation between pipe and wall. d- Provide fire rated seals where required 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT MATERIALS A. Metal Framing.- NEMA Standard ML 1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ANSI/ASTM A6 - C- Hanger Rods: Steel; threaded both ends, threaded 1 end, or continuously threaded. D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapeze: 1- Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads specified. 2. Weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 230529-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 3. Pipe Guides: Factory fabricated cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated steel, including bolted 2 -section outer cylinder and base with 2 -section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. a. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe, insulation, and cylinder. b. Guides Length: Recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION PERFORMANCE A. Comply with MSS SP -69 for installation of hangers, supports and anchors; install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 1. Install all lines/hangers/supports to prevent sway, vibration or sag. Support piping at drops to equipment preventing stress at the equipment connections. 2. Locate a hanger within three feet of a direction change. Provide additional supports for heavy valves and equipment. 3. Do NOT hang pipes from ductwork, conduits or ceiling suspension systems. 4. Adjust hangers/supports after insulation installation to provide uniform loading and to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. 5. Use bracket type hanger fastened to walls to support piping running adjacent to walls and not supported from ceilings. Valves 3 inches and over in horizontal lines shall be supported independent of the pipelines. 6. Perforated strap iron hangers or wire will NOT be accepted. 7. Hanger supports shall be securely fastened to structural members by beam clamps and clips, concrete inserts, anchors and all required accessories. 8. On insulated piping, jacket shall be continuous at hangers/supports/inserts and all seams shall be sealed. 9. Nonferrous Pipe: copper plated or plastic coated hangers/trapeze may contact nonferrous pipe; ferrous hangers/trapeze, if used, must be isolated from nonferrous pipe to prevent galvanic action and corrosion; a split plastic shield, 6 inches long by 1/16 inch thick, 360' arc with a 225°F rating may be used between pipe hanger; or B -Line Vibra Cushion Clamp or B -Line Iso Pipe rubber tape, 2 wraps extended 2 inches each side of hanger/clamp; or wrap pipe with a minimum of three (3) wraps of 3 mil, black electrical tape of PVC tape, extend two (2) inches each side of hanger; painted hanger/trapeze is NOT acceptable. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION A. Horizontal Steel and Copper Piping Support Spacing: 1. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing. a. 314 inch (20 mm): Maximum span, 5 feet (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. 1 inch (25 mm): Maximum span, 6 feet (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6 mm). G. 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) and 2 inch (50 mm): Maximum span, 8 feet (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9 mm). d. 2-1/2 inch (65 mm): Maximum span, 9 feet (2700 mm); minimum rod size, 318 inch (9 mm). e. 3 inch (80 mm): Maximum span, 10 feet (3.0 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9 mm). L 4 inch (100 mm): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.6 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm). g. 6 inch (150 mm): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.2 m); minimum rod size, 112 inch (13 mm). h. 8 inch (200 mm): Maximum span, 16 feet (4.8 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch (16 mm). i. 10 inch (250 mm): Maximum span, 18 feet (5.5 m); minimum rod size, 3/4 inch (19 mm). j. 12 inch (300 mm): Maximum span, 19 feet (5.8 m); minimum rod size, 7/8 inch (22 mm). 1) Hanger Spacing for Steel Steam Piping. •'' (a) 314 inch (20 mm) and 1 inch (25 mm): Maximum span, 9 feet (2700 mm); minimum rod size, 14 inch (6 mm). (b) 1-1/4 Inches (32 mm): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.3 m); minimum rod size, 318 inch (9 mm). (c) 1-1/2 inches (40 mm): Maximum span, 12 feel (3.6 m); minimum rod size, 3l8 inch (9 mm). "�- (d) 2 inches (50 mm): Maximum span, 13 feet (4.0 m); minimum rod size. 318 inch (9 mm). _ (e) 2-1/2 inches (65 mm): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.2 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9 mm). (f) 3 inches (80 mm): Maximum span, 15 feet (4.5 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9 mm). - (g) 4 inches (100 mm): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm). (h) 6 inches (150 mm): Maximum span, 21 feet (6.4 m); minimum rod size, 112 inch (13 mm). (i) 8 inches (200 mm): Maximum span, 24 feet (7.3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch (16 mm). (j) 10 inches (250 mm): Maximum span, 26 feet (7.9 m); minimum rod size, 3/4 inch (19 INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 230529-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 mm). (k) 12 inches (300 mm): Maximum span, 30 feet (9.1 m); minimum rod size, 7/8 inch (22 mm). (1) 14 inches (350 mm): Maximum span, 32 feet (9.7 m); minimum rod size, 1 inch (25 mm). (m) 16 inches (400 mm): Maximum span, 35 feet (10.6 m); minimum rod size, 1 inch (25 mm). (n) 18 inches (450 mm): Maximum span, 37 feet (11.2 m); minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inch (38 mm). (o) 20 inches (500 mm): Maximum span, 39 feet (11.8 m); minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inch (38 mm). 2) Hanger Spacing for Steel Steam Condensate Piping. (a) 314 inch (20 mm), and 1 inch (25 mm): Maximum span, 7 feet (2100 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6 mm). (b) 1-1/4 inches (32 mm): Maximum span, 8 feet (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9 mm). (c) 1-1/2 inches (40 mm): Maximum span, 9 feet (2700 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9 mm). (d) 2 inches (50 mm): Maximum span, 10 feet (3.0 m); minimum rod size, 318 inch (9 mm). (e) 2-112 inches (65 mm): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9 mm). (f) 3 inches (80 mm): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.6 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9 mm). (g) 4 inches (100 mm): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.3 m); minimum rod size, 112 inch (13 mm). (h) 6 inches (150 mm): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.1 m); minimum rod size, 112 inch It mm). (i) 8 inches (200 mm): Maximum span, 19 feet (5.8 m); minimum rod size, 518 inch (16 mm). (j) 10 inches (250 mm): Maximum span, 20 feet (6.1 m); minimum rod size, 3/4 inch (19 mm). (k) 12 inches (300 mm): Maximum span, 23 feet (7.0 m); minimum rod size, 7/8 inch (22 mm). (1) 14 inches (350 mm): Maximum span, 25 feet (7.6 m); minimum rod size, 1 inch (25 mm). (m) 16 inches (400 mm): Maximum span, 27 feet (8.2 m); minimum rod size, 1 inch (25 mm). (n) 18 inches (450 mm): Maximum span, 28 feet (8.5 m); minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inch (38 mm). (o) 20 inches (500 mm): Maximum span, 30 feet (9.1 m); minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inch (38 mm). 13. Install hangers and attachments directly from building structure complete with inserts, bolts rods, nuts and washers, and accessories. 1. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping; pipe support from other piping not permitted. 2. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3. Place hanger within 1 foot of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch minimum after piping is erected. C. Riser Pipe Support: Independent of connected horizontal piping where practical_ D. Prime Coat Finish 1. Prime coat all steel hangers and supports. E. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 2. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers to accommodate smallest pipe; or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. F- Vertical Piping: 1. Support vertical piping at every floor. G. Pipe Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems; to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors; and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 230529-5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement is not transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Pipe Slopes: a. Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes. b. Do not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31. H. Pipe Guides: Install pipe guides near expansion loop, expansion joints and ball joints, unless indicated otherwise. I. Electrolysis: Prevent electrolysis to copper tubing with rubber or neoprene lined pipe ring isolators and copper plated hanger and supports or other recognized industry methods. J. Steel Joists: Connect at hangers and attachments to top chord of all steel joints. K. Insulated Piping: 1. Shields: a. Where low compressive strength insulations vapor barriers are specified on cold or chilled water piping, install coated protective shields. b. For pipe 8 inches and over, install wood insulation saddles. 1) Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. L Structural support/anchor design is the responsibility of the contractor unless otherwise specified or indicated on drawings, SupporVAnchor design calculation(s) shall be provided to the architect or engineer upon request. Calculations shall be performed by a Licensed Structural Engineer in possession of a license issued by the state of Iowa. 3.03 BUILDING ATTACHMENT INSTALLATION A. Space attachments within maximum piping span indicated in MSS SP -69. B. Install additional building attachments when supporting additional concentrated loads; including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints and at changes in piping direction. C. Anchors: 1. Install anchors at locations preventing stresses from exceeding ANSI B31; and preventing transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. a. Install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. b. Preset anchors to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 1) Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure; in compliance with ANSI B31 and AWS. 2) Anchors for Expansion Compensators: Install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturers recommendations. (a) Limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit. 3.04 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION A. Low Velocity Ducts: t. Hanger Minimum Sizes: a. Up to 30 inches wide: 1-114 inch x 3/16 inch angle at 10 feet spacing. - 1) 31 inches to 48 inches wide: 1-1/2 inches x 3116 inch angle at 10 feet spacing. 2) Over 48 inches wide: 1-1/2 inches x 3116 inch angle at 8 feet spacing. 3) Horizontal Duct on Wall Supports Minimum Sizes. (a) Up to 18 inches wide: 1-112 inches x 16 gauge or 1 inch x 1 inch x 118 inch at 8 feet spacing. (b) 19 inches to 40 inches wide: 1-1/2 inches x 1-112 inches x 1/8 inch at 4 feet spacing. ,- (1) Vertical Duct on Wall Supports Minimum Sizes: (2) At 12 feet spacing. (3) Up to 24 inches wide: 1-1/4 inches x 3/16 inch angle. (4) 25 inches to 36 inches wide: 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch angle. (5) 37 inches to 48 inches wide: 1-1/2 inch x 114 inch angle. (6) Vertical Duct Floor Supports Minimum Sizes: (7) Riveted or screwed to duct. (8) Up to 60 inches wide: 1-112 inches x 3/16 inch angle. (9) Over 60 inches wide: 2 inches x 2 inches x 3116 inch angle. (10) Covered Ducts: Install hangers below insulation with rod hangers. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 230529-6 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 (11) Lined Ducts: Install hangers below duct; sheet metal duct not punctured. (12) Install hangers, supports to permit free, noiseless expansion and contraction. B. Medium and High Velocity Ducts: 1 Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Sizes: a. Up to 36 inches wide: 2 at 1 inch x 16 gauge at 10 feet spacing. b. 37 inches to 60 inches wide: 2 at 1 inch x 16 gauge at 8 feet spacing and 2 inches x 2 inches x 1/4 inch trapeze. C. 61 inches to 120 inches wide: 2 at 1-112 inches x 12 gauge at 8 feet spacing and 2 inches x 2 inches x 114 inch trapeze. d. 121 inches to 240 inches wide: 3 at 3/8 inch diameter at 4 feet spacing and 2-1/2 inches x 2-1/2 inches x 3116 inch trapeze. 1) Round Duct Hangers Minimum Sizes: (a) At 10 feet spacings. (b) Up to 18 diameter: 1 inch x 16 gauge. (c) 19 inches to 36 inches diameter: 1 inch x 12 gauge. (d) 37 inches to 50 inches diameter: 1-1/2 inches x 12 gauge. (e) 51 inches to 84 inches diameter: 2 at 1-1/2 inches x 12 gauge from girth reinforcing angle. 2) Vertical Duct Floor Supports Minimum Sizes: (a) Rivet to duct and tie angles together with rod, angles or cinch band. (b) Up to 48 inches wide: 1-1/2 inches x 1-112 inches x 118 inch. (c) Over 48 inches wide: 2 inches x 2 inches x 3116 inch. 3) Angle reinforcing may be used for support omitting trapeze. C. Round: 1. Use cable hangers in exposed areas. 2. Size and spacing per manufactures recommendations. 3.05 SLEEVES A. Setting: Set sleeves in advance of concrete work; provide reinforcing around sleeves - B. Wet Areas: Extend sleeves through potentially wet floors 2 inch above finished floor level. 1. Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate. C. Insulation: Where piping or ductwork passes through floor, ceiling or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and construction with noncombustible mineral wool insulation. 1. Provide tight fitting metal caps on both sides and caulk. D_ Install chrome plated escutcheons where piping passes through finished surfaces. E. Prefabricated Wall Penetration Seals: Install and tighten seals in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 1. Ensure watertight pipe penetration. 3.06 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS Concrete: 1. Provide for major equipment reinforced concrete bases poured directly on structural floor slab 6 inches thick minimum, extended 4 inches minimum beyond machinery bedplates. Install #8 dowel bars full depth into the existing strauctural slab at 16" centers, starting 16" from the edge of the slab. 2. Formwork: ACI 347. a. Chamfer external corners of exposed concrete work. b. Provide openings required by others. C. Use manufacturer's templates or certified setting diagrams for placement of equipment anchor bolts and other mounting accessories. d. Install accessories: Waterstops, expansion joints, and moisture barrier. 1) Reinforcement: CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice. 2) Concrete Placement- ACI 301, 304. 3) Concrete Curing: ACI 301. 4) Concrete Finishing: (a) Horizontal Surfaces: Float and trowel to level, smooth, uniform, dense finish; leave struck off surface untroweled; or scratch struck off surfaces. (b) Depress top of concrete where supported work is set in mortar or sand bed. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC Project #10140 230529-7 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 (c) Curds: Strip form while concrete is green; steel trowel to hard dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded and coved. 5) Concrete Grouting: Grout openings and recesses as indicated, around mechanical work using grouting mix, tamped, screeded, troweled and cured. (a) See individual equipment Sections for specification for fine grouting (nonshrink grout) of equipment base plates on foundation bases. 6) Field Quality Control: Contractor engages testing laboratory to take on site slump or compression tests to ensure compliance with specifications. B. Steel: Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 1. Supports: Structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. 2, Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration connections to equipment. C. Pipe Stands: Welded fabrication. 1. Provide flat plate supports for each leg, bolted to 6 inch high x 12 x 12 inch concrete base poured on floor. 2. Attach top of each leg to ceiling or roof structure as indicated or approved. 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hangers and supports and place grout under supports to bring piping and ductwork to proper levels and elevations, END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC Project #10149 230529-8 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vibration isolators. 1.02 SUBMITTALS 4/1712013 A_ Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. Include maximum load capacity, color codes, neoprene durometer_ B. Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load on each. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting dimensions. 1.03 DESIGN A. All elastomeric isolators shall be of neoprene high quality synthetic rubber with anti -ozone and anti -oxidant additives. B. All nuts, bolts, and washers shall be zinc electroplated. C. Isolators for equipment installed outdoors shall be designed to provide adequate restraint due to normal wind conditions and to withstand wind loads of 20 Ib/sqft_ applied to any exposed surface of the isolated equipment. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Vibration Mountings and Controls -Amber Booth B_ Kinetics Noise Control, Inc C. Mason Industries D. Vibration Eliminator E. Vibro-Acoustics 2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Neoprene waffle pads. a. Hardness: 30 durometer, or durometer required for specified load deflection. b. Thickness: Minimum 314 inch (20 mm)_ c. Maximum Loading: 50 psi. d. Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width. 2. Configuration: Single layer, or waffle pads bonded each side of 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick steel plate. 3- For equipment demonstrating lateral dynamic forces greater than 50% of the equipment weight, provide base plate and bolt holes for attachment to the support structure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Except as otherwise indicated, the contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. B. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC Project #10140 23 05 48 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4(1712013 C. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. D. Anchor and attach units to structural supports and equipment as required. E. Adjust leveling devices as required where leveling uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. F. Where equipment base frames are specified, install base frames on isolator units so that a minimum of 1!2" clearance below the base will result when the supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation. (2" clearance for inertia bases). G. Contractor shall adjust all vibration isolators after the system has achieved full operating weight so that: no vibration isolation element is short circuited; no undue stress is applied to the equipment, connected piping or structure; and no noise is transmitted to any support structure, connected surface or adjacent environment. H. After equipment installation and operation, it shall be the contractors' responsibility to demonstrate that the isolation system meets all of the criteria specified in this Section and on Drawings, and has been properly installed. I. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. J. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for first three points of support. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Provide vibration isolators for AHU-1 and AHU-2. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC Project #10140 23 05 48 - 2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates, B. Tags. C. Pipe Markers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates. B. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic. C. Dampers: Color coded tag. - D. Ductwork: Nameplates with gauge. E. Instrumentation: Tags. -- F. Major Components: Nameplates. ,. -• G. Piping: Tags printed with service and direction of flow. H. Small -sized Equipment: Tags. - I. Thermostats: Nameplates. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation: www.bradvcoro.com. B. Champion America, Inc: www.Chamoion-America.com. C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec. D. Brimar. 2.03 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch_ INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Project #10140 230553-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3. Background Color: Black. 2.04 TAGS 4/17/2013 A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-112 inch diameter. B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1 1/3 inch diameter with smooth edges. 2.05 PIPE MARKERS A. All piping systems will be labeled, color coded with the type of service, (for refrigerant piping, indicate the type) and the direction of flow. Labels to be factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Lettering will be placed at intervals of approximately 20' on straight runs of piping including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and fitting, and at each side of penetrations of structure or enclosure. Lettering will be visible from the floor. For pipes 3W and smaller, permanent phenolic tags will be used. Insulated piping will be labeled as 'non asbestos,' Schedule for banding and labeling of pipe and conduit will conform to ANSI At 3.1 B. Acceptable manufacturers Seton Name Plate Corporation, W_H. Brady Company or Westline Products Company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T -bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Placement - Provide Identification Markers: 1. On all exposed covered and uncovered pipes at 20 foot intervals. 2. On all branches and valves. 3. On both sides of walls where pipes pass through wall. 4. At changes of flow direction. 5. On each riser at a point 5 feet above floor or platform. B, Markers shall be applied so they can be read from the floor. C. Install nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. D. .After applying each marker, wrap one turn of pipe banding tape completely around the circumference of the pipe at each end of the marker. Overlap ends of marker with the tape and overlap the tape upon itself a minimum of 1 -inch. The pipe banding tape shall match the background color of the marker. E:- Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. H. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Project #10140 230553-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 411 712 01 3 I. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. J. Where a service is indicated on the drawings as a circulating system, the pipe marker legend for the particular service shall be followed by eitherthe word "supply" or "return' to clarify the line function. An arrow designating direction of flow shall follow the legend on each marker. K. Flowlndicators: 1. Provide an arrow marker at each identification marker, with arrow pointed away from legend in the direction of flow. When flow may be both ways, provide double -headed arrows. L. Equipment Schedule: Tag and number each and every piece of equipment for every service included in this contract.. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Project #10140 23 05 53 - 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 4/17/2013 INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Project #10140 230553-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4117/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988, with 1997 Errata. B. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition. C. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002. D. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; Test and Balance Procedure. F AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; National Standards for Total System Balance, 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and specific approach for each system and component. 1. Detailed step-by-step Procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including: - 1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type). 2) Diffuser proportioning. 3) Branchlsubmain proportioning. ' 4) Total flow calculations. ..... 5) Rechecking. 6) Diversity issues. _ 7) Expected problems and solutions, etc. 8) Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example: a) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood readings of all terminals, supply air (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations. 9) Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at lowest possible pressures and methods to verify this. 10) Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if specified. 11) Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure differentials. 12) Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. 2. Sample report formats. B. Final Report: Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 1. Preface: An explanation of intended use of control system. 2. Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 3. List of all air flow, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. 4. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with data cells to be gathered for each - 5. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 6. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent calibration date. PART PRODUCTS - NOT USED INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Project #10140 230593-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4/17/2013 A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of following: 1. AABC MN -1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 3. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 4. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of project. 5. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with authorities having jurisdiction. 6. TAB Agency Qualifications: a. Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. b. Certified by one of following: 1) AABC, Associated Air Balance Council. www.aabchq.cci upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. 2) TABB, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www. t a b b_ce_rtif i ed. o ro . c. TAB Supervisor Qualifications: Professional Engineer licensed in Iowa. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure following conditions. 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Fans are rotating correctly. 6. Outdoor air dampers are in place and operating properly. 7. Air outlets are installed and connected. 8. Duct system leakage is minimized. 9. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance. 10. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Conduct pre -balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. 1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested,. adjusted, or balanced. 2. Provide additional balancing devices, as required. 3.04 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including. 1. Running log of events and issues. 2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. '3. Contract interpretation requests. 4. Lists of completed tests. 5. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. 6� Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be -- - restored. Set and lock memory stops. - 7_ After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. 8. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Project #10140 230593-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. 4/17/2013 C. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. D. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. E. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across fan. 3.06 SCOPE A_ Test, adjust, and balance following: 1. Air Handling Units 2. Air Dampers 3. Air Inlets and Outlets 3.07 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A, Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer 2. HP/BHP 3. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 4. RPM 5. V -Belt Drives: a. I dent ifi cationtlocatio n b. Required driven RPM c Driven sheave, diameter and RPM It. Belt, size and quantity e- Motor sheave diameter and RPM 6. Cooling Coils: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual g. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual It. Refrigerant flow, design and actual i_ Refrigerant pressure drop, design and actual j. Entering refrigerant temperature, design and actual k. Leaving refrigerant temperature, design and actual I. Air pressure drop, design and actual 7. Furnace: a. Identification/number b_ Location c. Service d_ Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f_ Natural gas flow, design and actual g. Entering air temperature, design and actual h. Leaving air temperature, design and actual I. Air pressure drop, design and actual 8. Air Moving Equipment: a. Location b_ Manufacturer c. Model number d_ Serial number e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge f. Air flow, specified and actual g. Outside air flow, specified and actual h. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual i. Inlet pressure INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Project #10140 23 05 93 - 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 411 712 01 3 j. Discharge pressure k. Sheave Make/Size/Bore I. Number of Belts/Make/Size m. Fan RPM 9. Outside Air: a. Identification/location b. Design air flow c. Actual airflow d. Design outside air flow e. Actual outside air flow 10. Exhaust Fans. a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Sheave Make/Size/Bore h. Number of Belts/Make/Size i. Fan RPM 11. Air Monitoring Stations: a. Identification/location b. System c. Size d. Area e. Design velocity f. Design air flow g. Test velocity h. Test air flow 12. Existing Terminal Unit Data: a. Manufacturer b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct c. d entificationln u m ber d. Location e. Model number f. Size g. Minimum static pressure h. Minimum design air flow i. Maximum design airflow j. Maximum actual air flow k. Inlet static pressure I. Water flow, design and actual m. Entering water temperature, design and actual n. Leaving water temperature, design and actual INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 END OF SECTION TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dud insulation. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4/1712013 A. ASTM C 518 -Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004. ` B. ASTM C 553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications, 2002. C. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2004. D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008. E. ASTM E 961E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. F. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. G. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2008- 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate complete material data, mastics and adhesives. 2. Materials proposed for this project thickness of material for individual services. C. Certification: 1. Certifications or other data to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. 2. Proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness and compressive strength. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25150, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE - Type DC -1 A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www,jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CerlainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.36 at 75"F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450°F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight, 4. Accessories: a. Jacket: Factory applied foil -reinforced -kraft vapor barrier type. b. Fire Hazard Classification: 25 flame spread; 50 smoke developed. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. DUCT INSULATION Project #10140 230713-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 c. Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. d. Provide cements, waterproof adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.03 GLASS FIBER, RIGID - Type DC -2 A. Manufacturer: t Knauf Insulation: wwwAnaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.im.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www owenscornina con. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.cedainteed.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C 612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. _ 2 Maximum service temperature: 450'F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent. 4. - Maximum Density: 8.0 Ib/cu ft. C_ Accessories: - - . 1. Jacket: Factory applied foil -reinforced -kraft vapor barrier type. 2. Fire Hazard Classification: 25 flame spread; 50 smoke developed. 3. Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Provide cements, waterproof adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. D. Install work at ambient and equipment temperatures recommended by adhesive manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1 _ Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, Flexible connections, and expansion joints. 3.03 TYPE DC -1 and DC -2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation: Continuous through inside non -fire rated walls; see details on drawings for fire, smoke and smoke -fire damper installation in fire rated walls; or for undampered penetrations of fire rated walls. B. Finish neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. DUCT INSULATION Project #10140 230713-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 C. Wrap insulation tight on duct, ensure corners are not compressed, with all circumferential joints butted. Provide a 2" facing overlap at all joints. Staple longitudinal joints with outward clinching staples, 6" on center; tape all joints with a vapor -barrier tape compatible with insulation facing. 1. Duct surfaces over 24" wide, insulation shall utilize mechanical fasteners spaced not more than 18" on center, not more than 3" from an edge. 2. Seal all punctures, staples, penetrations with vapor -barrier tape. 3. Apply to top exterior surface of diffusers, including neck if exposed. Seal all seams, joints and ends with vapor -barrier tape. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Exhaust Ducts within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: Type DC -2 1. Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 2 inches thick. B. Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outdoor Air: 1. No insulation. C. Supply Ducts (Cooling and Heating): 1. Supply and Return Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Rooms - Type DC -2 a. Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 2 inches thick. 2. Supply Ducts and Return in Vertical Shafts: Type DC -1 a. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation.- 1-112 inches thick. 3. Supply and Return Ducts in concealed ceilings in finished spaces: Type DC -1 a. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1-112 inches thick. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. DUCT INSULATION Project #10140 230713-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 4/17/2013 INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. DUCT INSULATION Project #10140 2307 13-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/1712013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 07 19 ' PIPE INSULATION PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES - A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. B. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004_ C. ASTM C 5341C 534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2008. D. ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation, 2007. E ASTM C 795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008. F_ ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008. G. ASTM E 961E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. H_ NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, National Fire Protection Association, 2006. I. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2008. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A_ Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PIPE INSULATION Project #10140 230719-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or ILL 723, 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: vv , jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscoming com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 at 75°F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850'F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02 perm -inches. 2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. AP-Armacell International: www.armacell.com. 2. Rubatex International: www.rubatex.com. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C 534 Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible. ` 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40°F. .2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220'F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. -. 4. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive. Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 2.04 'JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material. ` a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0'F_ b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150"F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. Notice shall be sent to the engineer before installation with a copy of the system's test report before insulating lines B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Before covering, test and approve piping. B. Entire surface: Clean and dry at time of installation. 1. Insulation: dry before and during application. 2. Finish with systems at operating conditions. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PIPE INSULATION Project #10140 230719-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3.03 INSTALLATION 4/17/2013 A. Insulation: Continuous through inside walls and at all hangers, pack insulation around pipes with fireproof self-supporting mineral wool insulation material, fully sealed. B. Install adhesives at ambient and equipment temperatures recommended by adhesive manufacturer. C. Fittings: 1. Hot Piping: a. Do not insulate strainers (2 inches and smaller), valves (2 inches and smaller), flexible connections, or expansion joints. b. Terminate insulation neatly with mastic material troweled on bevel_ c. Insulate air separator, unions (mark location), flanges (mark location), strainers, (2-112 inches and larger), valves (2-1/2 inches and larger). d. Insulation of flanges and flanged fittings shall overlap adjacent pipe covering at least 2 inches. Valves, strainers, and expansion joints over 2-1/2" in size shall be insulated with removable insulation cover that can be removed and reapplied without tools or new fasteners. e. Where rigid insulation with vapor barrier is not used or "packing" of insulation is required, secure insulation to fitting and cover with 1 piece PVC jacket 2. Cold Piping: Insulate all fittings, including flanges, all valve bodies and devices, and all air separators associated with cold surfaces. Maintain vapor barrier integrity by applying a 1-piecejacket. D. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions or interruptions. E. Ensure hangers and cradles are properly installed to avoid crushing insulation. F. Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations. G- Insulation Exposed to Outdoors_ 1. Cover insulation with 0.016 inch aluminum. 2_ Lap joints minimum 3 inches and seal with cement. - - H. Cold Piping: 1. Cover fittings, valves, strainers, and flexible connections with equivalent thickness of insulation material. 2. Seal lap joints with 100% coverage of vapor barrier sealant and adhesive. 3. Seal butt joints with 4 inch wide strips of vapor barrier sealed with vapor barrier adhesive; or use double self-sealing factory joints. 4. Do not use staples on insulation for cold surfaces. I. Heating Water Piping: t Cover fittings with equivalent thickness of insulation material. J. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. K_ Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger_ 2. Shields: Galvanized sheet metal between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insertlocation: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. L. Continue insulation and jackets through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. M. Exposed Piping: 1. Finish all piping located below ceiling in public spaces with PVC cover. Architect to select color. 2. Piping in mechanical rooms shall be covered with PVC jacket colored to match system colors N. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with pvc jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PIPE INSULATION Project #10140 230719-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3.04 SCHEDULE 4/1712013 A. Heating Systems. 1. Heating Water Supply and Return: a. Pipe Sizes 112" to 1-1/2'' 1-1/2 inch thick Glass Fiber Insulation. B. Cooling Systems: 1. Refrigerant: a. Pipe Sizes 112'' to 1-112": One layer of 1/2 inch thick Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation. 2. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils: a. Pipe Sizes 112" to 4". 1/2 inch thick Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PIPE INSULATION Project #10140 230719-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A, Refrigerant piping specified and indicated on Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A, System shall comply with NFPA Chapter 1, Section 37, "Mechanical Refrigeration' and ANSIIASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Piping isometric showing system components (including sight glass, filter/dryer, solenoid valve, etc.) and pipe sizes, as recommended by manufacturer. B. Submit pipe schedule listing system served and pipe material product data PART PRODUCTS 2.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Refrigerant piping shall be Type "ACR' hard drawn refrigerant grade copper tubing to ASTM -B -29Q with soldered joints, Fittings shall be wrought copper solder joint type- All piping shall be.delivered-with capped ends, and shall be sealed against dirt and water until assembled. System shall be purgedlchai�ged with dry nitrogen and capped. B. Installation shall be made by experienced refrigeration mechanics. C. All refrigerant piping shall be cleaned, deoxidized, dehydrated, and sealed by the manufacturer before shipment. All ends shall remain sealed at all times until used. D. Fittings and flanged unions shall be cast brass or wrought copper refrigeration type fittings. Cast fittings shall be internally tinned before use. E Vibration eliminators shall be located in piping. Sizes above T shall be stainless steel type designed to restrict freedom of movement in three dimensions. F. Type of solder used shall depend on the location of joint 1. For pipe runs and joints (copper to copper), Staz-Silt' or Silfos, a solder composition with 15% silver (BCUP-S) should be used. 2. Where dissimilar metals are joined, such as copper to brass or copper to steel. Staz-Silt' or "easy -floe✓', a solder composition with 45% silver (BAG -1) should be used. 3. Where auxiliary components are installed, such as expansion valves, Staz-brite (soft solder) with tin and 4% silver should be used so parts can be readily changed as needed. 2.02 VALVES A. Purge valves, charging valves, oil drain valves, expansion valves, solenoid valves, service backseating valves, and all other valves for the safe and proper operation of refrigerant system shall be included in installation. When any of above valves is furnished as a part of manufacturers equipment, additional valves serving same purpose will not be required. Seal caps shall be used on all refrigerant valves. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A, Suitable refrigerant filter dryer which can be cleaned without breaking inlet and outlet refrigerant connections shall be installed in liquid line on the supply side of each solenoid valve. Provide line -sized valve bypass around filter dryer. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. REFRIGERANT PIPING Project #10140 23 23 00 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 B. Receivers shall be of steel construction, ASME rated and shall carry ASME stamp. Receiver shall be completely insulated with a removable cover over the ASME label. Receivers shall be fitted with armored sight glasses with ball check gauge valves. Receivers shall be fitted with drain valves accessibly located and fitted with hose coupling threads. C. Acceptable manufacturers: Refrigeration Research, Sporlan, or Superior. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. Refrigerant piping shall be installed as indicated on the drawings, and all equipment and piping shall be maintained absolutely dry and clean during handling and assembly. All flux and solder and scale shall be thoroughly cleaned from tube, and tubes shall be used during start up and shall be removed upon completion of testing. System will be inspected by the Design Professional before it is released for unattended operation. B. Piping shall be carefully jointed using a nitrogen bleed during soldering. Piping shall have oil trap and suction line shall pitch down in direction of flow. C. Refrigeration piping shall be tested for leaks and evacuated as follows: 1. Build up 20 psig in system with mixture of 90% nitrogen and 10% Freon and then increase pressure to 150 psig in suction piping and 350 psig in high side piping with dry nitrogen. Leak test with halide torch or leak detector. Repair all leaks. Repeat procedure until system is proven tight. 2. Bleed off pressure into portable storage containers (not to atmosphere) and install vacuum pump capable of evacuating to 0.1' HG absolute. Temperature shall be above 60'F during evacuation. Evacuate the system to 0.1" HG absolute with ZIMMERLI vacuum gauge or manometer. If the system does not hold vacuum for a period of two hours, go to step two. 3. Charge system with proper quantity of refrigerant. 4. After 80 hours of operation place new elements in filter driers. 5. Venting of refrigerant to atmosphere is prohibited. Reclaim all refrigerant whenever system is to be evacuated. D. Refrigerant and OII: 1. Contractor shall furnish sufficient refrigerant to charge each system. Amount of installed charges shall be permanently stamped on the receiver or compressor. Systems shall be fully charged at time of acceptance. In addition, Contractor shall furnish whatever additional amount of refrigerant may be required during guaranteed period due to repairs, replacements, or adjustments that Contractor may be required to make under guarantee provisions. 2. Same requirement shall apply to compressor lubricating oil except that amount charged or added shall be stamped on system. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. REFRIGERANT PIPING Project #10140 232300-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Nonmetal ductwork. C. Miscellaneous Blankoff Panels - 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS - A. ASH RAE Handbooks - Fundamentals, Applications, Systems, latest editions. 4117/2013 B. ASTM A 6531A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy - Coated (Galvannealed) by Hot -Dip Process; 2007_ C. NFPA 90A - Standard for Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association, 2009. D. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1985, First Edition_ E. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. F. SMACNA - HVAC Systems - Duct Design. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Ducts shall have minimum internal dimensions indicated on drawings. Whenever necessary to change shape of duct, it shall be done gradually and full area retained in accordance with ASHRAE "Table of Equivalence Rectangular and Round Ducts." B_ Ductwork, unless otherwise shown on drawings, or specified herein, shall be G-90 galvanized steel sheets (F.S. 00-S-775, Type 1, Class E) and joints shall be constructed so as not to trap condensed water_ C_ Minimum construction standards for sound plenums, supply air plenums, return air plenums, outside air plenums, mixed air plenums shall be SMACNA design for four (4) inches water gauge. All remaining ductwork shall be per Schedule in 3.048. D. Contractor may furnish equivalent round duct in lieu of rectangular ductwork shown on drawings; round pipe and fittings shall be as specified, maintaining friction rate equal to design. Design ceiling heights, soffits, lighting layouts, piping layouts, etc. shall not be revised to facilitate round duct option unless approved by Architect. Contractor remains responsible for coordination with and/or revisions to work of other trades. E. Where it is necessary that any portion of duct system be built around pipes, conduits, beams, or other obstructions, provide air stream deflectors for smooth flow at Contractor's cost. Maintain air stream velocity at obstruction; if required, enlarge duct to maintain this velocity at Contractor's cost. F Mitered elbows shall be furnished with turning vanes, unless noted otherwise, consisting of single thickness vanes, constructed to prevent vibration and eliminate air noise. 1. Elbows with unequal dimensions in plane of turn shall have leading and trailing edges of vanes parallel to sides of duct. 2. Use radius throat elbows where shown or noted on drawings; Contractor may elect to use radius throat elbows in lieu of square elbows with turning vanes as shown. Where indicated on drawings large radius throat elbows shall be provided with radius air turn vanes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #10140 2331 00-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit complete ductwork fabrication, layout and installation drawings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4/1712013 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing type of work specified in this section, with minimum 3 years of documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Exposed Ductwork shall be constructed with metal conforming to Paint Grip A-601. C. Insulated Flexible Ducts 1. Flexible duct shall be utilized ONLY for connections between air devices and terminals and sheet metal ductwork as shown on drawings. Manufacture flexible duct from spring steel helix covered with an impervious, reinforced, vapor proof material; conforming to requirements of Class I Air Duct Connectors, UL -181; Thermaflex, Atco, Flexmaster or approved equal. Six (6) foot maximum length fully extended. Where more length is required, remainder shall be rigid round ductwork. 2. Install duct in fully extended position with no kinks or sags; utilize only minimum length required to make - connection. Support ducts, as required, to prevent sagging with Y4" wide metal banding material or - Panduit straps. Secure joins with a draw band. 3. Low pressure supply, returniexhaust duct shall be nominal 1" thick glass fiber insulation with a "R' value of 4.2; complete with a vapor barrier jacket. Completely shield insulation from airflow with core material. a. Working pressure: 10" WG positive, 5' WG negative. b. Rated velocity: 4,000 fpm. �.' c. Thermaflex, Type M -KE or approved equal. 1) Connect flexible duct to rectangular ductwork with spin collars, include damper with locking - quadrant in collar where a manual damper is shown on plans. Damper shall have a regulator handle with adjustable locking quadrant, Miami Tech Inc. MSIC-SR, Flexmaster or approved equal; thumb screw in lieu of handle is NOT acceptable. Connect a 12" long, bright orange, locator ribbon to regulator handle for easy location above ceiling. Collar shall be complete with clamp bead. Secure flex duct to collar with nylon or metal cinch. d. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non -hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and SMACNA HVAC Dud Construction Standards - Round Duct, and as indicated. B. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated - C. Tees., bends, and elbows: Construct according to SMACNA (DCS). D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15° divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45° convergence downstream. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #10140 233100-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 E. Fabricate continuously welded round fittings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. F. Provide standard 45° lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90' conical tee connections may be used. G. Where exhaust and relief air ductwork is connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide insulated metal blank out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct. Transition intake ductwork to full louver area. H. Duct connectors as manufactured by Ductmate Industries may be used at Contractors option, but must meet all SMACNA requirements, including leakage class as specified_ 2.03 ROUND DUCTWORK A. Ductwork and fittings shall be factory manufactured or machine fabricated of galvanized steel with lock formed joints and seams. 1. Pressure classes up to 2" static pressure round ductwork shall be spiral seam pipe (spiral, grooved) with all joints and seams sealed with Hardcast Foil Grip, or equal; brush on sealant of any kid is NOT considered an equal. Include damper with locking quadrant in collar where a manual damper is shown on plans_ 2. Connect to rectangular ductwork with spin collars orjob fabricated transitions; seal airtight with Hardcast Foil Grip or equal; brush on sealant of any kind is NOT considered an equal. Where drawings indicate 45 degree entry taps or 45 degree lateral fittings, conical lateral or like fittings shall be used. 3. Fittings shall be wall thickness not less than that specified for ductwork; mitered, pleated and adjustable elbows are not acceptable. Where drawings indicate 45 degree entry taps or lateral fittings, conical lateral or like fittings shall be used. 4. Snaplock ductwork is NOT acceptable. a_ Pressure classes above 2" static pressure round ductwork and fittings of rigid spiral seam construction as manufactured by SEMCO or United McGill. Submit manufacturer's data for approval_ b. Construct fittings of spiral seam bodies and continuously welded longitudinal seam,bodies and arms. Use "one piece" die formed elbow in sizes 3 thru 8 inch. Smoothly draw branch entry on divided flow fittings before welding branch. ... c. Seal joints with Hardcast Aluma Grip AFT -701 or equal; brush on sealant of any kind r; NOT considered an equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. SMACNA seal class "A" for all operating pressures. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. - 1. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. 2. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 3. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. 4. Use crimp joints with or without bead forjoining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. 5. All ductwork seams shall be sealed with hard cast joint sealant compound or heat shrink plastic per SMACNA high pressure standards. 6. Ducts shall be of internal dimensions shown on drawings. In no case shall be indicated size of ductwork be changed without prior approval of Architect/Engineer. Wherever it is necessary to change shape of duct, it shall be done gradually and full area retained. 7. Ducts shall be constructed with easy elbowfittings except where square turns are specifically indicated on drawings or are approved by ArchitectlEngineer. throat radius elbows shall be 12 inches minimum except where space is not available in which case radius shall be as large as possible, but not less than a radius ratio of 15_ Turning vanes must be used in miter elbows. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC_ HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project 910140 2331 00- 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 8. Ducts shall be stiffened as necessary to prevent sagging or buckling and to provide a rigid installation and freedom from vibration and noise when fan is operating. 9. Means for expansion of long lengths of duct should be provided. 10. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 11. As an option contractor can substitute double wall for rectangular ductwork in exposed areas. a. Ductwork delivered to jobsite shall be covered watertight, and not placed directly on ground or floor without being elevated by blocking to prevent water intrusion. No ductwork shall be installed without first having interior wiped clean and dry. b. NO DUCTWORK SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH DAMP INSULATION OR DUST/DIRT IN INTERIOR. Any ductwork found in this condition shall be removed from site immediately and replaced, all at contractor's expense. 12. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. NO DUCTWORK SHALL BE LEFT OPEN AT END OF A WORKDAY. Any ductwork found open at start of a workday shall be cleaned immediately or replaced, at contractor's expense. 3.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR DUCTS A. Horizontal ducts shall be supported with substantial angle and rod or strap iron trapeze hangers not less than 1/8 inch by 1 inch placed entirely around sides and bottoms of ducts and securely fastened to ducts and to construction above. B. Attachments to steel beams shall be by "C" clamps. Rods shall be not less than 5/16 inch diameter with eye close to ceiling and matching bolt to attach trapeze duct hanger. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. C. Horizontal duct supports shall be spaced not to exceed 8 feel apart and at least two trapeze supports per section of duct (this maximum spacing applies to both round and rectangular ducts). D. Ducts 24 inches or greater in width, height or diameter shall be stiffened with galvanized structural angle _ reinforcing (round ducts shall be reinforced with prefabricated rings), not to exceed four feet on centers and on all four surfaces (entire circumference on round ducts), to prevent sagging or buckling and to provide a rigid installation and freedom from vibration and noise. Where angle cleats are made of same gauge metal as ducts (or heavier) angle cleats shall serve as reinforcing members on two surfaces of ducts at joints in ducts. Additional reinforcing angles shall be provided adjacent to branch duct connections, which are of less width or depth than surface of main duct at points of connection and at all other locations to make ductwork free frdm noise and vibration when fans are operating. .3.03 CLEANING PROCEDURE AFTER INSTALLATION A: Initial Cleaning: Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. ` To obtain sufficient air, clean half system at a time Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. B. Intermediate Cleaning: Clean duct systems with high power HEPA vacuum machines. Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes, C. Final Cleaning: All ductwork and equipment that is accessible through access panels shall be hand wiped with oil -free tack rags. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Ductwork Material: 1. All Supply: Steel. 2. Return and Relief: Steel, 3, Outside Air Intake: Steel. 4. Ductwork Pressure Class: a. Supply (Downstream of Air Terminal Unit): 2 inch. b. Supply (From Air Handling Unit to Air Terminal Unit): 4 inch. c. Return and Relief: 3 inch. d. Outside Air Intake: 3 inch. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #10140 2331 00-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3.05 LEAKAGE TESTING OF INSTALLED SYSTEM 4/17/2013 A. Contractor shall perform a leak test all duct fabricated. Testing of duct system in sections is permissible provided that all sections are tested. B. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven (7) days advanced notice for testing. C. Maximum Allowable Leakage: As described in SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Comply with requirements for SMACNA Leakage Classification 3 for all pressure classes. D. Leakage test procedures shall follow outlines and classifications in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual." E. If specimen fails to meet allotted leakage level, contractor shall modify to bring it into compliance and shall retest it until acceptable leakage is demonstrated. F. Tests and necessary repair shall be completed prior to insulation and/or concealment of duds. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC- HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #10140 2331 00-5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC, Project #10140 4/17/2013 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100-6 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct Access Doors. B. Duct Test Holes. C. Flexible Duct Connections. D. Volume Control Dampers. 4/17/2013 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. B. NFPA 92A -Standard for Smoke -Control Systems Utilizing Barriers and Pressure Differences; 2009 C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, 2005. D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire -Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003. E. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2006. F. UL 5555 - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1999_ 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers_ 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. B, Cover all temporary ductwork locations outdoors and indoors with tape and polyethylene covers to prevent dust and dirt from entering the ductwork at all times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Fan Corp: wwwyreenheck,corn 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www_ruskincom. 4. SEMCO Incorporated: vlmw, semcoinc com. 5. United Enertech INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #10140 23 33 00 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4117/2013 B. Fabrication: Rigid and close -fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 2. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 3. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. C_ Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.02 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps. B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coaled woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide. 3. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel. .. L Temperature: 10°F to 275`F. t. 5. Pressure. (+) (-) 10" w -g_ _ C. Flexible duct connections for stainless steel lab exhaust or similar systems shall be stainless steel flanged -" with a two -layer Teflon coated fiberglass construction. Connectors shall comply with UL Standards #214 and -NFPA 102. r D. Connections shall be factory fabricated 1 -unit molded body and Flanges with adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse and torsional movement. Connections shall also be capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. Equip with corrosion -resistant steel flanges and retaining rings with a fabric reinforced elastomer. E. Where duct connections are made to fans, air handlers, rooftop units, etc. or where ducts of dissimilar metal are connected, a noncombustible flexible connection having a nonfibrous surface exposed to the air stream (i.e. rubber or neoprene coated fabric) or other noncombustible materials approximately 6 inches in width, conforming to ASTM Specification D 1571-67 shall be installed. F. Interior connections shall be fire retardant, 30 ounce closely woven glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Ventfabrics, Inc. Ventglas Metaledge; Duro Dyne Corp.; or approved equal. G. Exterior connections exposed to weather shall be fire retardant, 26 ounce closely woven glass fabric, double coated with Hypalon, resistant to sunlight, ozone and weather. Ventfabrics, Inc. Ventlon; cure Dyne Corp.; or approved equal. 2.04 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com (MD35, MD25, MDRS25) 2. Louvers & Dampers. Inc: www.louv_er-s-damngrs.wm 3. Nailer Industries Inc: www.nailor.gom. 4. Greenheck Fan Corp: www.greenheck eom- 5. Pottorff 6, United Enertech B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 16 ga thickness (equal to above). INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #10140 233300-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 C. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 24 inch. E. Multi -Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Round Ducts. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class. 1. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside, relief air louver and where indicated. 2. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 18 x 18 inch size and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. 3. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes 4. For fans developing static pressures of 5.0 inches and over, cover flexible connections with leaded vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps_ 5. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. 6. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take -off. END OF SECTION _J INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #10140 233300-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 4/17/2013 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 4/17/2013 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. C. Relief hoods. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007. B. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006. C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. B. Architect shall review all diffuser and grille submittal. C. All diffusers and grilles final finishes and colors to be selected by architect from standard finish chart. Submit finish and color chart with submittals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Titus- www.titus-hvac.com_ - B. Carnes Company HVAC: www.carnes_com. C. Krueger: w Arueger-hvac com. D. Price Industries: www.orice-hvac.com. E Metal'aire www.metalaire.com - F. Nailer G. Tuttle and Bailey_ 2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Basis of design, Titus OMNI INNOVATIVEENGINEERS, INC. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Project #10140 233700-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY B. Fabrication: Aluminum with factory off-white enamel finish. 4/17/2013 C. Type: Square, panel ceiling diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectonzing baffles where indicated. D. Frame: Hard ceiling type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. 2.03 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERSIGRILLES A. Basis of design, Titus 350 FL. B. Type: Streamlined blades, 314 inch minimum depth, 3!4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting. D. Fabrication: Steel with factory white finish. E. Damper. Integral, gang -operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. All screws and fastening hardware to be concealed where available. Fasteners exposed to chlorine environment, provide 316L stainless steel hardware. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. See plan drawings for schedule. B. Verify plan drawings for all duct connection sizes and ceiling types prior to final selection. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Project #10140 233700-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 40 00 r ' HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air filtration filters. B. Filterframes. C- Filter gages, 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4/17/2013 A. ARI 850 -Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment; Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, 2004. B. ASHRAE Std 52.2 -Method of Testing General Ventilation Air -Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007.. C. UL 900 -Standard for Air Filter Units; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ARI 850 Section 7.4. 1. Dust Spot Efficiency: Plus or minus 5 percent. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly and filter frames, dimensions, motor locations and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate filter assembly and filter frames, dimensions, motor locations, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and change -out procedures. D. Operation and Maintenance Data Include instructions for operation, changing, and periodic cleaning. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for University of Missouri's use in maintenance of project. 1 _ Extra Filters: Provide new clean filters at substantial completion when building is turned over to Owner_ 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated_ 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A, Provide specified filters for temporary use during construction, and replace with new filters when the differential pressure is at 70 percent of dirty filter reading. S. Replace filters at start of Commissioning and again at final acceptance by Owner. C_ Furnish one (1) extra set of new filters for each filter bank after Substantial Completion, including but not limited to the following: 1. Replaceable throwaway. 2. Replaceable dry type medium and high efficiency. 3. High efficiency caissons. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES Project #10140 23 40 00 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER MANUFACTURERS A. American Filtration Inc: www.americanfiltration.com. B. AAF International/American Air Filter: www.aafintl_com. C, Camfil Farr Company: www.camfilfarr.com. D. Flanders. 2.02 DISPOSABLE, EXTENDED AREA PANEL FILTERS 4/17/2013 A. Media. UL 90D Class 1, pleated, lofted, non -woven, reinforced cotton fabric, supported and bonded to welded wire grid by corrugated aluminum separators. t Nominal thickness: 2 inchesfor all AHUs and UVs- 2. Nominal thickness. 4 inch for AHU-6, -7, & UV -1 B. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV): As shown below when tested in accordance with ASH RAE 52.2. 1. Equipment Type/Minimum MERV Rating `/Thickness/ Filter type a- AHU-1, AHU-2/812"/Pleated b. ' Denotes when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2 2.03 FILTER FRAMES AND HOUSINGS A- General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of 16 gage galvanized steel or extruded aluminum T -section construction with necessary gasketing between frames and walls. B. Standard Sizes: Provide for interchangeability of filter media of other manufacturers; for panel filters, size for 24 x 24 inches filter media, minimum 2 inches thick; for extended surface and high efficiency particulate air filters, provide for upstream mounting of panel filters. C. Side Servicing Housings: Flanged for insertion into ductwork, of reinforced 16 gage galvanized steel; access doors with continuous gasketing and positive locking devices on both sides; extruded aluminum tracks or channels for primary secondary filters with positive sealing gaskets. 2.04 FILTER GAGES A. Manufacturers: 1'. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dvyer-inst. com. 2. H.O. Trerice Co: www.trerice.com. - 3.Weiss Instruments wwwweissinstruments.com. B. Direct Reading Dial: 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case, vent valves, black figures :.-. on white background, front recalibration adjustment, range 0-0.5 inch WG, 2 percent of full scale accuracy. C. Inclined Manometer One piece molded plastic with epoxy coated aluminum scale, inclined -vertical indicating tube and built-in spirit level, range 0-3 inch WG, 3 percent of full scale accuracy. -b_ Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4 inch aluminum tubing, 2 -way or 3 - way vent valves. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES Project 410140 234000-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets. C. Install filter gage static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level. D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place_ Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set. E. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES Project #10140 23 40 00 - 3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 4/17i2013 HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES 234000-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 63 13 ' AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Refrigerant condenser package. _ B. Charge of refrigerant and oil. C. Electrical power connections. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4/17/2013 A. ARI 2101240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air -Source Heal Pump Equipment; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2006. B. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007. C. ASHRAE Std 20 - Methods of Testing for Rating Remote Mechanical -Draft Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1997 (R2006). D. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2004. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 2003- F. UL 207 - Refrigerant -Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., 2001- 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data_ Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical requirements, and wiring diagrams B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loading, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Include schematic layouts showing condenser, refrigeration compressors, cooling coils, refrigerant piping and accessories required for complete system. C. Manufacturers Instructions: Submit manufacturer's complete installation instructions. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A- Comply with manufacturers installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units. B. Protect units on site from physical damage. Protect coils. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A- Carrier 24ABB: www.carrier.corn. B. Approved equivalent 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Provide packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit, suitable for outdoor use consisting of casing, condensing coil and fans, integral sub -cooling coil liquid accumulator. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS Project #10140 236313-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 B. Capacity As Scheduled on drawings. C. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240 and UL 207. Testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Std 20. D. House components in welded steel frame with steel panels with weather resistant, baked enamel finish. Unit casing shall be steel, reinforced and braced with a steel angle framework. Casing and accessories shall be chemically cleaned, phosphatized and coated with a baked enamel primer finish before assemble. Finish coat of air dry enamel shall be applied to all exterior surfaces after final assembly. E Coils shall be aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Provide sub -cooling circuits. Air test under water to 425 psig (2900 kPa), and vacuum dehydrate. Seal with holding charge of nitrogen. All coils shall have an integral subcooling circuit for a minimum of 15°F subcooling and external liquid receiver. F. Coil Guard: Expanded metal with lint screens. G. Fans shall be vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on discharge, equipped with roller or ball bearings with grease fittings extended to outside of casing. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and factory tested with the fan installed in the casing. H. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, SINGLE PHASE, with permanent lubricated ball bearings and built-in current and thermal overload protection. I. Controls shall be factory wired and mounted control panel, NEMA 250, containing fan motor starters, fan cycling thermostats, compressor interlock, and control transformer. J. Provide thermostat to cycle fan motors in response to outdoor ambient temperature. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install with manufacture's instructions. B. Provide for connection to electrical service. . C. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system. Comply with ASHRAE Std 15, D. Install condensing units on concrete base with isolation pads or vibration isolators. E. Anchor condensing units to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Charge the condensing units and condensers with refrigerant. r ,G. Install accessories and any other equipment furnished loose by the manufacturer, according to manufacturer _ written instructions and electrical requirements. H. Install thermometers and gages as recommended by the manufacturer and/or as shown on drawings. I. Purge system to the outside. J. Provide cooling season start-up, winter season shut -down service, for first year of operation. K. Shut -down system if initial start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines are to remain inoperative. Repeat start-up and testing operation at beginning of first cooling season. 3.02 STARTUP AND TESTING A. Inspect, equipment installation. including field -assembled components, and piping and electrical connections. B. After complete installation startup checks, according to manufacturers written instructions, do following to demonstrate equipment operation and performance as intended. 1. Check refrigerant charge is sufficient and equipment has been tested for refrigerant leak. 2. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 3. Verify proper motor rotation. 4. Verify purge system, if installed, is functional and relief piping is routed outdoor. 5. Prepare a written report outlining the results of tests and inspections, and submit. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS Project #10140 236313-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 73 13 EVAPORATIVE COILS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Evaporative coils. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4/17/2013 A. ARI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute, 2006. B. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc., 2007. C, ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc,; 2004. D. UL 207 - Refrigerant -Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2001. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect coils on site from physical damage. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carder: www.carrier.com - - B. Approved equivalent. 2.02 EVAPORATIVE COIL A. Provide coil modules for cooling coils in air handling unit associated with air cooled refrigerant unit. Enclose coil case so no tubes are exposed or visible. B. Coil selection shall not exceed maximum face velocity allowed by coil manufacturer. Face velocity shall not allow for moisture carryover from cooling coil. C. Coils shall be burst tested to 450 psig and proof tested to 300 1 air pressure under water. D. Suction headers shall be constructed of copper tubing and shall penetrate unit casing to allow for sweat connections to refrigerant lines. Unit casing shall have suction and liquid line connections clearly labeled on exterior of unit. E_ Cooling coil sections shall include sloped, insulated, double -walled drain pan to extend under coil section. 1. Drain connections shall be provided on one side of each drain pan. 2. Drain pans shall slope to prevent standing water. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system. Comply with ASHRAE Std 15, INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. EVAPORATIVE COILS Project #10140 237313-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY C. Purge system to outside. 4/1712013 D. Provide cooling season start-up, winter season shut -down service, for first year of operation. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. EVAPORATIVE COILS Project #10140 2373 13 -2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 23 81 01 UNITARY HEAT TRANSFER UNIT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Natural Gas condensing furnace_ 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements. 4/17/2013 B. Shop Drawings- 1. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers, and comparison of specified heat required to actual heat output provided. 2. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements. C. Manufacturer's Instructions- Indicate installation instructions and recommendations. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3 Gas -Fired Central Furnaces. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturers warranty for unit. - 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS - A. Provide two sets of filters. PART 2 PRODUCTS , 2.01 NATURAL GAS CONDENSING FURNACE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Model 59SC213: www.carrier.com 2. Approved equivalent. B. Self-contained natural gas furnace unit. Draw -through design with natural gas combustion and primary and secondary heat exchangers. Provide with filter box and direct digital control capability. C. Air moving and Heating Capacity: As Scheduled on drawings. D. Heating shall be capable for twinning applications. E. Housing shall be constructed of galvanized heavy sheet steel panels with exposed edges rounded. Provide removable front panels with quick -acting, key -operated cam locks. Provide removable die -Gast or fabricated steel discharge grilles. Finish shall be factory apply baked enamel of color as selected on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet. F. Casing shall be capable of withstanding 6 inches positive or 4 inches negative pressure. Closed cell neoprene gasketing shall be used where modules are joined. Interior walls shall not be perforated. G. Fans shall be centrifugal forward -curved double -width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven, arranged to draw air through coil. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. UNITARY HEAT TRANSFER UNIT Project #10140 2381 01 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 H. Motor shall be tap wound multiple speed permanent split capacitor with sleeve bearings, resiliently mounted. Motor nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 20 percent with forward curved fans. Motor shall be especially designed for quiet operation_ I. Control: Micro -processor based integrated electronic controls, factory wired, controllable by digital thermostat controller. J. Filter: Easily removed 1 inch thick glass fiber throw -away type, located to filter air before coil_ K. Isolators shall be provided with internal leveling bolts, adjustable neoprene stabilizers, locating pin in center of top casting, 114 -inch thick neoprene jacketed precompressed molded fiberglass noise isolation pad bonded to the underside of the unit, and 114 -inch thick precompressed molded fiberglass noise isolation pad bonded to the top of the isolator. Vibration isolators shall be adjusted for maximum efficiency. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install In accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished. Do not damage equipment or finishes. C. Protection: Provide finished cabinet units with protective covers during balance of construction. D. Locate as indicated on drawings, level and shim units, and anchor to structure. . E. Connect thermostat and controls to units. 3.02 CLEANING A. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets. B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory -finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. C. Install new filters. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 UNITARY HEAT TRANSFER UNIT 2381 01 -2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. All labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to perform all work and services for execution, installation and completion of all electrical work including all parts lists, operating instructions, wiring and control diagrams as shown on the drawings and as specified and completely coordinated with work of all other trades. B. All supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete electrical installation, although such work is not specifically indicated. C. Complete, in operative condition and to approval of Architect/Engineer, materials contemplated herein and shown on drawings. D. Equipment, materials and accessories for electrical systems as shown and noted on the drawings including but not limited to the following: 1. Complete rough -in system including conduit, outlet boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, sleeves and hangers. 2. Complete wiring system- 3- All cutting and patching. 4. Wiring devices and coverplates_ a. Interconnecting power raceway and wiring for specified heating and refrigeration equipment, unless otherwise shown - b. Interconnecting power raceway and wiring for specified ventilating equipment, unless otherwise shown. c. Starters, controllers and interconnecting power and control raceway and wiring for specified pumps unless otherwise shown. d. Flashing and sealing of all raceway roof penetration_ . 1.02 RELATED WORK A_ Specified elsewhere: 1. 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 2. 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems 3. 26 08 00 - Commissioning of Electrical Systems 4. 26 24 16 - Panelboards 5. 26 28 00 - LowOVoltage Circuit Protective Devices 6. 26 28 16 - Enclosed Switches 7. 26 29 33 - Mechanical Equipment Connections _ 8- 26 51 00 - Lighting 9. 28 31 10 - Fire Detection and Alarm 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer to prevent damage during shipment shall suitably package materials. Damaged materials will not be acceptable for use. B. Store materials on site in clean, dry storage area; when outside, elevated above grade and enclosed with durable watertight wrapping. C. Handle all materials carefully to prevent damage. Minor scratches, marks or blemishes to finish shall be repaired to satisfaction of Architect/Engineer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements- 1. Permits: Arrange and pay for all permits, inspections and utility connections required. 2. Comply with ANSI Cl, National Electrical Code, 2008. 3. Reference Publications: a. American National Standards Institute, ANSI. 1) C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, zinc coated. 2) C80.4 - Specification for fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and EMT. b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA. 1) OS -1 - Sheet steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. 2) 250 Enclosures for electrical equipment. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project#10140 260500-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 3) WC -5 -Thermoplastic insulated wire and cable. 4) WD -1, WD -5 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. 5) FB -1 - Conduit and cable assemblies. 6) KS -1 -Switches. C. Manufacturer's Catalog. 1) Catalogs of specified manufactures current at date of contract documents are incorporated by reference to same force and effect as if repeated herein. In conflicts between catalogs and project manual. Project Manual governs. 4. Provide all new materials, without blemish or defect, in accord with standards specified and NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) listed or labeled. 1.05 STANDARDS A. Provide materials, perform work and install materials in strict accordance with the latest requirements of the following: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 2. Other applicable codes and standards of NFPA. 3. Factory Mutual System (FM). 4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 6. Federal, state and local codes, laws, ordinances; and rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. In case of conflict or disagreement between codes, laws, ordinances, rules and regulations or within either document itself, the more stringent condition shall govern. 8. Use electrical materials tested, listed and labeled by NRTL and bearing the NRTL label. a. All fabricated assemblies, manufactured items or electrically operated equipment shall have NRTL approval or NRTL re-examination listing in every case where such approval has been established for the particular type of materials or devices in question. 1.06 COORDINATION & SUBMITTALS A. The contractor shall provide 114" = V-0" coordination drawings showing locations, dimensions and height of - installation of all major pieces of equipment, electrical conduits >1-112", ductwork, and piping provided under --- their respective contracts. The contractor shall overlay their respective drawings and resolve all conflicts before actual in.stallation begins. B' -Submit copies of drawings and information for review in accordance with project specifications. C. Submit for review and before installation, shop drawings and/or descriptive literature on all electrical products, materials and specialties proposed to be furnished including the following: 1. Wiring devices and coverplates. 2. All cuts for the above shall have rough -in dimensions, connection sizes and any special installation requirements. D. Operation & Maintenance Manual: 1. Upon completion of the work, provide the Owner with three (3) copies of a hard bound -operating manual for all equipment furnished and installed under this work. The manual shall, however, first be approved by the ArchitecUEngineer. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. Wherever the words `the Contractor', 'this Contractor" cr"Electrical Contractor", appear in this section, they refer to the Contractor for Electrical Work. B. The term' provideincludes such labor, methods, materials, equipment and transportation or other facilities required to complete the Contract, and the performance of all duties thereby upon the Contractor. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. In entering into a contract covering this work, the contractor accepts the specifications and guarantees that the work will be carried out in accordance with the requirements of this specification or such modifications as may be made under the contract documents. B. Contractor further guarantees that the workmanship and material will be of the best procurable and that none but experienced workmen familiar with each particular class of work will be employed. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 - `4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY ' C. Contractor further guarantees to replace and make good at his own expense all defects, whichmaydevelop within 1 year after final payment and acceptance by the Architect/Engineer, due to faulty workmanship or material, upon, receipt of written notification from the Owner. - 1.09 JOB CONDITIONS - A. Existing conditions: 1. In order to become familiar with the scope of the work involved, visit the existing site, before submitting bid, and carefully examine the existing condition in order to have full knowledge and understanding of the conditions and restrictions affecting the performance of the work required. Include in bid all work which is reasonably inferred by the contract drawings and specifications, whether specifically shown or not, as a result of existing conditions, construction, irregularities and interferences which may affect work. No additional compensation will be considered for misunderstanding the conditions to be met. 2. The layout shown on the drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as other work will permit. Changes from these drawings required to make this work conform to the building construction shall be made only with prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer. All proposed changes shall be shown on shop drawings. All measurements shall be verified by actual observation and all work shall ft in place meeting the approval of the Architect/Engineer. 3. The contractor shall provide openings required in new and existing construction that may be necessary for the installation of electrical work and all patching and workmen competent in the trade required, at the expense of the contractor shall do repairing. The contractor shall be responsible for arranging the work so that minimum cutting will be required. All rubbish and excess materials involved in such cutting shall be promptly removed from the site and disposed of by the contractor. Cutting through the floor or roof systems or load bearing walls shall be done only with the prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer so as to avoid damaging the structural system. 4. Sequencing, scheduling: a. Confer with the contractor regarding the location and size of conduits, equipment, rough -in openings and special architectural treatments in order that there may be no interferences between the installation or the progress of the work of the contractor on the project. The order of space preference shall be as listed above. It. In the case of interconnection of the work of two or more contractors, verify at the site or on shop drawings all dimensions relating to such work. All errors due to the failure to so verify any such dimensions shall be promptly rectified. C. All line voltage wiring and final connections to complete mechanical systems shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. All electrical conduit, wire, and connections relating to mechanical equipment controls and all wiring associated with starter holding coils, shall be the responsibility of the contractor installing the mechanical equipment unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. The contractor installing the mechanical equipment shall be responsible for magnetic motor starters where such starters are part of the control package of the equipment supplied. All other starters shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. d. Access panels, in walls or ceilings, required for access and maintenance shall be provided by the respective contractor. Access panels are not required in areas where the ceiling system is lay -in tile; however, sufficient space must be available in and through the ceiling system to allow maintenance and adjustment of equipment. Access panels shall be approximately 15 inches by 18 inches wherever possible and shall be provided with flush trim and an allen key operated cam lock fastener. Karp, Milder, or Bilco shall manufacture panels. e. Items of equipment may be specified in the singular however, provide and install the number of items of equipment as indicated on the drawings and as required for a complete system. f. Each contractor shall provide excavating, pumping, backfilling, and compacting required for the installation of their respective work as shown on the drawings. g. Equipment and devices furnished and installed by electrical contractors, which have factory prime coat, orfinal surface finish shall be replaced, repaired or refinished if defective or damaged during installation. h. Arrange all work so a minimum period of interruption or outages will occur in the temporary or permanent transfer of services as required for all electrical revisions. Not less than 48 hours notification to the Owner shall be required before approval will be granted for any disruption of gas, electric, or telephone services. The outage request shall include the extent of the work to be done, length of outage time required, and the time at which the outage is to begin. No allowance will be made for extra payment as a result of scheduling "overtime" work necessary to perform before or after normal or regular working hours to accomplish the work intended. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/1 712 01 3 Submit a "Sequence of Work Schedule" in respect to all temporary and permanent utility and service cutovers after final determination. This schedule shall be submitted for approval to the ArchitecUEngineer. The submittal shall designate priority order, service or utility affected, date of cutover, and time of day to start and flnish- PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (thin wall conduit, EMT) 1. All electrical metallic tubing shall be hot dipped galvanized coated, bear a NRTL label and shall conform to Federal Specifications WW -C-563, ANSI C80-3, and UL 797. 2. Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., Republic Steel Corp., Wheatland Tube Co-, Southwire Co. shall manufacture all electrical metallic tubing, or Arch itecUEngineer approved equal. B. Rigid Steel Conduit 1. All rigid steel conduits shall be hot dipped galvanized coated plus a secondary coat with galvanized threads bears a NRTL label and shall conform to Federal Specifications W W -C -581d, ANSI C80-1. 2, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.. Republic Steel Corp, Wheatland Tube Co., Southwire Co. shall manufacture all rigid steel conduits, or Architect/Engineer approved equal. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 1. Intermediate metal conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized coated; galvanized coated threads bear a NRTL label and shall conform to a NRTL standard for IMC. 2. Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., Republic Steel Corp., Wheatland Tube Co., Southwire Co. shall manufacture intermediate metal conduit or ArchitecUEngineer approved equal. D. Flexible Steel Conduit 1. All flexible steel conduits shall be hot dipped galvanized coated bears a NRTL label and shall conform to Federal Specifications WW -C -566C. 2. Triangle PWC, American Flexible Conduit Co„ Inc., Anaconda Metal Hose, shall manufacture all flexible steel conduits or ArchitecUEngineer approved equal. E. Liquid -tight Flexible Steel Conduit 1. All liquid -tight flexible steel conduit shall be interlocking flexible galvanized steel conduit with a special polyvinyl chloride covering extruded over the flexible conduit to make the conduit liquid -tight resistant to moisture, oil, chemicals and corrosive fumes. 2. Anaconda Metal Hose, O-Z)Gedney, Triangle PWC shall manufacture all liquid -tight flexible steel conduits, or Architect/Engineer approved equal. cF'. PVC Plastic Conduit 1, '..A I PVC conduits shall be schedule 40 heavy wall duct- Conduit shall be composed of high impact PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride -C-200 compound) and shall conform to industry NEMA Standards and be NRTL listed -for underground and exposed use. Material shall have tensile strength of 7,000 psi at 73.4'F, flexural strength of 11,000 psi, compression strength of 8,600 psi, and minimum wall thickness in various sizes. 2. All conduit fittings, couplings, terminal adapters, junction boxes and necessary fittings shall be of the sofyent welding material. 3. Carlon, Can -Tex, Triangle PWC Ina, shall manufacture all PVC conduits or ArchitecUEngineer approved equal. 2.02 CONDUIT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Surface Mounted Conduits 1. Rigid steel, IMC and EMT conduits 1 inch and smaller shall be supported with hot dipped galvanized one hole steel pipe straps. 2. Rigid steel, IMC and EMT conduits 1 1/4 inches and larger shall be supported with hot dipped galvanized one hole malleable iron pipe straps with pipe spacers. 3. Race, Efcor, T & B, Appleton shall manufacture all pipe straps, or Architect/Engineer approved equal. B. Suspended Conduits 1. Individual rigid steel, IMC and EMT conduit 1 inch and smaller shall be supported with conduit clips of high carbon spring steel or zinc plated steel and support 100 pounds static load. Conduit clip shall be provided with 1/4' 20 threaded impression for attachment to 1/4 inch 20 threaded rod. 2. Individual rigid steel, IMC and EMT conduit 1 114 inches and larger shall be supported with stamped steel conduit clamps with 1/4 inch 20 bolt and nut and support 150 pounds static load. Provide conduit clamps with 318 inch 16 threaded boss for attachment to 3/8 inch 16 threaded rod. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 3. Support two or more rigid steel, IMC or EMT conduits adjacent to each other by 1 5/8 inches by 1 5/8 inches metal framing channel with minimum of two 112 inch 13 threaded rod at each end. Attach conduits to metal framing channel with electro -galvanized split pipe clamps with screw and nut. 4. Race, Efcor, T & B, Appleton shall manufacture conduit clips and clamps, or ArchitecUEngineer approved equal. 5. Unistrut, Super Strut, Kindorf shall manufacture metal framing channel and split pipe clamps, or Architect/Engineer approved equal. 6. Conduit shall not be supported from plumbing lines or ductwork. C. Anchors 1. Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors shall be used for hollow masonry. 2. Lead expansion anchors or preset anchors shall be used for solid masonry. 3. Self -drilling anchors or preset anchors shall be used for concrete. 4. Machine screws, bolts, self -tapping screws or welded studs shall be used for metal. 5. Wood screws shall be used for wood. 2.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. All conduit fittings and box connectors shall be strong in construction and shall be of such material and finish as not to cause any chemical reaction between itself and the conduit or outlet box which it is fastened or supported. B. All conduit fittings and box connectors shall be listed by a NRTL. C. Insulated throat fittings are only required on conduits 2" and larger. D. All conduit fittings, box connectors and lock nuts shall be of steel or malleable iron materials. E. Fittings for EMT shall be set screw type, rain -tight and concrete -tight. Connectors, couplings, locknuls and other fittings for rigid steel heavy wall and IMC conduit shall be threaded type. F. Connectors specified in this paragraph can be zinc plated steel in lieu of malleable iron. G. Liquid -tight flexible conduit connectors shall be steel or malleable iron compression type with insulated throat and "a' ring assembly. H. Fittings for flexible conduit or liquid -tight flexible conduit shall be of the straight 45 degree or 90 degree connectors and approved for grounding purposes. . I_ Provide expansion joint fittings where expansion joints are shown on architectural drawings. 2.04 BOXES AND COVERS A. All junction boxes pull boxes, fixture outlet boxes and switch boxes shall be listed by a NRTL. B. All boxes and covers shall meet all requirements of the National Electrical Code. - C. All boxes and covers shall be made of code gauge steel. D. All boxes shall be of proper size and shape for all conduits and conductors entering them. - --- E. Install device boxes with bracket attached to box and wall stud to eliminate movement of box in wall. F. All boxes installed in poured concrete, block, brick or tile shall be masonry type. G. All multiple gang switch boxes of more than three -gang shall be solid gang box. H. Surface mount boxes on the ceiling are note required to be FS or FD type boxes. Stamped steel boxes are acceptable for boxes on the ceiling. I. Where two or more conduits enter a box, the minimum size of boxes shall be 4 inches by 4 inches by 1 112 inches minimum depth. For single device installation, install square cut single device cover. J. Install all device boxes with square cut device covers for number of devices required. K. All boxes shall have tapped hole for 10-32 ground screw. L. Race, Steel City, Appleton shall manufacture boxes and covers, or Architect/Engineer approved equal. 2.05 CABLE AND WIRE A. All wire shall have copper conductors and be listed by a NRTL. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 B. Service entrance conductors shall be 600 volts insulation type XHHW-2 90°C. All other wire shall be 600 volts insulation type THWN 90°C insulation for sizes No. 6 to 500 MCM and type THHN 90°C insulation for sizes No. 12 to No. 8. C. Under ground wire to pole mounted light fixtures shall be type USE in conduit. D. Provide long barrel, NEMA 2 hole copper compression connectors for all cables connected to the padmounted transformer. Make all connections with stainless steel hardware. E. Minimum wire size shall be No. 12 except for internal fixture wire that shall be minimum size of No. 14 type AF, CF or TFN, 300 volt. F. All wire (excluding fire alarm and low voltage wiring) shall be stranded, including #12 AWG and #10 AWG branch circuit wiring. G. All branch circuit wiring and feeder cables for circuits over 20 amperes shall be sized as noted on the drawings. If size is not specifically noted, size all branch circuit wiring and feeder cables in accordance with the National Electrical Code. H. Cable and wire not installed in conduit shall be #12 AWG SO or SJO type grounded cord. Cord shall terminate at junction boxes and devices with strain relief cord grids. I. Triangle, Crescent, Colleyer, and General Cable shall manufacture all wire, or Architect/Engineer approved equal. 2.06 METAL CLAD CABLE A. MC cable is not allowed. 2.07 ELECTRICAL WIRING DEVICES A. All devices are specified as having black finish in wood, white finish if in drywall. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to change the color. B.— Furnish all special outlets with mating caps with cord grips. C7, Schedule of all electrical devices: 1. Single Pole Switch - 20 amperes at 120 volts a. Hubbell DS120 - 2. Three Way Switch - 20 amperes at 120 volts a. . Hubbell DS320 -3. Four Way Switch - 20 amperes at 120 volts a. Hubbell DS420 4. Duplex Convenience Outlet - 20 amperes at 120 volts a. 'Hubbell DR20 5. Duplex Convenience Tamper Resistant Outlet - 20 amperes at 120 volts a. Hubbell D20TR 6. Duplex Convenience Outlet - GFI - 20 amperes at 120 volts a. Hubbell GF20 D. Forward submittals to ArchitecUEngineer for review. 2.08 WIRING DEVICE PLATES A. All device plates shall be furnished with proper openings for the device with which it is being used. Where required, multiple gang plates for correct combination shall be used. B. Device plates shall fit tight against the finished walls and shall completely cover the openings in the walls for the boxes. C. Device plates shall be attached and adjusted so they finish straight and level. D- Where more than one light switch is gained or a light switch and outlet are installed in a two gang box, install multiple gang device plates with proper openings. E- Provide 1/2 inch raised galvanized device covers where used for exposed conduit work. F. All device plates shall be black if located on wood and white if located on drywall, with the proper openings for the device with which they are being used. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-6 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/1712013 G. All device plates for exterior weatherproof outlets and switches shall be lockable. Cover shall meet NRTL WDL "in use" listing requirement_ Cover shall be suitable for standard boxes or FS type boxes. H. Mounting screws for all plates shall have the same finish as the plate. I. The same manufacturer shall furnish all device plates as devices for proper color match except stainless steel covers. J. Forward submittals to ArchitecVEngineer for review. 2.09 SEALS A. Fire Seal; 1. Seal penetrations of fire -rated walls, floors or ceilings by raceways for compliance with NEC 300-21. Fill void around raceway- Sleeves shall be heavy wall steel pipe, anchored to building construction and finished plug with wall or ceiling. Fire stop material shall be Dow Corning #-6548 Silicone RTV Foam, Chase Technology Corp, CTC PR -855 fire resistant foam sealant, 3M 303 Fire Barrier, T & B S-101 Fire Barrier or Nelson Flameseal. 2. Must be listed as part of a NRTL approved assembly. B. Water Seal_ 1. Seal penetrations of perimeter walls or floors below grade to prevent entry of water Use materials compatible with wall or floor construction and approved by ArchitecVEngineer. 2. Seal all conduit penetrating air handling units air tight including conduit installed by the air handling unit manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SPACE PREFERENCE A. Carefully verify and coordinate the location and level of all lines. Run preliminary levels and check with all other contractors so that conflict in location may be avoided_ , B. If conflicts occur, the following preference schedule shall be followed: _ 1. Recessed electric fixtures 2. High-pressure duct work 3. Soil and waste piping 4. Domestic water piping 5. Low-pressure ductwork (3. Domestic water storm and vent lines. 7. Electric conduits - C. No other work shall have preference over plumbing lines below fixtures. D. No other work shall have preference over conduit above or below electric switchgear and above or below panels. 3.02 FIELD CORRECTIONS AND CHANGES A. Carefully and accurately record on field set of drawings, any deviations or changes in location of conduit, wiring and/or equipment made in the field and shall keep the Architect/Engineer informed on all deviations and changes B. At the completion of the job, furnish the Architect/Engineer three complete sets tnot the field set) of drawings indicating these deviations or changes. Extra sets of drawings will be provided to the contractor for this purpose. Any changes in the exterior work shall be recorded by dimension. 3.03 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT A. The approximate location of all equipment is shown on the drawings. B, The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to change the location of all equipment 5 feet in any direction without these changes being made the subject of an extra charge provided such changes are made before final installation_ INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-7 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3.04 LINES AND LEVELS 4/17/2013 A. Determine all grades, maintain necessary lines and levels throughout the progress of the work, and assume full responsibility for their correctness. Where levels are indicated on the drawings, work shall be installed at those levels unless prior written approval to change is obtained from the Architect/Engineer. 3.05 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the contract all remaining materials and rubbish shall be removed from the building and premises and the work areas shall be left clean and free from stains, mortar, paint spots, etc. B. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with embossed or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the presence of the Owner's designated representative to insure that their function and purpose is understood. C. Upon completion of the work, put systems into service maintaining responsibility for the equipment during all testing operations including turning on and off of such apparatus. 3.06 OPENINGS IN NEW CONSTRUCTION A. Openings required in new construction for Division 26 Work will be provided by the General Contractor at the request of and in accordance with information furnished by the Electrical Contractor_ The General Contractor will advise the Electrical Contractor in advance so that he may lay out the required openings. If said Electrical Contractor fails to lay out required openings, he shall be financially responsible for the necessary cutting, patching and repairing. The General Contractor will do the patching and repairing. 3.07 WALL AND FLOOR SLEEVE INSTALLATION A- Set all wall and floor sleeves during the construction of the portion of the new construction through which the piping is to pass. B. Provide sleeves of black iron pipe and of proper size to accommodate raceway. Install sleeves flush with walls and ceilings. Coordinate locations of sleeves with other trades to avoid interferences with their work. C. Anchor all sleeves properly to the building construction. D. � Set floor sleeves plumb, wall sleeves level and center all piping in sleeves. E Care shall be taken to set sleeves in formwork and check all dimensions before concrete is poured, F. :Extend floor sleeves in finished areas 112 inch above finished floor and neatly level top of sleeve. G. Finish all wall sleeves flush with wall lines unless otherwise specified. IT Where sleeves occur in exterior walls above grade, caulk sleeves with sealant. I. Where sleeves occur in exterior walls below grade, caulk sleeves with oakum and lead wool. J. Openings between sleeves and conduit through fire or smoke barriers shall be closed with fire stop material to maintain fire or smoke barrier rating. K. All occupied and unoccupied conduit sleeves in closet shall be fire stop after cable or conduit is in place. Occupied conduit sleeves shall be fire slopped with fire stop material and unoccupied conduit sleeves shall be fire stopped with metal caps on both ends. 3.08 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide minimum 4 inches thick reinforced concrete bases under all equipment installed on building floors. Rough up building floors to assure bonding of the base to the floor. Anchor the base to floor with reinforcing bars set in floor at time of pouring or with power driven studs. Provide one layer of 6 by 6 by #6 welded wire mesh reinforcing in house keeping pad. Set anchor bolts, as required by equipment, in bases at time of pouring. Pad shall extend 4 inches beyond each side and face of equipment. Exact size of pads shall be confirmed with shop drawings of equipment being provided. 3.09 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Do all excavating, backfilling, sheathing and bracing required for the installation for any and all parts of work. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-8 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 B. Conduct all excavations so that no personnel shall be endangered and no building walls or footings shall be disturbed or injured. C. Excavate to dimensions and elevations required for work. D. Remove any materials concealed beneath present grade, where required to execute work, and as indicated. E. If undesirable material is encountered during excavation, remove and replace material as directed by Architect/Engineer. F. Properly level off bottoms of all excavations. G. Remove all rocks, lumps, frozen ground, vegetation, and other foreign material upon which fill is to be placed. H. Scarify top 12 inches (300 mm) of earth and compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. I. Place fill material in 9 -inch lifts and compact each lift to 90 percent. , J. Maintain between 0 percent below and 3 percent above optimum moisture content during compaction. K. Compact fill and backfill using suitable mechanical tamping equipment to obtain specified density. -_ 1. Use mechanical hand tampers for filling and backfilling next to walls. - 2. Compact granular fill using vibratory methods. L. Do not permit water to accumulate or remain in trench or other excavation that is part of this contract. Dispose of water withdrawn from excavations in a manner that will not cause injury to public health, public or private property, or to the work already completed or in progress. M. All backfill material under buildings, sidewalks, streets, curbs and within 5 feet of footings shall be native material, free from large rocks or stones. Where a utility passes under a building footing, backfill material shall be concrete up to footing bearing surface. N. Load excavated materials that are to be replaced with native material, directly from the trench into trucks, remove from the construction area and properly dispose of where directed. O. Extreme caution must be used in excavating for new underground services to avoid all damage to existing underground utilities in the working area. Confirm where possible, the exact location of all existing utilities. In the event of a break in an existing utility main or service, immediately notify an official from the utility interrupted and lend all possible assistance in restoring services cut. Also, assume costs or claims connected with the interruption and repair of such service. P. Excavate the trenches to the depth required so as to provide a uniform and continuous bearing and support for the pipe on solid undisturbed ground or compacted fill. O. Wherever excavations are made through streets, sidewalks, parking areas, curbs or other finished surfaces, replace such surfaces with material to match existing surfaces. Where reinforcing steel in concrete is required, install it in a manner similar to that used in existing surfaces. R. If it is necessary to drive trucks or equipment over sidewalks, pavement, streets, and curbs, take care to protect it from damage. If such surfaces are damaged, replace same with new materials, same type and thickness and in the manner as the original. S. Reuse original surface materials if, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, they are suitable for use in restoration. T. Excavated material, which is to be reused in backfilling, or restoring the surface shall be piled in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks, driveways, or traffic lanes which are to be maintained during construction_ U. Keep all excavated topsoil separated from excavation soil. Stockpile sufficient topsoil to provide 6 inches of topsoil at all graded areas. Provide any additional soil from off-site source if required_ 3.10 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect work from damage by keeping all conduit and boxes capped and plugged or otherwise protected. This includes damage by freezing and/or stoppage from building materials, sand, dirt or concrete. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500 - 9 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3.11 INSTALLATION 4/17/2013 A. Coordinate with other contractors engaged In project. Execute work in a manner not to interfere with other contractors or Owners operation. B. Coordinate work with other contractors regarding location and size of pipes, raceways, ducts, openings, switches, outlets, so there is no interference between installations or of progress of any contractor. C. Install all equipment with ample space allowed for removal, repair, or changes to equipment. Provide ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to all wiring without moving equipment installed or already in place. Provide access panels for all devices installed above non -accessible ceilings or within walls or partitions. D. At project completion, clean all equipment to the original finish. Remove all shipping labels. E. Provide touch-up painting of all equipment marred in any way during shipment or installation 3.12 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS A. All raceways shall be concealed in wall construction and/or above ceiling construction except in mechanical equipment rooms, where it may be exposed at the ceiling or on walls. B. There shall not be any branch circuit conduits installed horizontally in the concrete floor slabs throughout the building, except where specifically shown on the drawings. C. In mechanical and electrical equipment spaces, expose ceiling outlets and conduit with due consideration to ventilating ducts and mechanical piping. Where numerous ducts occur, install conduits and outlets after ventilating ducts. Puncturing of ductwork or hanging equipment such as light fixtures, ceiling hangers, conduit, from ductwork, is prohibited, unless specifically noted otherwise. D. Lay out all partitions on the project, for proper rough -in locations of all boxes and conduits. Verify all partition locations, door swings, cabinet locations before roughing in, and make any/all changes necessary to ensure that all switches, outlets, systems equipment, rough -ins are located properly, Any changes necessary in locations and rough -ins, due to a partition change and this contractor's failure to coordinate and verify same, shall be made. F. The routing of conduit shown on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and this contractor shall install conduit as required to complete the systems so as not to interfere with other trades in both elevation and location. F. The location of all conduit, boxes, fixtures, etc., in all areas finished and unfinished shall be coordinated. G, Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Provide flashing making waterproof joints where conduits pass through roof or roofing membrane. H. Provide conduit expansion joints at building expansion joints for conduit runs 1 1i2 inches and larger. Provide conduit expansion joints or flexible conduit connection at building expansion joints for conduits less than 1 1/2 inches. I. SConduit shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch unless otherwise noted on the drawings. J. All conduit bends shall be long radius with not more than the equivalent of three 90 -degree bends between pull points. K. Provide all open ends of conduit with bush caps to exclude any foreign material during construction. L. All conduits installed in or under concrete or underground shall have joints sealed to exclude all water or other foreign material. M. Coordinate the installation of all conduits in mechanical equipment spaces or where large amounts of ductwork and piping are present, with the other contractors so as to avoid interferences. N. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, size all conduits according to the National Electrical Code. O. Install all exposed conduits parallel or perpendicular to adjacent walls, ceilings or floors. P. All conduit couplings and fittings shall be made up wrench tight. 0. Make all conduit systems mechanically and electrically continuous from source of current to all outlets, and ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS. INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-10 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 R. Where building construction or other conditions make it impossible to use standard threaded couplings, install watertight threaded unions. S. Install rigid steel conduit for the following: 1. All conduit in poured concrete construction (unless noted as PVC). 2. All conduit underground (unless noted as PVC). 3. All conduit exposed in exterior areas. 4. All conduit installed through foundation or basement wall, below grade, to a minimum of 10'0" beyond wall. 5. All service entrance conduit and all exterior conduit larger than 2" trade size. T. Install electrical metallic tubing (thin wall) conduit for the following: 1. All conduits in block, brick, tile or stud walls. 2. All feeders for panelboards and distribution equipment. 3. All conduit exposed in interior areas. U. Install flexible steel conduit for the following: - - 1. Final connections for all recessed lighting fixtures (fluorescent and incandescent). --- _ 2. All vibration generating equipment except where flexible liquid -tight is specifically called for. - 3. A maximum length of flexible steel conduit shall be limited to 60". - - V. Install liquid -tight flexible steel conduit for the following: 1. Final connections to all motors, except exhaust fans in ceiling space and wall 1/8 horsepower apd.less. 2. All vibration generating equipment exposed to exterior conditions. 3. Maximum length of liquid -tight flexible conduit shall be limited to 6'0". W. Install PVC conduit for the following: 1. All conduit for underground exterior circuits 2" and smaller. PVC conduit shall be complete with all accessories, such as, couplings, male and female adapters, expansion couplings, elbows and support straps. Install one expansion coupling for every 100 feet of run, or in any run solidly connected at both ends. Use solvent welding cement recommended by the duct manufacturer, for all conduit terminations at fittings of all types to seal and secure the connections. Support the plastic conduit horizontal conduit runs 4 feet on center and vertical runs every 8 feet. X. Communications 1. Minimum communications raceway size to be 1" conduit, unless otherwise noted on drawings. 2. Provide one conduit from each communications box. Horizontal conduit runs between wall boxes are not allowed. 3. Provide insulated grounding bushings on end of conduit. 4. Provide flush two -gang box with single gang plaster ring for each communications outlet or as noted on drawings. 5. Conduit bends to be no less than 10 times outside diameter of conduit. 6. Conduits shall have no more that (2) 90 degree bends or total of 180 degree bends or offsets without a pull box. Pull boxes shall be installed in accessible locations. 7. No underslab installations allowed. 3.13 RACEWAY SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. Securely fasten raceways in place and support from ceiling or walls. 1. Maximum Spacing of Supports Material a. 1/2" through 1" trade size 6 feet b. 1 1/4" through 1 1/2" trade size 8 feet C. 2" through 4" trade size 10 feet d. Flexible metal conduit 4 1/2 feet B. Support IMC or EMT conduit within three feet of every outlet box, junction box, pull box, cabinet or termination. Support flexible conduit within 12 inches of every outlet box or fitting. C. Support vertical runs or conduits at each floor level and at interval not to exceed ten feet. D. Support conduits by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze. The use of perforated iron on wire for supporting conduits is prohibited. Fasten with wood screws or screw nails to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, by concrete inserts, or expansion steel conduits on steel. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures unless specifically indicated. E. The load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one-third the proof test load of the fasteners. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-11 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY F_ For fasteners attached to concrete, use vibration and shock resistant. G. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. H. Conduit shall not be supported from suspended ceiling hangers, ductwork or plumbing lines. I_ Where two or more conduits one inch trade size or larger run parallel, trapeze hangers may be used consisting of threaded solid rods, washers, nuts and galvanized "L" angle or channel iron. Individually fasten conduits to the cross member of every other trapeze hanger with one hole straps or clamp backs with proper size bolts, washers and nuts. When adjustable trapeze hangers are used, use U -bolt type clamps at end of conduit runs, at each elbow and at each third Intermediate hanger to fasten each conduit. J. Make hangers of durable materials suitable for the application involved_ Applied loads shall not exceed one- third of their loading capacity. K. Fabricate all screws, bolts, washers and miscellaneous hardware used for conduit supports from rust -resisting metal. Trapeze hangers shall have hanger assemblies' protected galvanized finish. 3.14 INSTALLATION OF BOXES A. Provide pull boxes, junction boxes or outlet boxes as shown on the drawings and/or in all runs of conduit having the equivalent of three 90 degree bends or more than 100 feet in length. 1. Communications conduit runs shall have no more than 100 linear feet and/or no more than two (2) 90 - degree bends without a pull box. 2. Do not provide pull box in lieu of 90 -degree bend for communications cable. 3. LB type fittings are nor to be used for communications cable. B. Location of outlets shown on the drawings is diagrammatic only. Coordinate exact location of outlets with architectural details, equipment connection requirements and all ceiling outlets with due consideration to clearance from ventilating ducts and piping. C. Locations of all junction boxes shall be verified on the job. D. All junction boxes shall be installed so that they are accessible by removing an access door, recessed fixture, coverplate, etc. E. Where flush coverplates are required in finished areas, they shall be painted to match adjacent wall or ceiling finishes. F. All junction boxes, other than for power or lighting, shall be identified as to their usage; such as, television, telephone, door security. fire alarm, etc., by permanently attached labels on the inside or outside of the coverplate. G. Power and communication outlets shall not be installed in the same junction box. 3.15 METHOD OF WIRING A. Install all the conductors in conduits. B. Equipment and devices installed and not constructed with cases especially suited for mounting and enclosing _ all live parts shall be installed in metal cabinets. C. A -complete metal raceway or enclosure shall be provided for all circuiting throughout the extent of the systems specified. D. make conductors continuous from outlet to outlet. Do not make splices except in outlet orjunction boxes. Make all feeder cables continuous from origin to panel or equipment terminations without running splices in intermediate pull or boxes, unless specifically indicated on the drawings or approved in writing by Architect/Engineer. E. Blow out and swab all conduit until all moisture and grit is removed before any wires are pulled or installed. Use water-based pulling lubricant, compatible with insulation and covering, that will not cause deterioration of insulation orjacket covers of cables on conductors. Use pulling lubricant recommended by wire manufacturer. F. Provide each cable or conductor in panels, pullboxes or troughs with a permanent pressure -sensitive label with suitable numbers or letter for easy identification. Identify control wires at each end and in junction boxes with designated wire numbers corresponding to control schematic drawings. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-12 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY G. Provide wires and cables entering equipment or panels with enough slack to eliminate stretched, angular connection. Neatly arrange wiring, bundle and fan out to termination panels. Make minimum bending radius for conductors in accord with National Electrical Code. H. Support all conductors in vertical raceways in accord with National Electrical Code. I. Leave at least six-inch loops or ends at each outlet for installation of devices or fixtures. Roll up all wires in outlet boxes not for connection to fixture or device at that outlet, connect together and tape. J. Size all branch circuit wiring for circuits over 20 amperes as shown on the drawings and/or as required by the National Electrical Code. All home run branch circuit wiring from the first outlet, fixture or device on 120 volt, 1 phase, or 277 volt, 1 phase circuit to the panelboard shall conform to the following wire sizes for amp circuits unless otherwise noted on the drawings: - 1. 120 -VOLT CIRCUITS a. 0 to 50 feet #12 wire - b. 51 to 100 feet #10 wire C. 101 to 150 feet # 8 wire d. 151 to 200 feet #6 wire - K. Clarification to the color -coding of conductors is as follows: For all voltages and systems equipment -grounds shall be green, isolated grounds shall be green with yellow stripe or with yellow tape bands and travelers for 3 - way switches shall be violet. _ L. At the Electrical Contractor's option, the three phase power circuits and feeder cables can be installed -with color -coded conductors or with three conductors of the same color. If they are installed with the same color of insulation, mark with colored tape in the panelboard and starter. M. Phase all distribution equipment left-to-right, A, B, and C for continuity of phasing throughout the installation. N. All stranded cables shall terminate into mechanical type or compression type lugs at termination points. O. Neatly group all circuits in all distribution equipment and tie with Seine Twine, Ty -Rap or Wrap Tabs. P. Special care shall be taken to balance connections of circuit wires on different phases at the lighting panelboards using distinguishing colors for identifying the particular phase on which the circuit belongs. O. In general, lighting and outlet circuits shall distribute from single pole 20 -ampere breakers, 2 wire with solid neutral. Where noted on drawings, run single phase or 3 phase power circuits from two or three pole breakers. R. A separate neutral conductor shall be pulled for each phase conductor for all 120 volt and 277 volt branch circuits. Common neutrals are not allowed. 3.16 WIRING JOINTS A. Joints in conductors shall be as few in number as practicable and where they are necessary they shall be mechanically strong, well made and shall provide complete electrical contact, B. Joints shall be so made that they have an electrical resistance not in excess of that of two feet of the conductor. C. Make all branch circuit joints for wire up to and including No. 10 AWG with expandable steel spring and polypropylene body type connectors and wire nuts manufactured by Ideal, Scotch, Buchanan or Architect/Engineer approved equal. D. Make all wire splices in wire No. 6 and larger with mechanical compression crimp type connectors of proper size and wire configuration. Cover all connectors with a minimum of three layers of 600 volts tape or heat shrinkable insulation equivalent to 150 percent conductor insulation. E. Neutral conductors in outlet boxes at receptacles shall be jointed and pigtailed to the outlet. The removal of a receptacle from the circuit shall not affect the continuity of the neutral conductor. 3.17 HEIGHTS OF WALL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES A. Determine the exact height of each light, receptacle outlets, and outlet boxes on the premises and examine the general drawings and details to see that outlets are properly spaced and located with relation to the interior finish and treatment. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 21 13 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 B. In order that all outlets may be located in proper relation to paneling and decorated areas, become familiar with the details of these areas. Consult with the other contractors on the project and procure all details of the various areas so as to make the outlet boxes and panelboards come in proper relation to the work of all other contractors. Be responsible for the exact and proper location of the various portions of work, Such work must be entirely satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. C. Mounting heights of devices shall comply with ADA. The following is a list of mounting heights for equipment: 1. Locate wall switches 3'6" above the floor, except where special treatment requires a higher or lower setting. 2. Locate receptacles as follows: a. In general, locate 18 inches above finished floor except as hereinafter specified or as indicated on the drawings. b. In block walls, locate either in the bottom or top of the nearest block course. C, In brick walls, mount in the horizontal position, in the fourth brick course. d. In spaces where noted to be above counters, mount in the horizontal position, 4 inches from backsplash to bottom of box. e. In rooms that house mechanical and electrical equipment, locate 40 inches above finished floor. f. Locate weatherproof receptacles 24 inches above finished grade. 3. F.A. Speakers and Visual Indicators: 84" above finished floor to bottom of device. 4. F.A. Pull Stations: 3'6" above finished floor to center of device. 5. Disconnect Switches: 5'0" above finished floor. 6. Manual and Magnetic Starters or Pushbutton Controls: 5'0" above finished floor, 7. Telephone/Data Outlets: Same as receptacles above_ D. All of the above mounting heights shall be held as near as possible to the center line of the equipment. E. The above list is general in nature. Examine all Architectural Drawings and consult with the ArchitecUEngineer and vary mounting heights as directed. 3.18 TESTING 600 VOLT A. After wires and cables are in place and before connection to the devices and equipment is made, test the system for shorts and grounds by means of an approved type of constant potential "Megger', which is to be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. B. Remove and replace all hot wires if shorted or grounded. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #10140 260500-14 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Completely grounded system. Electrical equipment, conduits, supports, cabinets and panels shall be grounded in accord with NEC and as shown on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes & Standards: 1. UL listed. 2. NFPA 70 (NEC), 2008 3. NEMA 4. NEC Article 250 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ground Grid: 1. Ground rods shall be 3/4" diameter, 10 feet long, copper -plated type. 2. Grounding conductors installed in direct contact with the earth shall be insulated Type USE. 3. Connections shall be exothermic welding process. B. Ground Water Main: 1. Ground to water main pipe. Provide jumper across water meter. C. Equipment: 1. All grounding clamps and devices shall be of type approved by UL. 2. Approved Manufacturers: a. Thomas & Betts Co. b. O.Z. C. Burndy PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Electrical System shall be grounded. Grounding shall be in accord with NEC 250 and NEC 680. By reference herein, NEC Sections 250 and 680 shall become a part of this specification and shall be adhered to strictly. B. All conduit, raceways, equipment, enclosures, panel housings, fixture housings, bus ducts, shall be grounded back to the service equipment location utilizing the continuous metallic conduit system as the grounding means. Discontinuity of the metallic conduit grounding system will not be acceptable. C. All connections to motors, receptacles and equipment shall contain a separate grounding conductor bonded to the panelboard grounding bus at one end and the motor frame, receptacles, or equipment at the other end. D_ Provide a ground wire in all lighting circuits. Ground all lighting equipment. E. Provide a ground wire for all 120V receptacle outlet circuits, F. See Section 26 05 00 for ground type duplex receptacle_ G. See Section 26 05 00 for ground fault interrupting receptacles in wet locations. H. See Sections 26 05 00 for fittings for continuous conduit grounding system. I. All ground wires shall be run in conduit except where otherwise indicated on the drawings. J. Color code of ground wire shall be green. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project # 10140 260526-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4117/2013 K. Exterior grade mounted equipment shall have enclosures grounded directly to a separate driven ground at the equipment in addition to the building ground connection. This includes grade mounted light fixtures, 3.02 TESTING A. Reference Section 26 08 00 for requirements. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project # 10140 260526-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Provide identification as listed below. - 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide proper identification in accordance with NFPA 70- (NEC), 2008. 1.03 GENERAL A. Provide idenfcation of electrical system components in accordance with Iowa standards. 1. Standard codes for junction boxes and covers: a. Fire Alarm - Red with "FA" stenciled on cover b. Emergency Power- Yellow C. 208/120 Volt System - White B. Provide the following items with nameplates: 1. All motor starters, motor controls, motor control centers, push-button stations, control panels and time switches. 2. Switchboards, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, contactors or relays in separate enclosures. Power receptacles where the nominal voltage between any contact is greater than 150V to ground. Use at least 1-1/8" x 2-1/4" signs 3. Special electrical systems shall be properly identified at junction and pull boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment racks. 4. Nameplate inscription: Nameplate shall adequately describe the function or use of the particular equipment involved. Nameplate for panelboards and switchboards shall include the panel designation, voltage and phase of the supply, and where the circuit -feeding panel originates, i.e.: a. Panel A b. 208/120 V. c. 3 Phase - 4 W. d. FED from "MDS" 5. When equipment has more than one source of power, i.e.: separate control power source. The location of all power sources shall be CLEARLY identified at the equipment location. Le.: Nameplate on door, etc. 6. Mark all wires in panelboards with the circuit number they serve. 7. Legibly mark feeder conduits entering and leaving a panelboard or switchboard with their destination. 1.04 PANELBOARDS A. Provide a typed card directory for each panel. Directory shall designate breaker number and load served. Panel shall have all breakers individually numbered and panel shall have an interior nameplate provided by manufacturer with voltage, amperage, phase and hertz listed. Provide an exterior engraved plastic signage with the panel name or number or letter designation., and where the panel is served from. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplate construction shall be laminated phenolic plastic, black front and back with white core, with lettering engraved through the outer covering. Lettering shall be 3/16 inches high at push-button station starter, receptacles and similar devices where the nameplate is attached to the device plate. At all other locations, lettering shall be 1/4 inch high unless otherwise detailed on the drawings. B. Other types and sized of signage may be used where appropriate. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project 410140 2605 53- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 4/17/2013 A. Install labels on rnetur starters, TT switches, relays, disconnect switches, main distribution switchboard, power distribution panels, branch power panels, branch lighting panels and cable trays. B. Special outlets and receptacles shall be clearly labeled to identify the utilization equipment. C. Overcurrent devices in panels clearly identify what they feed. This may be accomplished by means of the typewritten panel schedules mounted inside of the front cover doors under glass or plastic. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #10140 260553-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Contractor: Test electrical systems. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 2. 26 24 16 - Panelboards 3. 26 28 00 - Law -Voltage Circuit Protective Devices 4. 2628 16 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 5. 26 29 33 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 6. 26 51 00 - Lighting 7. 2831 10 - Fire Detection & Alarm PAR72-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Furnish all meters, instruments, cable connections, equipment or apparatus for making all tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING , 4/17/2013 A. All electrical testing documents, including dates and signatures, shall be compiled into a binder on site that is available for review by the Commissioning Authority. This binder will be updated weekly with the previous week's activities. B. After wires and cables are in place and connected to devices and equipment, the system shall be tested for short circuits, improper grounds, and other faults. When fault condition is present, the trouble shall be rectified, and then retested. C. All wiring devices and electrical apparatus furnished under this contract, when grounded or shorted on any integral "live' part, shall be removed and the trouble rectified by replacing all defective parts and materials. D. All service and feeder cables, after being pulled in place and before being connected, shall have a Megger test conducted to determine that wire and cable insulation resistance is not less than that recommended by the NEC. Two (2) copies of all tests shall be given to the Architect/Engineer. All cables failing insulation test shall be removed, replaced, and retested. E. All motors shall be tested under load with ammeter readings taken for each phase, and the rpm of motors recorded at the time. All motors shall be tested for correct direction of rotation. Run tests on all motors and verify that proper overload devices have been installed. The following shall be submitted for approval by the Architect/Engineer: 1. Test and record the following on all motors: a. Fuse size. b. Heater size. c. Full load amp. d. Running amp. e. Rated voltage. f. Terminal operating voltage. 2. Two (2) copies of all test data shall be delivered to the Using Agency and Architect/Engineer, END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project # 10140 260800-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS. INC. Project # 10140 4/17/2013 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES 4/1712013 A. Provide panelboards specified and indicated on drawings. _ 1.02 RELATED WORK :. A. Specified elsewhere_ - 1. 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical 2. 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. 26 08 00 - Commissioning of Electrical Systems ---- 4. 26 28 00 - Low -Voltage Circuit Protective Devices 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All panelboards shall conform to and be manufactured to the standards of: UL50, UL67, UL489, UL873, UL891 and have the UL label as well as NEMA Standards 1977, PB1.2-1977, P62-1978 and ANSI C33.38 and C84.1. B. Comply with: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC), 2008 PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIALS A. Panels shall have the voltage characteristics, bus size, main lugs only or main switch/breakers, flush or surface cabinet, and number and size of branch circuit switch/breakers as scheduled on the drawings. B. Panel cabinets shall be not less than 20 inches wide, 5-314 inches deep and shall have gutters at each side and at top and bottom of ample width to accommodate branch circuit feeder conductors. All gutters shall be minimum 5 -inch width except that gutters where cables are connected to panelboard main lugs and gutters used for through feed of feeder conductors shall be sized in accordance with ANSI Standards. C. Double -section panel cabinets shall not be stacked vertically. D. Cabinets for panels shall comply with all NEMA Standards and shall be of the dead front type suitable for surface or flush mountings. Enclosure shall be of code gauge steel with ample wiring space on all sides. Trim and door shall be of #12 gauge steel fastened to the tub with adjustable clamps. Door shall be provided with flush type hinges and chrome plated flush type combination catch and cylinder lock master. GE -75 keyed Panel shall be provided with a circuit directory under glass or plastic cover in a metal frame. Panelboard tub shall be galvanized. E. Bus bars for all panels shall be hard drawn electrolytic silver plated copper of 98 percent conductivity rated in accord with UL 67 for heat rise and shall be of sizes in strict accordance with NEMA and UL requirements and shall have ratings established by heal rise tests conducted in accordance with UL 67. A ground bus bonded to the panel cabinet shall be provided. Provide proper main lugs to receive incoming feeder cables. F. Neutrals shall be grouped on a common bar and each terminal on the neutral bar shall be stamped or tagged with the number of the circuit with which it is associated. Neutral bus shall be insulated from cabinet. In addition, provide a ground bus bonded to cabinet. All panels shall have ground bus. 2.02 BRANCH PANELBOARDS A_ Branch panelboards shall be circuit breaker type with bolt -on type branch circuit breakers. Panels shall be Square D, Cutler -Hammer, G.E.. B. Panelboard short circuit interrupting capacity shall be 22,000 amperes minimum and depending on the devices used shall not be below the lowest rated interrupting capacity for any branch or main breaker. See panel schedules for short circuit AIC. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PANELBOARDS Project #10140 262416- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2.03 BREAKERS 411 712 01 3 A. Breakers for all panelboards shall be thermal -magnetic with each pole providing inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit protection. B. All breakers shall be completely enclosed in a molded case and be operated by a toggle type handle. Breakers shall be quick -make, quick -break with all poles constructed to open, close and trip simultaneously. C. The minimum interrupting capacity of the circuit breakers shall be 240 or 600 volt rated, 3 phase, molded case, thermal magnetic and rated a minimum of 22,000 amperes. D. Breakers shall be back connected to bus bars with studs. All spaces for future breakers in all panels shall be equipped with proper bus connecting links to facilitate the installation of future breakers. Breakers shall have trip elements calibrated in accordance with the drawings. The trip element shall ensure constant calibration and be capable of withstanding excessive short current conditions without injury to the breaker. E. Breakers 250 amperes and greater shall have adjustable magnetic trip. F. Breakers, which are required to be ground fault type, shall be GFCI type, Class A, UL FE48340 and 943. Breakers shall have noise suppression circuit, push to test, and trip indication. Splices will not be allowed in circuits fed from GFCI breakers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Panelboards shall be installed level and plumb with respect to surrounding surfaces with the top of the panel 6'0" above the finished floor. B. Cabinets shall be installed, conduits connected, and all wires pulled before the interior is installed. Every flush mounted panelboard shall have a minimum of five spare 3!4 -inch EMT conduits stubbed above the ceiling. C. Branch wiring shall be neatly arranged in the panelboard gutters and all conductors shall be of sufficient length to reach any breaker located adjacent to the same gutter containing the conductor. 3.02 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION A. During the construction period the panel interior shall be protected with a suitable cover to prevent dirt or damage to the interior. After energizing, the panel shall have all live exposed parts covered with an approved barrier and a temporary sign shall be posted indicating that the panel is `HOT". Temporary sign shall be removed upon completion of work. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. PANELBOARDS Project #10140 262416-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 28 00 LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Circuit breakers 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical ' 2. 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems - 4. 26 08 00 - Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 5. 26 24 16 - Panelboards - 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with: 1. UL listed 2. NFPA 70 (NEC), 2008. 3. ANSI 4. NEMA 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with the drawings and these specifications. B. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate type of breaker, size, trip, characteristics, interrupting capacity, with features listed and identified. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Breakers: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammers 3. G.E. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Circuit breakers shall meet the following: 1. Be quick -make, quick -break type. 2. Have toggle mechanism insuring full contact pressure until time of opening whether manually or automatically operated. 3. Have inverse time tripping characteristics with fixed thermal trip action to hold on harmless momentary overload. 4. A short circuit condition shall cause the magnetic trip element to instantly trip without damage or injury. 5. Have non -welding, non -corroding contacts. 6. Have mechanism enclosed in molded bake -lite case, sealed to prevent tampering or unauthorized changes in calibration. 7. Be NRTL listed. 8. Meet NEMA standards. 9. Be bolt -on type unless otherwise specified for use in common bus equipment. 10. Have contacts operate in a multiple plate arc quenching chamber vented to load side of breaker - UL listed. 11. Be fully rated for panel or switchboard bus they are to be used in as scheduled on the drawings. 12. Be calibrated for operation in a minimum ambient temperature of 40`C. 13. Mufti -pole breakers shall have common trip molded inside breaker housing. 14. Twenty ampere minimum unless otherwise specifically called for. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Project #10140 262800-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 411712013 15. When used as main breaker be minimum 65,000 AIC rated and sized in accordance with UL 67 unless otherwise noted on drawings. 16. Multi -pole breakers shall not require more space than the equivalent number of single pole breakers. 17. Have operating handle that visually indicates "on", "off, or "tripped". 18. Clearly indicate ampacity and frame size. 19. Be labeled as to what circuit number or numbers and load they serve. 20. All circuit breakers shall be rated SWD" indicating they are suitable for switching loads. 21. Single breakers per one -pole space only. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. No equipment shall be electrically activated without proper overcurrent protection. B. Breakers shall indicate clearly their size; must clear panel doors and be mounted on frame allowing outward and inward adjustment. The depth of the tubs shall also permit adjustment. C. Breakers shall be provided with a numerical designation strip. D. 120V lighting and receptacle circuits shall be run from 20 A. single pole breakers. Unless specifically called for, or NEC required, no breakers less than 20 A. shall be allowed. E. Snap switch type breakers only. F- Breakers shall be fully rated. G. Breakers rated 250 amps and above shall be provided with adjustable magnetic trip END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Project #10140 262800-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Provide blade type disconnects specified and indicated on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Summary of Work 2. 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical 3. 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 4. 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers 5. 26 29 33 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All switches shall be UL labeled and conform to NEMA Standards. B. Comply with: National Electrical Code (NEC), 2008 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. Cutler -Hammer 3. General Electric 4(17/2013 B. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible and have the size and pole arrangement as noted on the drawings. Switches shall have a NEMA 1 enclosure for interior locations and a NEMA 3R enclosure for exterior locations unless otherwise noted. C. Requirements: 1. Dead front 2. Visible blades 3. Quick -make, quick -break mechanism 4. Single -throw operation 5. Switch ratings shall be NEMA standard determined by the HP rating of the motors or for the duty indicated, 6. A handle projecting through the enclosure shall operate each switch. 7. Heavy duty 8. Provide rejection type fuse clips PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide disconnect switches in those locations indicated on the drawings and in accord with NEC. B. Disconnect switches installed on drywall type partitions shall be provided with a 3,'4 -inch thick plywood backing securely fastened to the wall. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. ENCLOSED SWITCHES Project #10140 2628 16- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 4(1712013 INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. ENCLOSED SWITCHES Project #10140 262816-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 29 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Provide motor starters unless starters will be provided with the equipment served. 4/17/2013 B. Wire all branch circuits for all motors to non-fused or fused disconnect switch or combination magnetic starters or thermal overload switches and then to the motors, can with all control wiring for automatic and remote control. Include all the conduit, fittings, junction boxes, and angle iron framework for mounting of control equipment on floors and walls; handling, setting, and wiring up all motors and starters; except direct connected motors, which will be set on foundation by Contractor providing motor. C. Except where otherwise noted, motors 2 horsepower and under will operate on 120 volts, single-phase, and will be controlled by manual starters with thermal overload protection. Motors above 2 horsepower, except where otherwise noted, will operate on 208 volts, three-phase. D. In addition to power connections to motors and starters, set and connect various automatic control devices together with interconnecting wiring to complete their installation. E. Consult all other sections of the Project Manual and become acquainted with the requirements of the various pieces of equipment. F. Provide equipment pads. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Summary of Work 2. Division 22 - Plumbing 3. Division 23 - Heating Ventilating and Air -Conditioning (HVAC) 4. 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical 5. 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 6. 26 24 16 - Panelboards 7. 26 28 00 - Low -Voltage Circuit Protective Devices ; 8. 26 28 16 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 9. 26 29 33 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with 1. NEMA CS -2-322 Standards 2. UL 845 3. IEEE 4. NFPA-70 (NEC), 2008 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with this specification. 2. Submittals for individual motor starters shall include: a. Name (mark) of motor(s) for which intended b_ Use C. Horsepower d Voltage e. Phase f. Fuse (or circuit breaker) size g. Number and size of wires required between starter and motor h. Location (room name and number) INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Project #10140 2629 13 - 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4117/2013 i. NEMA size and enclosure type j. Auxiliary contacts and mode (N.O., N.C.) k. Whether multi -speed or not I. Control circuit diagram and O.C. protection m. Interlocking requirements n. H -0-A, pilot light, start -stop, jog o. Time delay or timer p. Heater sizes q. Control transformer r. Dimensions 3. Submittals for Motor Control Centers shall include: a. A schedule indicating the specific motor or load a disconnect starter serve, their size, fusing, overloads, etc. b. Integrated interrupting capacity of the center c. Bus rating and AIC bracing d. Maximum overall dimensions e. Accessories clearly indicated for each starter I. Indicate ground bus and control connection terminal blocks g. Finish PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Square D 2, Cutler -Hammer 3. General Electric 2.02 MOTOR STARTERS A: Manual 1 Pole Thermal Toggle Manual Starter Switch 1.. Square FG -1P -_ 2. Cutler Hammer 9101 H76 3. GE Equal B. Manual 2 Pole Thermal Toggle Manual Starter Switch 1. Square D FG -2P 2. Cutler Hammer 9101 H77 3. GE Equal C. Combination Magnetic Starter with Fusible Disconnect '1. Square D 8538 2. Cutler Hammer 9589 3, GE Equal D. Part Winding Starter 1, Square D 8640 2. Cutler Hammer 9612 3, GE Equal E. Auto Transformer Starter 1. Square D 8606 2. Cutler Hammer 9621 3. GE Equal F. Push Button Stations 1. Square D 9001-K Line 2, Cutler Hammer 10250 Line 3. GE Equal INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Project #10140 2629 13-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY G. Manual Speed 1 Pole Thermal Toggle Manual Starter Switch 1. Square FG -11P 2. Cutler Hammer 9106 Hz 3. GE Equal H. Manual 2 Speed 2 Pole Thermal Toggle Manual Starter Switch 1. Square D FG -22P 2. Cutler Hammer 9106 H6 3. GE Equal Magnetic 2 Speed 1_ Square D 8810 2. Cutler Hammer 9736 3, GE Equal 2.03 FULL VOLTAGE STARTERS A. Manual Motor Starters: All motors 112 horsepower and smaller shall be provided with manual motor starters complete with thermal overload protection. Motors 1/2 horsepower and smaller shall be single-phase and shall operate at either 120 volts or 208 volts as shown on the drawings. Starters shall be two -pole or single -pole as indicated. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 or as noted. Provide manual starting toggle switch with reset on-off position and green running lights in cover. Switch shall be rated for 1 horsepower, NEMA 0, maximum duty. Provide flush cover and flush mounting in finished area. B. Magnetic Motor Starters: All motors 314 horsepower and larger shall have magnetic motor starters listed on the Motor Starter Schedule on the drawings and herein specified. Motors 3/4 horsepower and larger shall operate on 208 volt, three-phase, power as noted. All motor starters shall be of the proper size per NEMA designation for voltage, phase, and horsepower of each motor. All magnetic starters shall be full -voltage, non -reversing type. Starters shall have a 120 -volt operating coil. When 120 volts is not available from the starter power wiring, the starter shall contain an integral control transformer to provide the 120 -volt control voltage. The starter shall contain the following accessories. Hand -Off -Automatic selector switch with green run light, one N/O auxiliary contact, and one N/C auxiliary contact. Pilot lights to be the "push to test" type. See Starter Schedule on drawings for additional requirements. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 or as noted. 2.04 MULTI -SPEED MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER A. Multi -speed magnetic motor starters shall be provided on all 3/4 horsepower and larger variable speed motors listed on the Starter Schedule on the drawings. All starters shall be variable torque, constant torque, or constant horsepower depending on the motor served. All motor starters shall be of the proper size in accordance with NEMA designation for voltage, phase, and horsepower of each winding. All starters shall be of the full non -reversing type. Starters shall have decelerating relays. Starters shall have a 120 -volt operating coil. When 120 volts is not available from the starter power wiring, the starter shall contain an integral control transformer to provide the 120 -volt control voltage. The starter shall contain the following accessories: Off - High -Low selector switches with green High light, amber Low light, and red Off light; one N/O auxiliary contact and one N/C auxiliary contact. See Starter Schedule on drawings for additional requirements. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 or as noted. 2.05 REMOTE CONTROL STATIONS A. Ratings: 7200 VA make, 7200 VA break, 120-600 volts AC; 60 ampere make, 6 ampere break, 0-120 volts AC. B. Enclosure: NEMA 1 C. Assembled Control Station Specifications: 1. Start -stop push button and 230 volt AC or DC pilot light stations shall be heavy duty, momentary contact type with NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure or flush mounting for recessed installation as specified. 2. Start -stop push button and 115 volt AC or DC pilot light stations shall be heavy duty, momentary contact type with general purpose enclosure or flush mounting for recessed installation as specified. 3. Hand -Off -Auto selector switch stations shall be heavy duty, maintained contact type with NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure orflush mounting for recessed installation as specified. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Project #10140 262913-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2.06 MOTOR OVERLOAD FUSE PROTECTION 4/17/2013 A. All motor starters shall be provided with thermal overloads, heaters, or cutouts for protection of each motor. Size the thermal fuse for exact full load amperage multiplied by the service factor requirements of each particular motor. Install a thermal fuse for each pole or phase. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all motor starters and complete all power wiring and final connections to motors and mechanical equipment where shown on the drawings, or in accordance with the NEC, a disconnection switch or circuit breaker shall be provided within sight of the motor starter and shall disconnect all power wiring to the starter. Disconnect switches shall be provided within sight of all motors. Combination disconnect switch and motor starter units may be furnished where disconnects are indicated adjacent to motor starters. B. Cooperate with Contractor in placing the various motors and equipment in operation. The proper phasing and motor rotation shall be verified. C. Final connection to motors shall be made with liquid -tight flexible conduit specified in Section 16110. Conduit shall be minimum of 18 inches in length, D. Install all motor control centers, Individually mounted starters and starters furnished loose with machines by the contractor. E. Provide concrete pads, 6 inches high, for all floor mounted equipment, bolt equipment to concrete pad securely. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 26 05 00. F Manual motor starters, single phase, disconnect means and starters installed in finished areas shall be flush mounted. G- Interlocking shall be accomplished with auxiliary contact on magnetic starter or control relay. 3.02 GROUNDING A. The power wiring to all motors shall include a separate continuous green insulated copper ground conductor_ The conductor shall be bonded to the panelboard ground bus at one end and to the motor frame at the other end. The ground conductor shall be sized in accordance with Table 250-95 of the NEC. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Project #10140 2629 13-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 29 33 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Provide mechanical equipment wiring specified and indicated on the drawings. _ 1.02 RELATED WORK ' A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Summary of Work - 2. 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical - - 3. 26 28 16 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 4. 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes & Standards: NFPA-70 (NEC), 2008. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide all material to complete final power wiring connections to all mechanical equipment items. B. See applicable sections of Division 26 specifications. 4/17/2013 C. Motor Connections: Provide power wiring forfans, pumps, etc., and their associated control equipment furnished by others. Review mechanical plans for all motor locations. Final connections to all motors shall be made with flexible liquid -tight metallic conduit with grounding conductor. Power wiring includes feeder from distribution panel to disconnect, from disconnect to starter, and feeder from starter to motor. Provide sufficient slack in final connections to allow for minor repositioning or motor mount. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install power wiring, conduit, disconnects, starters, remote push button stations, fuses or breakers, and make final connections to electrically powered or motorized equipment indicated on the drawings. Final connection to equipment items shall be made in accord with sections specified in paragraph 1.02. B. Verify proper location of equipment, outlets, controls, mounting heights, and size and number of wires prior to roughing in. Verify motor types, voltages, and sizes with the starter types, voltages, sizes, holding coil voltages, thermal overload capacities, and interlocks. C. Motors shall be furnished under the section responsible for the driven machine or system. Set loose motors and wire complete, in place. Motor starters for "package" type equipment shall be factory furnished under the section responsible for the packaged equipment system. D. Provide fractional horsepower manual starters, surface and recessed types. Recessed types shall be installed in all finished spaces. All motor starters shall contain pilot lights. Install and wire motor starters complete, in place, and ready for operation. E. Provide overload heaters in starters and motor control devices requiring same_ Install overload heaters, sized in accord to motor nameplate data in conformance to applicable codes. F. The contractor furnishing the equipment shall provide all integral packaged control panels. Verify with other contractors what electrical equipment is furnished with mechanical equipment. Provide starters, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. When starters or control panels come as an integral part of the respective equipment (e.g„ packaged air conditioning units and sump pumps), provide wiring and make final connections. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS Project Y10140 262933- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 G. Provide assistance during start-up and installation to the contractor furnishing various equipment. Test all motors for proper rotation and phase connection. Verify with ampere meter that motor is running under normal conditions and is not drawing excessive amperage. All motors shall have proper fuse and thermal overload protection. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 262933-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 26 51 00 LIGHTING 4/17/2013 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Light fixtures B. Lamps C. Ballast - D. Fixture bases E, Fixture lens F. Accessories 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 -Summary of Work 2. 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fixtures shall have UL label. B. Ballasts shall be in accord with ANSI Standards. C. Comply with: 1. NFPA - 70 2. I.E.S. D. Verify the ceiling trim requirements for fixtures to assure proper installation for the type of ceiling construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accord with Division 01. B. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with this specification and the schedule on the drawings. C. Shop Drawings: 1 _ Include data specified herein including fixture "mark" corresponding to the Drawings. 2. Clearly indicate type and color of each lamps) to be used for each fixture type. 3. Submit shop drawings for each type of lamp. D. Submittals will be reviewed a maximum of three revisions. If after the third submission submittal package does not conform to Specifications herein, CONTRACTOR will be billed at Electrical Engineer's standard hourly rate. E. Maintenance data for fixtures to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURE SCHEDULE A_ Light fixtures shall be as listed on the drawing Fixture Schedule. B, Various types of fixtures to be provided are indicated on the drawings. A fixture shall be provided for each ceiling outlet, bracket outlet and other lighting fixture outlets. Where a fixture type is not indicated, provide a fixture of the same type used in similar areas. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. LIGHTING Project #10140 2651 00-1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2.02 FIXTURES A. Where installed on combustible surfaces, fixtures shall be specifically UL listed for this condition or be spaced not less than 1 -1/2 -inch from the combustible surface. B. All glassware shall be high quality, homogeneous in texture and free from streaks, cords, stones, or blisters and of uniform thickness and properly annealed. C. Enamel finish shall be baked. The finish of each fixture shall be uniform In quality, durable and free from defects. D. All plastic molded lenses shall be acrylic prismatic K19, 0.156' type. F. Disconnecting Means: 1, All applicable luminaires must be provided with means to comply with luminaire disconnect requirements specified in NEC 410AW(G), 2008 Edition. 2.03 LAMPS A. Acceptable manufacturers of incandescent, fluorescent, and HID lamps: 1. Sylvania 2. Westinghouse 3. General Electric B. Incandescent lamps shall be 130 volt inside frosted unless otherwise specified in the Light Fixture Schedule. C. Fluorescent lamps shall be rapid start. Lamp shall be cool white: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. General Electric b. Sylvania C. Westinghouse 2. These lamps shall be the above manufacturer except: a. When otherwise shown on the Light Fixture Schedule b. In dimming circuits c. In no case shall these lamp types be used in area where ambient temperatures are less than 65oF D. Metal -halide lamps shall be phosphor coated in interior fixtures and clear in exterior fixtures and floodlights: unless otherwise specified In the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 2.04 BALLASTS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Advance 2. Universal Lighting Technologies 3, Sylvania B. T8 Fluorescent Ballasts shall be: 1. Electronic Programmed Rapid Start 2. , High efficiency in conformance with the NEMA/CEE high performance specifications 3. Normal ballast factor (0.88) 4. UL Type CC Rated 5. Semi-independent lamp operation 6. High frequency above 42 kHz through 52kHz T <10% THD, >0.98 PF 8. Class A sound rating 9. Shall not contain any PCB 10. Be UL listed, Class P, and Type 1 Outdoor C. High intensity discharge ballasts for metal halide fixtures shall be: 1-. Auto -transformer -constant wattage type CWA-90% pt, 18% maximum loss, low starting current (single lamp -all types) 2. Sound rated 'B" INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. LIGHTING Project #10140 2651 00-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 3. Free of magnetic hum 4. Isolated from direct contact with building structure with vibration dampeners where required,' 5. Individually fused 6. Not exceed 90`C operating temperature 7. High power factor type PART 3 - EXECUTION . . 3.01 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Light fixtures for all outlets shown on the drawings shall be furnished and installed complete including the assembly, wiring, support materials, and installation of each unit in place. All lenses, glassware and metal parts shall be thoroughly cleaned just prior to final acceptance. B. Lighting fixtures shall be mounted as specified, and shall include all necessary fittings for a complete installation_ Provide all materials to adequately and safely support all fixture installations. C. Verify ceiling suspension material and systems in the various areas and provide plaster frames and proper fixture trims. 3.02 FIXTURE LOCATION A. Space fixtures as indicated on the drawings and in keeping with ceiling patterns, air inlets and outlets. B. Light fixtures recessed in ceiling shall be coordinated with ceiling construction_ Recessed fixtures as scheduled serve only as a guide as to the type of fixture, lamp, and lens. Supply fixture that shall integrate with the type of ceiling as scheduled on architectural drawings approved for construction. Recessed light fixtures installed in grid ceiling shall have tee grid clamps. C- Exit lights shall be coordinated with adjacent architectural work and shall be located and modified as to type of mounting, as directed by Architect/Engineer. 3.03 FIXTURE SUPPORT A. Conduits run to recessed fixtures shall terminate in a suitable box adjacent to fixture opening with final connections to fixture made with flexible conduit and Type AF wire. Airtight fiberglass gaskets shall be provided around recessed fixtures to eliminate light leakage or hot air dirt streaks between fixture trim and finished ceiling. Fixtures shall be designed, insulated and ventilated to prevent scorching of adjacent construction. Plaster or other special frames, including extension pan for exposed conduit installation, shall be provided. B. Light fixtures shall have proper supports, flanges, and plaster frames to integrate with the type of ceiling construction. All fixtures shall be constructed so that they may be securely supported. All fixtures shall be supported from 318 -inch stud in outlet box. Outlet boxes shall have fixture studs and shall be securely hung independently of conduits. C. Provide auxiliary supports for mounting fixtures in areas without ceilings (i.e., exposed beams and slabs), for proper installation of fixtures. Such supports shall span a minimum of 2 beams for each individual fixture and shall be securely and suitably anchored. D. Fixtures shall be supported with a stem and "L" hanger on one end and pipe stem on the other end. When conduit is used to support fixtures, 1 -inch rigid heavy wall shall be the minimum size. When conduits are used as stems, lockouts and washers shall be employed. Conduit may not be reduced in size between fixtures. E. Fixtures installed adjacent to unit heaters or mechanical equipment, which may cause fixtures to vibrate, shall be installed so not to sway. F. Fixtures shall not be supported from underside of metal roof decks, except where specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. G. Compression or indenter type couplings will not be acceptable for fixtures supports. H. Recessed grid fixtures shall be provided with T -bar clips. Install 4 per fixture. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. LIGHTING Project #10140 2651 00-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4117/2013 I. Fixtures installed in continuous rows shall be supported a minimum of 8'-0' on center. Where fixtures are mounted in continuous rows over 16 feet long, support from Kindorf, Unistrut, or Storack which will limit deflection to acceptable values. When channels are used for a wireway, thus eliminating conduit shown on the drawings as running parallel to the channels. Channels shall have closure plates if used as wireways. Continuous wireways may be used in place of conduit when approved in writing by Architect/Engineer for the installation. J. In general, support all fluorescent fixtures from the building structure and not from the ceiling suspension system (such as tee bar system for a suspended acoustical tile ceiling-) K. At the Electrical Contractors option recessed fluorescent fixtures can be supported from the ceiling suspension system if the Electrical Contractor makes arrangements and pays for additional ceiling hanger wires of adequate strength and quantity to support the fixtures. Where recessed fixtures occur in grid system, install tie wires on all four corners of the grid system about the fixture. Fixtures so supported shall be securely fastened to the grid system members with safety tee bar clips. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Color of exit light lettering shall be green LED. All letters shall be 6 inches high by 314 -inch stroke. Exit signs at an egress shall read "EXIT'. B. Fixtures marked "WP" shall be waterproof with special waterproof boxes and gaskets as required to keep rain or hose spray from coming into contact with wiring. C. Letters "a", "b", "c", etc., indicate associated switch or switches. Figures' l' , `2", "3', etc., indicate associated branch circuit. "F1", "F2', "F3", etc. indicate fixture type. 3.05 LAMP INSTALLATION A. Provide all lamps for all outlets and fixtures- All fixtures shall be complete with lamps and in operating condition when the building is turned over to the Using Agency. All "burnt out' or broken lamps that occur during the construction period shall be replaced. B. All fixtures, reflectors, lenses, and lamps shall be cleaned. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC- LIGHTING Project #10140 265100-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION 28 31 10 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1•GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES 4/17/2013 A. Provide a complete electrically -supervised, addressable fire alarm system based upon a micro -computer distributed processing system, including all panels, wiring, conduit, material, and devices and incorporating all functions such as smoke and heat detectors, fan shutdown, duct smoke detectors, pullstations, and supply and exhuast fan shutdown system. 1. Provide all auxiliary panels, relays, conduit, wiring, and necessary material for a complete and functional system 2. Installation shall include all memory, software, and electronic hardware for a completely operable system. 1.02 STANDARDS A. The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of NFPA 72 2008, the latest version of the National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760, and all local code and ordinances as required by the local authority having jurisiction. B. NFPA 90A C. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code , D. ADA E. ASME /ANSI A17.1 and A17.3 1.03 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire alarm systems, including manual stations, detectors, notification appliances, signal equipment, controls, and devices. B. Work covered by this specification section includes the furnishing of labor, equipment, materials, and complete operational performance required for installation of the Fire Alarm System as shown on the drawings, as specified, and as directed by the Architect/Engineer. C. Work covered by this section of the specification is to be coordinated with the related work as specified elsewhere under the project specifications. D. Fire Alarm System shall consist of all necessary hardware equipment and software programming to perform following functions: 1. Fire Alarm and Detection Operations 2. Remote Manual and Automatic Control of Elevators, all Smoke Control Related Fan System, Remote Monitoring of Sprinkler, and Off Premise Notification. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Addressable Device: A fire alarm system component with discrete identification that can have its status individually identified or that is used to individually control other functions. B. Initiating Device: A system component that originates transmission of a change of state condition, such as a smoke detector, manual fire alarm box, supervisory switch, etc. C. Notification Appliance: Afire alarm system component such as a bell, horn, speaker, strobe, printer, etc., that provides an audible or visible output, or both. D. Style D/Z Wiring (Class A): Circuits arranged and electrically supervised so a single break or single ground fault condition will be indicated by a trouble signal at the fire alarm control unit (FACP) and the circuit will continue to be capable of operation for its intended service in the faulted condition no matter where the break or ground fault condition occurs. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 2831 10- 1 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4117/2013 E. Style B/Y Wiring (Class B): Circuits electrically supervised such that a single break or a single ground fault condition will be indicated by a trouble signal at the Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACP) no matter where the break or ground fault condition occurs. F. Style 6 Signaling Line Circuit (Class A): Circuits arranged and electrically supervised so a break or ground fault condition will be indicated by a trouble signal at the Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACP) and the communication circuit will continue to be capable of operation for its intended service in the faulted condition no matter where the break or ground fault condition occurs. G. Style 7 Signaling Line Circuit (Class A): Circuits arranged and electrically supervised so a break, short. or ground fault condition will be indicated by a trouble signal at the Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACP) and the communication circuit will continue to be capable of operation for its intended service in the faulted condition no matter where the break, short, or ground fault condition occurs. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Complete, addressable, microprocessor -based fire detection and alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation, addressable analog initiating devices. B. The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing special instructions and operating sequences as required. The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in operation. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control unit. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. C. The system shall have the capability of loading software operations from a single node to all other nodes on the network, D. Resident software shall allow for full configuration of initiating circuits so that additional hardware shall not be necessary to accommodate future changes. For example, monitoring of normally open contact devices to monitoring of normally closed contact devices, or from sensing of normally open contact devices to sensing a combination circuit and being able to differentiate between the two. E. Resident software shall allow for configuration of notification appliance and control circuits so that additional hardware shall not be necessary to accommodate changes. For example, changing a non -coded notification appliance circuit to a coded circuit, or from a slow march time (20 BPM) to fast march time (120 BPM) coding. F. The system shall have the capability of recalling alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. G. Signal Transmission: A combination of hard -wired, using separate individual circuits for each zone of alarm initiation and alarm device operation as required, and multiplexing signal transmission for addressable alarm initiation and alarm device operation, dedicated to fire alarm service only. H. Audible Alarm Notification: By voice alarm messages and tone signals on loudspeakers. I. System connections for alarm -initiation and alarm -notification circuits shall be: Style B and Y wiring. T Signaling Line Circuits shall be: Style 4. K. Functional Description: The following are required system functions and operating features: 1. Priority of Signals: Accomplish automatic response functions by the first zone initiated. Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first zone are not altered by subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal. Priority two, Supervisory Service and Trouble signals have second-, third-, and fourth -level _ priority. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower -priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or order received. 2. _ Noninterfering: Zone, power. wire, and supervise the system so a signal on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the fire alarm control - panel FACP after the initiating device or devices are restored to normal. 3. Signal Initiation: The manual or automatic operation of an alarm -initiating or supervisory -operating device shall cause the FACP to transmit an appropriate signal including: a. General alarm, INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 2831 10-2 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 b. Fire -suppression alarm. C. Manual station alarm. - d_ Smoke detector alarm. e. Heat detector alarm. f_ Fan shutdown. - g. Smoke control initiation. j- System trouble. k. Valve tamper supervisory. 4. Loss of primary power at the FACP shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP and shall indicate at the FACP when the system is operating on an alternate power supply. 5. Annunciation: Manual and automatic operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated both on the FACP and on the annunciator, indicating the location and type of device. 6. FACP Alphanumeric Display. Shall display plain -language description of alarms, trouble signals, supervisory signals, monitoring actions, system and component status, and system commands. 7. General Alarm.- A system general alarm shall include: a. Indicating the general alarm condition at the FACP and the annunciator_ I Identifying the device that is the source of the alarm at the FACP and the annunciator. C. Displaying the alarm on an 80 character LCD display. The system alarm LED shall flash on the control unit and the graphic annunciator until the alarm has been acknowledged. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone shall flash the system alarm LED on the control unit and graphic annunciator. The display shall show the new alarm information. d. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control unit and the graphic annunciator until the event has been acknowledged. e. Operating audible and visible alarm notification signals throughout the building. f. Sounding a continuous fire alarm signal until silenced by the alarm silence switch atthe control unit or at the graphic annunciator. g. All visible alarm notification appliances shall flash continuously until the System Reset Switch is operated It. Any subsequent alarm shall reactivate the alarm notification appliances. I . Releasing hold -open devices on fire doors. j. Initiating smoke control sequence through a signal to the building automatic temperature control system. k. Activating any and all FACPs programmed for control of dedicated supply and exhaust fans in an alarm situation. Provide dedicated override control points located near the fan control centers. If the building HVAC controls are used for smoke exhaust, the designated fire alarm control unit shall be programmed to override the HVAC controls and put all fan and dampers into the appropriate fire mode. I. Activating the air handling systems per life safety code, NFPA 90A and NFPA 101. on Activating a supervised signal to notify the local fire department. n. Initiating automatic elevator recall per ASME/ANSI A17.1 and At 7.3- 8. Alarm activation of any elevator lobby smoke detector shall, in addition to the operations listed above, cause the elevator cabs to be recalled according to the following sequence: a. If the alarmed device is on any floor otherthan the main level of egress, the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the main level of egress. b. If the alarmed device is on the main egress level, the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the predetermined alternate recall level as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction. 9. Water -flow alarm switch operation: a. Initiates a general alarm. 10. Smoke detection initiates a general alarm. 11. Smoke Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment: a. Authorized operation of controls at the FACP shall cause the selection of specific addressable smoke sensors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. 12. Sensitivity of each sensor will be as high as it can possibly be for its location without being so sensitive that it will be nuisance alarm -prone. 13. Smoke Sensor Sensitivity: Between 2- and 3.7 -percent -per -foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268. 14. Control unit shall maintain a moving average of the sensors smoke chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust, dirt, and component degradation conditions that could affect detection operations. The control unit shall automatically maintain constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor (via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. Project #10140 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283110-3 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4117/2013 15. Control unit shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensors average value reaches a predetermined value, a' DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control unit for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a' DIRTY SENSOR` is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be indicated at the control unit for the individual sensor. To prevent false alarms, these "DIRTY" conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation. 16. Control unit shall continuously perform an automatic self -test routine on each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control unit. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition. 17, Sprinkler valve tamper switch operation shall cause or initiate the following: a. The activation of any standpipe or sprinkler valve supervisory (tamper) switch shall activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control unit and the graphic annunciator. Differentiation between valve tamper activation and opens and/or grounds on the initiation circuit wiring shall be provided. The differentiation shall be clearly identified in plain - language on the FACP Alphanumeric display. b. Pressing the Supervisory Service Acknowledge Key shall silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the Supervisory Service LED "on" indicating the off -normal condition. C. A record of the event in the FACP historical log. d. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station. e. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the Supervisory Service LED to extinguish, indicating restoration to normal. L. Recording of Events. Record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. M. Trouble conditions shall indicate and differentiate in plain -language open circuit trouble, short circuit trouble, disable trouble, and manual override trouble for each circuit. 1. Permissible Signal Time Elapse: The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of any fire alarm or fire -detection system alarm -initiating device and its indication at the FACP shall be five seconds. 2. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by means of both a zone and a trouble signal at the FACP- Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation. 3. Independent System Monitoring: Supervise each independent smoke detection system, fire suppression 'system, duct detector, and elevator smoke detection system for both normal operation and trouble. N. Automatic Voice Evacuation Sequence: 1. The audio alarm signal shall consist of an alarm tone for a maximum of five seconds followed by an automatic digital voice message. At the end of the voice message, the alarm tone shall resume. The audio alarm signals shall sound alternately until the signal silence switch has been operated. - 2: All audio operations (speaker circuit selection and alarm tone / voice messages and timing variations) shall be activated by the system software so that any required future changes can be facilitated by authorized personnel without any component rewiring or hardware additions. 3. Voice system is to include recorded messages for severe weather alert and for chemical spill. Contact Owner's representative for message details. O. Manual Voice Paging 1. The system shall be configured to allow voice paging. Upon activation of any speaker manual control switch, the alarm tone shall be sounded over all speakers in that group. 2. If any speaker manual control switches are activated, the control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the push -to -talk paging microphone over the preselected speakers. When the microphone button is released, the alarm tone shall resume. 3. Facility for total building paging shall be accomplished by the means of an 'All Circuits" switch. P. Alarm Silencing 1. If the 'Alarm Silence" button is pressed, all audio alarm signals shall cease operation. 2. Signals shall not be silenced during the 1601 second alarm silence inhibit mode. O, System Reset 1. The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to Its normal state after an alarm condition has been remedied. Display messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps ("IN PROGRESS, 'RESET COMPLETED") as they occur, should all alarm conditions be cleared. 2. Should an alarm condition continue, the system will remain in an alarmed stale. System control relays INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 28 31 10-4 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY shall not reset. The control unit alarm LED shall remain on. The alarmed points will not require acknowledgment if they were previously acknowledged. 3. Upon reset of the fire alarm control unit, air handling units shall sequentially start up to minimize power demand. R. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the notification appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should an actual alarm occur, all alarm functions would occur as described previously. S. Activation of an auxiliary bypass switch shall override the selected automatic functions, T. The actuation of the "enable one person test' program at the control unit shall activate tfie "One Person Testing" mode of the system which shall cause the following to occur: 1. The city circuit connection shall be bypassed. 2. Control relay functions shall be bypassed. - -- 3. The control unit shall show a trouble condition. - 4. The unit shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. 5. Any momentary opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition. 6- The system shall have S programmable passcode protected one person testing groups, such that -only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing. U. Auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that an 'off normal' position of any switch shall cause an "off normal" system trouble. The "off normal' status shall be clearly identified in plain -language on the EACP alphanumeric display. V. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. W. The System Modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and the audible trouble signal shall sound. X. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes. Y. Power Requirements 1. Each control unit shall receive 120 VAC power via a dedicated circuit. 2. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon less of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period- The system shall automatically transfer to battery standby upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. 3. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the control unit. 4. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visibly indicated at the control unit and the graphic annunciator. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. 5. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visibly indicated at the control unit and the graphic annunciator. 6. Where door holder or similar a.c. devices are installed, provide a new a.c. whip to bring power for these devices from an a.c. source. Do not run a.c. in with any of the fire alarm system wiring. The a.c. will be switched by a detector relay base (contract rating 3 amps., 120 v.a.c. or 30 v.d.c.). If coils have different voltage rating, change coils. If coils are 24 v.d.c., provide relay and a reverse -biased diode (clamping) to each and every coil. In this case, wiring can be run in same raceway as fire alarm wiring. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for system components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations showing minimum clearances and installed features and devices. Include list of materials and NRTL-listing data. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 2831 10- 5 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 411 712 01 3 C. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating between factory- and field -installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Indicate components for both field and factory wiring. D. Shop drawings showing details of graphic annunciator. E. System operation description covering this specific Project including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for all manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable. F. Operating instructions for mounting at the FACP. G. Operation and maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. Include data for each type product, including all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. Include recommendations for spare parts to be stocked at the site. Provide the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that carry stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished. H. Product certification signed by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system components certifying that their products comply with indicated requirements. L Submission to Authority Having Jurisdiction: In addition to routine submission of the above material, make an identical submission to the authority having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as required to depict component locations to facilitate review. Upon receipt of comments from the Authority, submit them for review. Make resubmisslons If required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. J. Submittals, shop drawings and the design of software programming is to be done by a NICET level 3 or 4 fire alarm technician. K. Record of field tests of system. L Contractor is to provide as -built drawings. Drawings shall show actual location of devices if different than on plans, locations of end of line resistors, and addresses or circuit number of all devices. M. Contractor is to provide an electronic file listing all system devices that are in the system program. List shall at a minimum include device type, location. and address or circuit number. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A factory -authorized Installer is to perform the Work of this Section. ._ B. Compliance With Local Requirements: Comply with the applicable building code, local ordinances, and regulations, and the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. C. Comply with NFPA 70, the latest version of the''National Electrical Code" T), NFPA Compliance: Provide fire alarm and detection systems conforming to the requirements of the following publications: 1. NFPA 72, "National Fire Alarm Code 2008" E NRTL Listing: Provide systems and equipment that are listed and labeled. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled". As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. F. Each and all Items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the 'U.i label. All control equipment shall be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listings shall NOT be acceptable. G. All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL864 requirements. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 2831 10-6 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 H. Architectural and Transportation Barrier Compliance Board: Title III of the Americans with Disabilities Act. FM Compliance. Provide fire alarm systems and components that are FM -approved. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service Contract: Provide maintenance of fire alarm systems and equipment for a period of 12 months commencing with Substantial Completion, using factory -authorized service representatives: B. Basic Services: Systematic, routine maintenance visits on an annual basis at times coordinated with the Owner. In addition, respond to service calls within 24 hours of notification of system trouble. Adjust and replace defective parts and components with original manufacturer's replacement parts, components, and supplies. C. Additional Services: Perform services within the above 12 -month period not classified as routine maintenance or as warranty work as described in Division 1 Section "Warranties and Bonds" when authorized in writing. Compensation for additional services must be agreed upon in writing prior to performing services. D. Renewal of Maintenance Service Contract: No laterthan 60 days prior to the expiration of the maintenance services contract, deliver to The Owner a proposal to provide contract maintenance and repair services for an additional one-year term. Owner will be under no obligation to accept maintenance service contract renewal proposal. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. General: Furnish extra materials, matching products installed (as described below), packaging with protective covering for storage, and identifying with labels clearly describing contents. B. Glass Rods for Manual Stations: Furnish quantity equal to 15 percent of the number of manual stations installed, minimum of 6 rods. C_ Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Panels: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but not less than one. D. Lamps for Strobe Units: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but not less than one. E. Smoke Detectors and Heat Detectors- Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units of each type installed but not less than one of each type. F Detector Bases: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type installed but -not less than one of each type. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: _ 1. Simplex _ 2. Siemens - 3. Notifier(NESCO distributor) B. Being listed as an acceptable Manufacturer in no way relieves the Contractors obligation to provide all equipment and features in accordance with these specifications. C The Manufacturer shall be a nationally recognized company specializing in Level II fire alarm systems. This organization shall employ factory trained and NICET certified technicians, and shall maintain a service organization within 50 miles of this project location. The Manufacturer and service organization shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the fire protective signaling systems industry. D. Equipment must be supplied by a factory -authorized Iowa -based distributor. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 2831 10-7 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2.02 MANUAL PULL STATIONS 4/17/2013 A. Description: Single-action type, fabricated of high impact red LEXAN or metal, and finished in red with molded, raised -letter operating instructions of contrasting color. Station will mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common with the control units. Stations requiring the breaking of a glass panel are not acceptable. Stations requiring the breaking of a concealed rod may be provided. B. Pull stations shall have a white face with red lettering, C. Station Reset: The front of the station is to be hinged to a backplate assembly and must be opened with a key to reset the station. The key shall be common with the control units. 1. Addressable pull stations will contain a communication transmitter and receiver having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FRCP. There shall be no limit to the number of stations, detectors, or zone adapter modules, which may be activated or `in alarm" simultaneously. 2. The addressable manual station shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. listed. 2.03 SMOKE DETECTORS A. General: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems," Include the following features: 1. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification. 2. Operating Voltage: 24-V d.c., nominal. 3. Self -Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 4. Detectors shall have a white face with red lettering. 5. Plug -In Arrangement: Detector and associated encapsulated electronic components are mounted in a .module that connects to a fixed base with a twist -locking plug connection. The plug connection requires no springs for secure mounting and contact maintenance. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring. Detector construction shall have a mounting base with a twist -lock detecting head that is lockable. The locking feature must be field removable when not required. Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control Drill Detector design shall provide compatibility with other fire alarm detection loop devices (heat -- detectors, pull stations, etc.) 6. Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the Control Unit (once every 4 seconds). When the Control Unit determines that a sensor is in an alarm or a trouble condition, the Control Unit shall command the LED on that sensor's base to turn on steady indicating that abnormal condition exists- Sensors which do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition at the sensor location shall not be acceptable. 7. Each sensor shall be scanned by the Control Unit for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. The Control Unit shall operate with the installed device but shall initiate a "Wrong Device" trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed sensor type is changed. 8. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI. 9. Visual Indicator: Connected to indicate detector has operated. 10. Addressabilily: Sensors include a communication transmitter and receiver having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features and characteristics: 1. Infrared detector light with matching silicon cell receiver and actuated by the presence of visible products of combustion. C- Duct Smoke Detector: Photoelectric type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applied. Detector includes relay as required for fan shutdown. �. Addressable duct smoke sensors shall operate on the light scattering, photo -diode principle, and shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control, The sensors shall not have a self contained smoke sensitivity setting and shall automatically communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control unit. The sensor's electronics shall be shielded to protect against nuisance alarms from EMI and RFL INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 28 31 10-8 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4/17/2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 2. Duct Housing shall provide an auxiliary alarm relay with two "Form C" contacts rated at 2A@ 28VDC or 120 VAC resistive. This auxiliary relay operates when the sensor reaches its alarm threshold, or when the control unit via software control, manually or automatically operates the relay in response to inputs from other devices. 3. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes by accessing them through the duct housing front cover 4. Each duct detector shall have a Remote Test Station with an alarm LED and test switch. 2.04 OTHER DETECTORS A_ Heat (Thermal) Detector: Combination fixed -temperature and rate -of -rise unit with mounting plate arranged for outlet box mounting: 135 -deg F fixed -temperature setting except as indicated. 2.05 ALARM -NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. General: Equipment alarmnoffication appliances for mounting as indicated. Provide terminal blocks for system connections. B. Visual Notification Appliances: multi selectable candela Xenon flash output, 110 cd min., 24 VDC operation, wall mounted, compatible with ADA requirements with "FIRE" printed vertically, Where indicated, mini strobe visual notification device may be utilized where shown as 15 cd in small rooms. 1. Combination notification appliances consist of factory -combined, voice/tone speakers and visual notification units in a single mounting assembly. C. VoicelTone Speakers: Comply with UL 1480, "Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling." 1. Speakers: Compression -driver type with flared projectors having a frequency response of 400to 4000 Hz; equipped with a multiple tap, varnish -impregnated, sealed, matching transformer. Match transformer. tap range and speaker power rating to the acoustical environment of the speaker Ibcation. - 2. High -Range Speaker Units: Rated 2-15 watts. - -- 3. Low -Range Speaker Units: Rated .25-2 watts. - - 4. Speaker Mounting: Flush as indicated_ 2.06 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT INTERFACE MODULES A. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules: Arrange to monitor one or more system components that are not Otherwise equipped for multiplexing communication. Modules transmit identification and status to the FACP using a communication transmitter and receiver with unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. Modules shall be used for monitoring of waterflow, valve tamper, non -addressable detectors, and for control of evacuation indicating appliances and AHU systems_ B. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules will be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet box. Modules will include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting. Modules will receive their operating power from the signaling line or a separate two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply as required. C. There shall be three types of modules. 1. Type 1: Monitor Circuit Interface Module a- For conventional 2 -wire smoke detector and/or contact device monitoring with Class B or Class A wiring supervision: I This type of module will provide power to and monitor the status of a zone consisting of conventional 2 -wire smoke detectors and/or N/O contact devices as specified elsewhere and identified in a schedule on the plans. The supervision of the zone wiring will be Class B, This module will communicate the zone's status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the FACP. b. For conventional 4 -wire smoke detector with Class B wiring supervision: 1) This type of module will provide power to and monitor the contact status of a zone consisting of conventional 4 -wire smoke detectors as specified elsewhere and identified in a schedule on the plans. The module will provide detector reset capability and a 2 amp fuse to provide over - current power protection for the 4 -wire detector. This module will communicate the zone's status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the FACP. 2. Type 2: Control Circuit Interface Module a. Module for signals, speakers, fire fighter phone jacks and other device control with Style D and Style 2 wiring supervision. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 2831 10-9 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 b. For Non -Supervised Control: 1) This type of module will provide double pole double throw relay switching for voltages up to 120VAC. It shall contain easily replaceable 2 amp fuses, one on each common leg of the relay. 3. Type 3: Monitor Circuit Interface Module a. This type of module is an individually addressable module that has both its power and its communications supplied by the two wire multiplexing signaling line circuit. b. It provides location specific addressability to an Initiating device by monitoring normally open dry contacts. This module is required for monitoring waterflow and tamper switches. D. Circuit Interface Module shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control unit. Module identification shall be transmitted to the control unit for processing according to the program instructions. Should the module become non -operational, tampered with, or removed, a discrete trouble signal, unique to the module, shall be transmitted to, and annunciated at, the control Unit. E. Circuit Interface Module shall be capable of being programmed for its "address" location on the multiplexing signaling line circuit. The Circuit Interface Module shall be compatible with addressable manual stations and addressable detectors on the same multiplexing signaling line circuit. 2.07 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. General: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire -Protective Signaling Systems." B. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange unit so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure- If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures. Accommodate all components plus capability of 20% for future expansion and allow ample gutter space for interconnection of units as well as field wiring. Identify each enclosure by an engraved, red -laminated, phenolic resin nameplate. C. Systems: Alarm and supervisory systems are separate and independent in the FACP. The alarm -initiating zone boards in the FACP consist of plug-in modules plus capability of 25% for future expansion.. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is not acceptable. D. Control Modules: Types and capacities required to perform all functions of the fire alarm systems plus capability of 25% for future expansion. Local, visible, and audible signals notify of alarm, supervisory, and trouble�conditions E. Zones: Provide for all alarm and supervisory zones indicated. Each NAC and SLC shall not be loaded to more than 75% and shall include capability of 25% for future expansion. F. Indicating Lights: Provide individual LED devices for each zone. An LED test switch for each FACP section - - illuminates all LED devices on that section of the control unit. Manual toggle test switches or push test -buttons do not require a key to operate. Alarm and supervisory signals light a red LED of the associated zone. Trouble signals light an amber LED for the associated zone. G. Resetting: Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm or trouble condition still exists. H. The fire alarm panel shall include buttons for bypassing the following functions: notification applicance circuits, alarm signal transmission, supervisory signal transmission, air handler shutdown, elevator capture and door release. Enabling any of these bypasses shall cause a trouble signal to be transmitted. The trouble signal cannot be bypassed. I. A digital communicator shall be furnished with the new panel for future use, but shall not be enabled at this time. The fire alarm panel is to include four (4) contact relays for transmission of alarm, trouble signals, supervisory signals and chemical spill alert. Each of these relays is to be wired to a binary input on the building automation system (Metasys). J. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Provide the basic interface between human operator at FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and control. A display with a minimum of 80 characters displays alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and indicates control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters. Arrange keypad for use in entering and executing control commands. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 2831 10-10 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 K. Voice Alarm: An emergency communication system, integral with the FACP, includes central voice alarm system components complete with microphones, pre -amplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators. Features include: 1. Amplifiers comply with UL 1711, "Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." 2. One alarm channel permit transmission of announcements to zones or floors automatically or by use of the central control microphone. All announcements are made over dedicated, supervised communication lines. 3. Status annunciator indicates the status of the various voice alarm speaker zones and the status of fire fighter telephone two-way communication zones. L. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a LEXAN plastic or glass cover in a painted steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a location observable from the FACP. Include interpretation and appropriate response for displays and signals, and briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.08 GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR - REMOTE LCD TYPE A. Provide Remote LCD Annunciator with the same "look and feel' as the FACP operator interface. The Remote LCD Annunciator shall use the same Primary Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset Keys, Status LEDs and LCD Display as the FACP. B. Annunciator shall have super -twist LCD display with two lines of 40 characters each. Annunciator shall be provided with four (4) programmable control switches and associated LEDs. C. Under normal conditions the LCD shall display a "SYSTEM IS NORMAL" message and the current time and date. D. Should an abnormal condition he detected the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory or Trouble) shall flash. The unit audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steady for trouble and supervisory conditions. E. The LCD shall display the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a point in the system: 1. 40 character custom location label. 2. Type of device (e.g., smoke, pull station, waterflow). 3. Point status (e.g., alarm, trouble). F. Operator keys shall be key switch enabled to prevent unauthorized use. The key shall only be removable in the disabled position. Acknowledge, Silence and Reset operation shall be the same as the FACP. 2.09 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY A. General: Components include battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch. B. Battery: Sealed lead -acid or nickel cadmium type. Provide sufficient capacity to operate the complete alarm system in normal or supervisory (non -alarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. Following this period of operation on battery power, the battery shall have sufficient capacity to operate all components of the system, including all alarm indicating devices in alarm or supervisory mode for a period of 5 minutes. 2.10 WIRE A. Line -Voltage and Low -Voltage Circuits: Solid copper conductors with 600 V -rated insulation. B. Individual Circuits for. ' 1. Voice/Tone Device Circuits. 2. Visual Device Circuits. C. All cable assemblies, including those installed in raceway, shall be plenum rated. - --' 2.11 TAGS A. Tags For Identifying Tested Components: Comply with NFPA 72. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #110140 2831 10 - 11 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 4117(2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install system according to NFPA Standards referenced in Parts land 2 of this Section. B. Provide separate voice audio circuits, visual appliance circuits, and signal line circuits. All system wiring shall be installed in metallic raceway. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. Include sufficient control unit(s), annunciator(s), manual stations, automatic fire detectors, smoke detectors, audible and visible notification appliances, wiring, terminations. electrical boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system. B. Refer to fire alarm plans for determination of location and quantity of duct smoke detectors. C. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi -flush in recessed back boxes with operating handles 42 inches above finished floor or as indicated. D. Water -Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised. E. Smoke Detectors: Install ceiling -mounted detectors not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling. Install detectors no closer than 5 feet from air registers. F. Audible Notification Appliances: Install not less than 80 inches above the finished floor nor less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install speakers on surface -mounted back boxes with the device -operating mechanism concealed behind a grille or as indicated. Combine audible and visual notification appliances at the same location into a single unit. G. Visual Notification Appliances, Install not less than 80 inches above the finished floor and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. H. Device Location -Indicating Lights: Locate in the public space immediately adjacent to the device they monitor. I. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP): Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 6 feet above the finished floor J, Graphic Annunciator: Arrange as indicated, flush mount with the top of the Unit no more than 6 feet above the finished floor. 3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method. Install wiring in metallic raceway according to Division 26. B. Wiring Within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess, Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the wiring diagrams of the system. Make all connections with approved crimp - on terminal spade lugs, pressure -Type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where any circuit tap is made. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project 810140 28 31 10- 12 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/17/2013 D. System Wiring: Wire and cable shall be a type listed for its intended use by an approval agency acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate articles from the current approved edition of the NFPA 70. Provide separate voice/tone speaker and visual NAC and SLC circuits for each floor. Each floor shall be considered a separate zone. Use FPLR in raceway to serve each zone per NFPA 72. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain from the Fire Alarm System Manufacturer written instruction regarding the appropriate wire/cable to be used for this installation. No deviation from the written instruction shall be made by the Contractor without the prior written approval of the Fire Alarm System Manufacturer. E. Color Coding: Color -code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color code for alarm initiating device circuits wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits. Color - code notification appliance circuits differently from alarm -initiating circuits. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red. F. Fan Shutdown: Air handling equipment shall be connected to relays in its' respective duct smoke detector. 3.04 GROUNDING A. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields as specified by the equipment manufacturer. For audio circuits, minimize to the greatest extent possible ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5 -ohm ground atmain equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory -authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system. B. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results. C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. D. Final Test Notice: Provide a 10 -day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows: 1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. 2. Megger test all conductors other than those intentionally and permanently grounded with electronic components disconnected. Test for resistance to ground. Report readings less than 1 -megohm for evaluation. 3. Test all conductors for short circuits utilizing an insulation -testing device. 4. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record drawings. 5. Verify the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual. 6. Test initiating, notification, and signaling circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of the initiating and notification devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used. 7. Test each initiating device and notification appliance for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion. 8. Measure and record the actual current draw of each Notification Appliance Circuit. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. FIRE DETECTION ANDALARMProject #10140 . 2831 10-13 ASHTON HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2013 CITY OF IOWA CITY 4/1712013 9. Test the system for all specified functions according to the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciatorindications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level. 10. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified. F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards. G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests. H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed. I. Final Test, Certificate of Completion, and Certificate of Occupancy: 1. Start-up and certification testing is to be provided by a NICET level 2 or higher fire alarm technician. Test the system as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in order to obtain a certificate of occupancy. Demonstrate that the system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards. This final test shall be witnessed by a representative of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and a factory -authorized service representative, 3.06 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and adjusting controls and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to the site for this purpose. 3.07 TRAINING A. Provide the services of a factory -authorized service representative to demonstrate the system and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintaining of the system. Provide a minimum of 8 hours' training. 2. Schedule training with the Owner at least seven days in advance. END OF SECTION INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC_ FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Project #10140 2831 10- 14 5� Prepared by: Michael Moran, 220 S. Gilbert St., Iowa City, IA 52240, (319)356-5104 RESOLUTION NO. 13-133 RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING ON MAY 14, 2013 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE ASHTON HOUSE REMODELING PROJECT, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE CITY ENGINEER TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. WHEREAS, the City has acquired a National Register historic property and wishes to develop it into a special event facility for public rental and use; and WHEREAS, renovations are necessary to bring the facility up to building code and ADA standards prior to public use; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the CIP account #4178. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY. IOWA: 1. That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-mentioned project is to be held on the 14th day of May, 2013, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That the copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. NOW THEREFORE BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: Passed and approved this 73rd day of April 2013. ATTEST:����� LJ CITY RK Resolution No. 13-133 Page 2 It was moved by Champion I and seconded by Payne the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ASSENT: x_ Champion g Dickens x Dobyns g Hayek x Mims g Payne x Throgmorton NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR THE NED ASHTON HOUSE 2013 RENOVATIONS PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Ned Ashton Renovations 2013 Project in said city at 7 PM on the 14th day of May, 2013, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Printer's Fee CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN FED.ID#42-0330670 being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper I time(s), on the following date(s): Legal erk Subscribed and sworn to efo m -this day of A.D.20,13 - Notary Public art _F 1`erP OFFICIAL PURLIGATION NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR THE NED ASHTON HOUSE 2013 RENOVATIONS PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CIN OF IOWA CIN, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the city Io Council conduct f the Ciaof Iowa publc coy, Iowa, w ill hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Ned Ashton Renovations 2013 Project in said city at 7 PM on the 14th day of May, 2013, said meet- ing to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the nest meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said ni log of the City Council for the pur- pose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CIN CLERK. PcMay 1, 2013 _Pt Prepared by: Michael Moran, Parks & Recreation Department, 220 S. Gilbert St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5104 RESOLUTION NO. 13-170 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON- TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE ASHTON HOUSE REMODELING PROJECT, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE TO BIDDERS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, renovations are necessary to bring the Ashton House historic property up to building code and ADA standards prior to public use as a special event facility; and WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the CIP account #4178. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above- named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice, not less than 4 and not more than 45 days before the date for filing the bids, for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Sealed bids for the above-named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 11:00 a.m. on the 14th day of June, 2013. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 18th day of June, 2013, or at a special meeting called for that purpose, Passed and approved this 14th day of ATTEST: K . 4iti1/ CITY CEERK pwengVnastersVes appy&s.doc 5?13 2013 MAYOR � Approved-layy- City Attor y' OfFi 5-!0 - 0 Resolution No. Page 2 13-170 It was moved by Payne and seconded by Dobyns the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: Champion Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton NOTICE TO BIDDERS ASHTON HOUSE REMODELING PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 11 A.M. on the 14th day of June, 2013. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 18th day of June, 2013, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. A pre-bid meeting will be held on site at 820 West Park Road, Iowa City, Iowa on May 30, 2013 at 10:00 AM. The Project will involve the following: the interior renovation and modification of an existing 5,000 square foot building, resulting in the converting of the building use from a residential type occupancy to an assembly type occupancy with the intended purpose and use as a public and community gathering place. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Thomas McInerney Architect, of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and AF -1 save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of 1 (one) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Working Days: 115 (one -hundred -fifteen days) Specified Start Date: June 19, 2013 Liquidated Damages: $ 100 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Technigraphics, 415 Highland Avenue, Suite #100, Iowa City, Iowa, 52240, phone number (319) 354-5950, by bona fide bidders. A $60 refundable and a $15 non-refundable shipping fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Technigraphics. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK AF -2 Prepared by: Michael Moran, Director, Parks & Recreation Department, 220 S. Gilbert St. Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5100 RESOLUTION NO. 13-201 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR TO SIGN AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A CONTRACT FOR THE ASHTON HOUSE REMODELING PROJECT WHEREAS, Iowa State Contractors, Inc. from Ottumwa, IA has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $199,000 for construction of the above-named project; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in GO Bonds account #4178. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: 1. The contract for construction of the above-named project is hereby awarded to Iowa State Contractors, Inc. from Ottumwa, IA, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bonds, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk to attest the contract for construction of the above-named project, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bonds, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 3. The Parks and Recreation Director is authorized to execute change orders as they may become necessary in the construction of the above-named project. Passed and approved this 18th day of June , 20 13 ATTEST: e CITY LERK OmMaZZOA It was moved by champion and seconded by Pavne the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were. AYES', NAYS: ABSENT: X Champion X Dickens X Dobyns X Hayek X Mims X Payne X Throgmorton Prepared by: Michael Moran, Parks & Recreation Director, 220 S. Gilbert St.., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5110 RESOLUTION NO. 14-215 CONSIDER A RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE ASHTON HOUSE REMODELING PROJECT. WHEREAS, the Parks and Recreation Director has recommended that the work for remodeling of the Ned Ashton House, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and Iowa State Contractors of Ottumwa, Iowa, dated August 15, 2013, be accepted, and WHEREAS, the performance and payment bond have been filed in the City Clerk's office; and WHEREAS, the bid was $199,000.00, and the final contract price is $194,029.93. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: Said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 15th day of July 2014. MAYO Approved by ATTEST: �'7iar ��;�f� y�- 9��2-L� S � r CITY ERK City Attorney's Office 2d(7) Resolution No. 14-215 ]Page 2 It was moved by Throgmorton and seconded by __ Dobvns the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: Ayrtp: KAYS: AHSEH'ile Y Botchway x Dickens x Dobyns x Hayek X Minis x Payne x Throgmorton R T ATI 2 1ASHTON HOUSE RENOV ONS 0 3 - DRAWING SHEET INDEX: x- - ARCHITECTURAL ' - - - A-010 COVER SHEET _- A-100 BASEMENT PLAN _ A 101 UPSTAIRS PLAN A-301 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS • � , � � 1 ..: . �� s°` � �+ � ;,�_ � � -' � ,,� " .- ,. #T.. a .- .,Y `Ji9ad`'••4 ny, '''.r, NS'' ,- e, _ _� t9ni:'_ s, - ' w'P d, x- :, .� -�=- � �. :� � � = - .�� A-302 BUILDING SECTION w w; -" - �- : f _ .� • „ �y _ ( _ 3 - ".. .. � -. __. { - 2..�„ ♦t. ice, �. � j a a, r> HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING HVAC ^ y • ... ., � M00 NOTES AND LEGEND - :- .t• f - i .: •. :. _. r ..,y1= _ . _..•'i-.,.-.., .-F t'^" { '. - may- ,•. 4 M01 DEMOLITION PLANS ?. kb ^-1^... e„t,e d. • _: .�. ", 1+. '2 - �... .i •iV� 1 l� y„ $ n [ -y _ h • _ � _ � M02 PLANS w , A _. M03 CEILING PLANS M04 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES PLUMBING I herebycerci that the portion of this technical submission I her certify that this engineering document was I herebycertifythat this engineering document was '�auulnn.a" p `FESS/p9., pr are by me or under my direc9t supervision ,o oFESSIpN''',, prepared b e or under m direct supervision ?r,, described herein was prepared by me or under my direct ���`` '� `" " P00 NOTES AND SYMBOLS P Me1�,�'•.,� supervision and responsible charge. lama dulyregistered ;`Q��.••••.vgl '•, a ha I am duly Licensed Professional .`` e�.•• ••.q! and t my Licensed Professional �Q ., Architectu er awsoftheStateof Iowa. F ' •' �' r �,.°'(p.TEp' y • ; 2 y� =; E g er unde the laws of the State of Iowa. y ; gin nd e ws of the State of Iowa. O 5 : ��'� T OM A. McINERNEY ; z ; MOHAMMED ; z ; CHRSTOPHER • c - Z tZ •• 't N' �' : rn - P01 DEMOLITION y 19 20 r 3 _ ABUHA5AN A _ _ VARO ; A = 05242 n n Lic. No. _20081__ Date n c ngineerXD Lic. No. 14866Date •'•,N0.20081 ,•' - M ice se renewal date is December 31, 2013 •••aNO. 148GG, - M license renewal date is December 31, 2014. Registration expires: June 30, 2013 Date Issued: JANUARY 2001 y Y ��►6y/(�]�_/���i�QW{►Q. ,,.r 9«0,« t<<o.< a/yrnsw A-olol A-lod A-loo '''%, # IOWA * .````` Pages or sheets covered by this seal: '''<,, •IOWA ``.`` Pages or sheets covered by this seal: /�� P02 PLANS �4_-�ED A` � .�`'.`• q- Sol t A - 3o Z ""„11111111,,,,,, 92-c �llay you "'III 11110"NAw, me I.. JWV4� � AID y. Pia A* Fol 1%'li y11N111M1111111 EXPIRES DEC. 31, 2013 EXPIRES DEC. 31, 2014 T i i. ELECTRICAL i E00 PLANS & GENERAL NOTES 1. Applicable Codes (Editions) Building Code - 94t - 2009 International Building Code (IBC) k <, ] r ! s E01 BASEMENT LEVEL 2. Occupancy and building type: ria E02 PPER LEVEL _ Use Group - Type A-2 Type of construction - V-B� E03 SYMBOLS &ONE-LINE ? I pto 3. Is the budding sprinkled? `.- ; '! �� {- - ai HWA E04 DETAILS & SCHEDULES NO t e P,_ 706 r = r� �� - yam:.... '. _ Melarvl St.. � >. r•,�.: A I SITE LOCATION a Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 \farcy Street Iowa City. Iowa 52240-3331 w w w. thoma Sarc h i tect. com 319-331-0365 thomas@thoniasarchitect.com Consultant: IMINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com et Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, id mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not inctively produce a lution or proceed with that woould result in atchange order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with nor a royal and will be at the prior PP franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road 't Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMASMCINERNEY,ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Description p 17.04.2013 BID DOCUMENTS Sheet Title: COVER SHEET Sheet Number: R T DOOR5 TO REMAIN DOORS OR OPENINGS TO BE MODIFIED DOOR SCHEDULE Numberl ROOM I Style SIZE—PR WxH NOTES 100 1 EAST AREA I Hinged — Single 1 3'-0" x 6'-8"1 1,3 NOTES: 1. MODIFY EX15TING DOOR TO SWING IN DIRECTION OF EGRE55 TRAVEL AND PROVIDE PANIC HARDWARE AND AUTOMATIC CLOSER 2. PROVIDE STEEL DOOR AND FRAME WITH PANIC HARDWARE, 3 HINGES AND AUTOMATIC CLOSER. 3. PROVIDE 5AFElY GLAZING. DOOR SCHEDULE umber Number ROOM Style SIZE—PR 101 VESTIBULE WxH NOTES 101 VESTIBULE Hinged — Single 3'-0" MEETING AREA x 6'-8" — 102 VESTIBULE Overhead — Sectional 20'-0" 103 x 7'-0" — 104 MEETING AREA Hinged — Double — Vision Lite PR 3'-0" 104 x 6'-8" — 180 RR Hinged — Single 2'-6" 191 x 6'-8" — 190 CLOSET Bifold — Double 4 0 1'-3" '192 x 6'-8" — 192 MECH Hinged — Single 2'-6" 195 x 6'-8" — 195 ELEC Bifold — Double 4 @ 1'-0" 196 x 6'-8" — 196 THE VAULT Hinged — Single 3'-0" 198 x 6'-8" — 198 CLOSET Bifold — Double 4 @ 1'-6" 199 x 6'-8" — 199 CLOSET Bifold — Double 4 @ 7 1/2" z 6'-8" — DOORS OR OPENINGS TO BE MODIFIED DOOR SCHEDULE Numberl ROOM I Style SIZE—PR WxH NOTES 100 1 EAST AREA I Hinged — Single 1 3'-0" x 6'-8"1 1,3 NOTES: 1. MODIFY EX15TING DOOR TO SWING IN DIRECTION OF EGRE55 TRAVEL AND PROVIDE PANIC HARDWARE AND AUTOMATIC CLOSER 2. PROVIDE STEEL DOOR AND FRAME WITH PANIC HARDWARE, 3 HINGES AND AUTOMATIC CLOSER. 3. PROVIDE 5AFElY GLAZING. 01 E W II I UPSTAIRS PLAN PLAN SCALE: 114" = I'-011 Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 thomas(cithomasarchi tect.com Consultant: IMINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 FO www•innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be 'ING with prior approval and will be at the -ITING - franchisee's or contractor's expense. A2 Project TH L A2 Ashton House SELECTIVELY DEMOLISH EXISTING ENTRY CONCRETE CURB Community Center '-L GRATING OVER ITARY D SEWAGE EJECTOR 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Description 17.04.2013 1BIDDING DOCUMENTS Sheet Title: BASEMENT PLAINT Sheet Number: A-1100 OCCUPANT LOAD TABLE umber ROOM Room name Occupancy Net Area LOAD FACTOR OCCUPANT LOAD 101 VESTIBULE circulation 558 SF 0 0 102 I1 MEETING AREA assembly 708 SF 15 47 103 EAST AREA circulation 290 SF 0 0 104 SERVING BAR kitchen 87 SF 200 0 191 EAST EXIT circulation 253 SF 0 0 '192 MECH m—e 90 SF 300 0 195 ELEC accessory storage 7 SF 300 0 196 THE VAULT accessory storage 124 SF 300 0 198 CLOSET accessory storage 16 SF 300 0 199 CLOSET accessory storage 32 SF 300 1 0 2,166 SF 49 01 E W II I UPSTAIRS PLAN PLAN SCALE: 114" = I'-011 Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 thomas(cithomasarchi tect.com Consultant: IMINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 FO www•innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be 'ING with prior approval and will be at the -ITING - franchisee's or contractor's expense. A2 Project TH L A2 Ashton House SELECTIVELY DEMOLISH EXISTING ENTRY CONCRETE CURB Community Center '-L GRATING OVER ITARY D SEWAGE EJECTOR 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Description 17.04.2013 1BIDDING DOCUMENTS Sheet Title: BASEMENT PLAINT Sheet Number: A-1100 DOORS TO REMAIN DOORS OR OPENINGS TO BE MODIFIED DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR SCHEDULE Number ROOM Style SIZE—PR WxH NOTES 444 RR Hinged - Single 2'-6" x 6'-8" - 445 RR Hinged - Single 2'-4" x 6'-8" - 446 BACK HALLWAY Hinged - Single 2'-8" x 6'-8" - 447 CATERING Hinged - Single 2'-8" x 6'-8" - 451 1 OPEN MEETING AREA Hinged - Single 2'-6" x 6'-8" - 452 DRESSING ROOM Hinged - Single 3'-0" x 6'-8" - 453 CLOSET Sliding - Double - Full Lite PR 3'-6" x 6'-8° - 454 RR Hinged - Single 2'-6" x 6'-8" - 455 OPEN MEETING AREA Hinged - Single 2'-6" x 6'-8" - 456 OPEN MEETING AREA Hinged - Single 2'-4" x 6'-8" - 458 PANTRY Hinged - Single V-6" x 6'-8" - 459 CATERING Sliding - Double - Full Lite PR 2'-4" x 6'-8" - 483 RR Hinged - Single V-6" x 6'-8" - DOORS OR OPENINGS TO BE MODIFIED NOTES: 1. MODIFY EXISTING DOOR TO SWING INDIRECTION OF EGRESS TRAVEL AND PROVIDE PANIC HARDWARE 29 AND AUTOMATIC CLOSER 2. PROVIDE STEEL DOOR AND FRAME WITH PANIC HARDWARE, 3 HINGES AND AUTOMATIC CLOSER. 3. PROVIDE SAFETY GLAZING. Z- NOTE #2 DOOR SCHEDULE 106 Number ROOM Room name Number ROOM Style SIZE—PR WxH NOTES 449 PORCH Hinged - Single S-0" x 6'-8" PORCH 1,3 450 PORCH Hinged - Double - Exterior -French (2) PR 2'-8" x 6'-8" BACK HALLWAY 1,3 457 NORTH FOYER Hinged - Single 3'-0" x 6'-8" STAIRS 1, 3 482 CATERING Hinged - Single 3'-0" x 6'-8" PANTRY 2 NOTES: 1. MODIFY EXISTING DOOR TO SWING INDIRECTION OF EGRESS TRAVEL AND PROVIDE PANIC HARDWARE 29 AND AUTOMATIC CLOSER 2. PROVIDE STEEL DOOR AND FRAME WITH PANIC HARDWARE, 3 HINGES AND AUTOMATIC CLOSER. 3. PROVIDE SAFETY GLAZING. CEILING HEIGHT: +8'-35 ABOVE FINISH FLOOR (TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) 26 A4 A-301 25 NOTES 1 . FIN15H EXPOSED EDGE5 WITH A LEVEL 5 GYPSUM WALL ASSEMBLY FINISH 2. REMOVE EXISTING SCONCES AND INSTALL LIGHT FIXTURE 450 u PROTECT EXISTING FIXED TABLE FIREPLACE PROTECT EXISTING FLOORING - TYPICAL THROUGHOUT HOUSE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE REVERSE DIRECTION OF EGRESS OPENING AND PROVIDE PANIC HARDWARE NOTE #2 Z- NOTE #2 OCCUPANT LOAD TABLE 106 Number ROOM Room name Occupancy Net Area LOAD FACTOR OCCUPANT LOAD 105 OPEN MEETING AREA assembly 1,115 SF 15 74 106 PORCH circulation 179 SF 0 0 108 BACK HALLWAY circulation 67 SF 0 0 109 STAIRS circulation 36 SF 0 0 110 PANTRY accessory storage 5 SFI 300 0 112 TURRET AREA kitchen 240 SF 200 1 115 CLOSET accessory storage 10 SF 300 0 118 CLOSET accessory storage 11 SF 300 0 124 DRESSING ROOM N -A 202 SF 0 0 125 EXIST MECH accessory storage 33 SF 300 0 126 CATERING kitchen 201 SF 200 1 130 CLOSET accessory storage 21 SF 300 0 131 CLOSET accessory storage 13 SF 300 0 136 RR N -A 47 SF 0 0 145 RR N -A 26 SF 0 0 155 RR N -A 68 SF 0 0 200 NORTH FOYER circulation 24SF 0 0 2,299 SF 77 CEILING HEIGHT: +8'-35 ABOVE FINISH FLOOR (TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) 26 A4 A-301 25 NOTES 1 . FIN15H EXPOSED EDGE5 WITH A LEVEL 5 GYPSUM WALL ASSEMBLY FINISH 2. REMOVE EXISTING SCONCES AND INSTALL LIGHT FIXTURE 450 u PROTECT EXISTING FIXED TABLE FIREPLACE PROTECT EXISTING FLOORING - TYPICAL THROUGHOUT HOUSE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE REVERSE DIRECTION OF EGRESS OPENING AND PROVIDE PANIC HARDWARE NOTE #2 Z- NOTE #2 PORCH 106 Iowa City, Town 52240-3331 REVERSE DIRECTION OF www.thomasarchitect.com EGRESS OPENING AND 319-331-0365 PROVIDE PANIC thomas@thomasarchitect.com HARDWARE J20 21 449 TURRET AREA 112 NORTH FOYE 200 REVERSE DIRECTION OF EGRESS OPENING AND PROVIDE PANIC HARDWARE PROVIDE LAMINATE GLAZING ALONG INTERIOR SIDE OF EXISTING GUARD AT EX15TING STAIRS TO REMAIN 482 / REMOVE EXISTING WALL, PROVIDE ROUGH OPENING AND INSTALL DOOR #482 REMOVE EXISTING (STEEL DOOR AND FRAME) RANGE / STOVELOS CATERING PROVIDE 30" X 30" -� AND RELOCATE li 26 ATTIC ACCESS HATCH Y_ AS DIRECTED BY II IIS OWNER -4 I 459 PROVIDE ADA COMPLIANT GRAB RAILS - ET N-JI0ATTIC ACCESS I I � 458 � �� 447 117711 j / i \ ,446 CEDAR RR CLOSETI FI 451 ED - N }- 8 4 NOTE # I e0 I I J -- Q _ O 0 / ___ _ 448 U /GLOS -- Q "./<RR I 1 11, � 9 --- - O NOTE # 1 I 445 \ \ 55 DISASSEMBLE WALL NOTE # 1 ASSEMBLY FROM STAIRS FINISH FLOOR TO 15. BELOW BOTTOM OF 109 CLOSET / 483 EXISTING CEILING. I 20 O O O 44 / D STORE EXISTING 11N WALLS TO BE4 3 /438• 439 ✓ G ` MOUINED OR DEMOLISHED - TYPICAL / REMOVE WALLS AROUND STAIRWAY LEAVING J / 440 THE THE BOTTOM 42" HIGH OF WALL TO ACT NOW / / \ AS GUARD PROTECTION FROM FALLING - / 446CLOSETj� / FRAME IN EXISTING OPENING TO ATTIC W/ 2xG @ 12 O.C. -PROVIDE FINISH GYPSUM WALL 2j// CEILING, PAINTED OPEN MEETING AREA �, ! / DISASSEMBLE WALL ASSEMBLY / FROM FINISH FLOOR TO 15 BELOW BOTTOM OF EXISTING CEILING. 7 +658'-10" / \ // x� - NOTE #I FINISH FLOOR (TYP.) I(JN OF PLATFORM EXISTING STAIRS TO REMAIN UNDER O ----- ELEVATED RAMP 19 PLATFORM COORDINATE WITH CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR RAMP CONSTRUCTION AND GRADING AROUND 13UIIDING AI EAST ROOM O NOTE /// 23 10 8 456 V 9 / ` \ / PROTECT AND II ` MAINTAIN EX15TING ` /FINISHLOOR OVERHEAD MECHANICAL SOFFIT 12 x ", \ EXIST MECH 125 PROVIDE ADA J COMPLIANT GRAB RAILS DRESSING ROOM F—i241 0 UPSTAIRS PLAN PLAN SCALE: 114" = 1'-011 i c� 13 x x� x i r NG HVAC CONDENSER i i iY L/ PROVIDE A GO" X GO" X 4" SLAB -ON -GRADE 4,000 P51 CONCRETE FOR HVAC CONDENSER - TYPICAL OF 2 Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Town 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 thomas@thomasarchitect.com Consultant: 10INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Description 17.04.2013 BIDDING DOCUMENTS Sheet Title: UPSTAIRS PLAN Sheet Number: _ +655.5e UP5TAIR` +G57_I e 5_00-YEAI BASE FLC +652_00' BA5E FLOOD ELEVATION I � I 1 rL-T--1----------- -- ------------J L--L--------------------I A4 WEST ELEVATION SCALE: 11/4"=V-0" r-1----------- L------------ A2 NORTH EAST ELEVATION SCALE: 11/4"=V-0" C4 SOUTH ELEVATION - UPSTAIRS ENTRY SCALE: 11/4"=V-0" A5PHALT 5HINGLE ROOF - TYPICAL JW --- .ash■ ■■■ ;i� .. s�ov�i� ■■ ■■ i�i� al ..�. �oQsiaca spa®�. ■■ I�� �.. ave oEll-��e��s���sos�s a�—�s� • rspea�ra+e�.•�o�am�aossesisae��er�sis�asav.•is - eivia•• ••. • ;mss �mta i tw •• I• • • • r ••• EAST ELEVATION 9 -GARAGE (132 SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0" - - Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 Consultant: IMINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project : Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERN EY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Description 17.04.2013 BIDDING DOCUMENTS Sheet Title: EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS Sheet Number: EXISTING SHEATHING OVER TRUSSES EXISTING — GUTTER W1 DOWNSPOUTS EXISTING ASPHALT 5HINGLE5 ROOF SOFFIT WINDOW EXISTING 112' GYPSUM BOARD (TYPICAL) w a EXISTING INSULATION +G58_58' UPSTAIRS FINISH FLOOR `I ° IIID II o D O +G57. 18' D — 500 -YEAR D BASE FLOOD ELEVATION EXISTING PRECAST LINTEL D EXISTING CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SUPERSTRUCTURE III in EXISTING GLA55 C? BLOCK WINDOW +652.00' EXISTING 100 YEAR STONE VENEER BASE FLOOD ELEVATION — ¢J• • 1 ° +G49.55' ° c TOP OF SLAB (ate LOWEST FLOOR EXISTING D ° ELEVATION CONTINUOUS CONCRETE p D FOUNDATION 'Rtpi,'gE GRADE BEAr==, D 4 L. ___=====e ==1111 o -------------- pc ° SELECTIVELY DEMOLISHED PARTITION WALL I i 09 3000: FINISH FLOOR TILE OVER DECOUPLING MEMBRANE 09 3000: TILE TRANSITION TRIM - TYPICAL III I'I EXISTING LAMINATE EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORING DECK 1! C3 DETAIL SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" EXISTING LAMINATE FLOORING EX151TNG ATTIC EXISTING MECHANICAL SOFFIT TO REMAIN PROVIDE GYPSUM WALL ASSEMBLY AT REMAINING WALL - LEVEL 5 FINISH @ EXPOSED SURFACES AND EDGES - TYPICAL I II I II I II I n I ry SELECTIVELY REMOVE EXISTING WALL Ili p ASSEMBLY II I I III I� II II II II II II II II II I II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II N II II II II II II II II II II ii TILETRAN51TION ii BETWEEN LAMINATE II II FLOORING AREAS - SEE DETAIL C3 THIS SHEET U II II II II II II II p 12 \\ 4.5 EXISTING LAMINATE FLOORING L----------- J A2 DETAIL 9 BASEMENT EXIT SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" ° I I =J1 ° D D ° EXISTING RADE FLOOR BASEMENT FLOOR- ° ° D - ——————————— BUILDING —_—————— BUILDING SECTION SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 thomas@thomasarc h itect.com Consultant: IMINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project : Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: C COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Description 17.04.2012 BID DOCUMENTS Sheet Title: SECTION AND DETAILS Sheet Number: A-302 +G52.00' EX5TING STONE 100 -YEAR VENEER BASE FLOOD ELEVATION DOOR A55EMBLY WITH 100% ACRYLIC CONTINUOUS PERIMETER COATING WATER TIGHT GA5KETING G" 4,000 PSI CONCRETE W/ (3) #G STEEL REINFORCEMENT W/ EMBEDMENT 12" EACH 4" CONCRETE END F -DAY WET CURE MIN.) SLAB -ON -GRADE PAVEMENT SEALANT - 4" CONCRETE SLAB -ON -GRADE W/ N VAPOR TYPICAL @ JOINTS 34@ 1 2"O.C. E.W. SLOPING AWAY BARRIER AND 5AWCUT5 1/8" PER LINEAR FOOT O DEMOLISH EXISTING CONCRETE = BACKER z SAWCUT 1.5" DEEP MIN. ROD AND SEALANT °° — TOP OF SLAB @ • .� •" , a EST FLOOR • LOW _ Ie5e r it rJ aY,3- ELEVATION I.4'+ O EXISTING CONTINUOUS Ni ______________ __________ CONCRETE FOUNDATION G -----9_v GRADE BEAM II II - I ° )) — 42" DEEP x 8" WIDE STOOP FOOTING L----------- J A2 DETAIL 9 BASEMENT EXIT SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" ° I I =J1 ° D D ° EXISTING RADE FLOOR BASEMENT FLOOR- ° ° D - ——————————— BUILDING —_—————— BUILDING SECTION SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 thomas@thomasarc h itect.com Consultant: IMINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project : Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: C COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Description 17.04.2012 BID DOCUMENTS Sheet Title: SECTION AND DETAILS Sheet Number: A-302 11 2 t.t VENTILATION CONSTRUCTION NOTES: CONTRACTOR IS ADVISED THAT ALL LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE EXISTING CONDITIONS AT PROJECT SITE BEFORE SUBMITTING COST PROPOSAL. ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH FEDERAL, STATE, AND CITY CODES, ORDINANCES, AND STANDARDS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY ALL PERMIT FEES, PLAN REVIEW FEES, LICENSE FEES, INSPECTIONS AND TAXES APPLICABLE AND INCLUDED BID. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL LABOR, MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF ALL WORK SHOWN ON PLANS AND/OR DESCRIBED HEREIN, INCLUDING ALL DEVICES, CONTROLS AND APPURTENANCES REQUIRED TO SET NEW SYSTEMS INTO OPERATION. 5. AN ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO SHOW ALL PIPING, FIXTURES, DUCTWORK, AND OUTLETS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE TO VERIFY COMPONENTS, LOCATIONS AND SIZES SHOWN OR NOT SHOWN. ALL COMPONENTS NEED TO BE REMOVED IN THE DEMOLITION AREA UNLESS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THEIR OWN DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, CAPPING, STORING, ABANDONING, DISCONNECTING, RELOCATING, AND RECONNECTION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL. A. REMOVE ANY PIPES PROTRUDING ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR OR THROUGH WALL AND CAP AND FINISH OVER WITH MATERIAL TO MATCH EXISTING. B. REMOVE ALL FIXTURES, CARRIERS, SUPPLY & WASTE & VENT PIPING, STEAM, HEATING HOT WATER, HVAC SUPPLY, RETURN & EXHAUST AS NOTED. CAP AT NEAREST ACTIVE MAIN. SUPPLY & RETURN MAINS TO BE VALVED & CAPPED. VALVES AND CAP ALL CONTROL AIR LINES AT MAIN. C. IN REMODELED/ALTERED AREAS ANY PIPING OR DUCTWORK PASSING THROUGH THE REMODELED AREAS TO SERVE (OR BEING SERVED FROM EXISTING ADJACENT, REMOTE, OR SURROUNDING AREA THAT ARE TO REMAIN) SHALL BE RETAINED AND KEPT OPERATIONAL AND SHALL BE REROUTED IN ALL CASES WHERE THEY INTERFERE WITH ANY NEW WORK OR USAGE TO BE ACCOMPLISHED IN THE REMODELED AREA. D. PENETRATIONS THROUGH EXISTING WALLS AND FLOORS FORMERLY OCCUPIED BY REMOVED PIPING SHALL BE PATCHED TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. E. ALL CUTTING, PATCHING, REPAIRING, REPLACEMENT AND REFINISHING SHALL MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS NEARLY AS POSSIBLE. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL MOUNTING, ALL ARRANGEMENTS, HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. ANY MENTION OF SPECIFIC MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT, HEIGHT OR LOCATION SHALL NOT RELIEVE CONTRACTOR OF RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT FURNISHED OR OTHER TRADES WORKING IN THE SAME AREA. NO ADDITIONS TO CONTRACT SUM WILL BE PERMITTED FOR ITEMS INSTALLED IN WRONG LOCATIONS, IN CONFLICT WITH OTHER WORK, ETC. 8. THESE DRAWINGS ARE NECESSARILY DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE. NOT ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, OR DRAINS ARE SHOWN. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT SITE PRIOR TO BIDDING AND INCLUDE ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, AND DRAINS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONING SYSTEM. 9. SHOULD CONDITIONS NECESSITATE ANY REARRANGEMENTS, OR IF DUCTWORK AND/OR PIPING CAN BE RUN TO BETTER ADVANTAGE, PREPARE AND SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS SHOWING CHANGES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. IF SUCH CHANGES ARE APPROVED BY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER, THEY SHALL BECOME A PART OF CONTRACT AFTER THEIR APPROVAL. 11. UPON COMPLETION OF WORK, CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW AND CHECK ENTIRE PORTION OF WORK, CLEAN EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES, REMOVE SURPLUS MATERIALS AND RUBBISH FROM OWNER'S PROPERTY, LEAVING WORK IN NEAT AND CLEAN ORDER; AND IN COMPLETE WORKING CONDITION. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL OF ANY CARTON, DEBRIS, ETC. FOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR INCLUDING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER OR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS. 12. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SCHEDULING DELIVERY, RECEIVING, UNLOADING, UNPACKING, STORING, SETTING IN PLACE, AND PROTECTING FROM DAMAGE, VANDALISM, THEFT OR WEATHER DURING CONSTRUCTION FOR ALL NEW EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR. 13. DO ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING OF BUILDING MATERIALS AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF A COMPLETE AND WORKABLE SYSTEM. PATCHING SHALL MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AND CONSTRUCTION TO THE GREATEST POSSIBLE EXTENT. 14. IN AREAS WITH UNFINISHED CEILINGS, PIPING SHALL BE RUN ALONG THE UNDERSIDE OF SUPPORT JOIST OR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. PIPING SHOULD BE GENERALLY HIDDEN AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE. THEREFORE, IT SHOULD BE LOCATED ABOVE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OR ALONG TOP SIDE OF STRUCTURAL FLANGES. 16. ENSURE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED TO PROVIDE SUFFICIENT CLEARANCE FOR COIL PULL AND MINIMUM 3' MAINTENANCE ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT DOORS. 17. ENGINEER RESERVES RIGHT TO CHANGE LOCATION OF ALL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING AND CONDUIT FIVE FEET IN ANY DIRECTION WITHOUT THESE CHANGES BEING MADE SUBJECT OF AN EXTRA CHARGE PROVIDED SUCH CHANGES ARE MADE BEFORE FINAL INSTALLATION. 18. ALL DUCTWORK SHALL CONFORM TO SMACNA STANDARDS AND LOCAL CODES. DUCT DROPS TO CEILING MAY BE FLEXIBLE DUCT AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. FLEXIBLE DUCTS SHALL BE FULLY EXTENDED AND OPEN. 19. DUCT CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT AND VALVES SHALL BE FLANGE CONNECTIONS WITH CHEMICALLY RESISTANT GASKET OR WITH BANDED CONNECTION AND CHEMICALLY RESISTANT GASKET AS REQUIRED BY MANUFACTURE FOR EACH ITEM. 20. PROVIDE MANUAL VOLUME AIR DAMPERS TO EACH SUPPLY, RETURN, AND EXHAUST DEVICES BRANCH TAKE -OFF. 21. AIR FILTERS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON ALL RETURN AIR EQUIPMENT INLETS. PROVIDE AN EXTRA FILTER AND INSTALL AT END OF CONSTRUCTION. 22. PROVIDE CONDENSATE DRAINS FOR ALL AIR CONDITIONING UNITS AND DRAIN TO BASEMENT FLOOR DRAIN AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 23. THERMOSTAT MUST BE PROGRAMMABLE TO BE ABLE TO SET TEMPERATURE BACK WHEN SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED. 24. HANGERS SHALL BE PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA STANDARDS. 25. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR BALANCING HVAC SYSTEM, ADJUST DAMPERS AND FANS TO OBTAIN AIR FLOWS WITHIN 10% OF AIR FLOWS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. VENTILATING CONSTRUCTION NOTES 1. ALL SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSERS, RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES SHALL HAVE CONTROL DAMPERS IN THE DUCT RUNOUT. DIFFUSERS & GRILLES SHALL HAVE AN OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER LOCATED IN THE FACE OF THE DIFFUSER OR GRILLE. 2, REGARDLESS OF FLEX DUCT LENGTH SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 48" AS SPECIFIED IN SPECIFICATION SECTION 23 31 00 SHALL NOT BE EXCEEDED. FLEX DUCT INSTALLATION SHALL BE AT TERMINAL ENDS ONLY. FLEX DUCT SCHEDULE CFM SIZE <110 6" 0 111-250 81.0 251 -350 10"0 351 -500 12"0 > 501 14"0 LOW PRESSURE DUCT SCHEDULE MAX. CFM DUCT SIZE 500 10110 1000 14112 1500 20112 2000 24112 2500 30112 3000 36112 VENTILATING SYMBOL LIST SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ® SUPPLY OR OUTDOOR AIR DUCT I� SUPPLY OR OUTDOOR DUCT (HIDDEN BEHIND ANOTHER DUCT) RETURN AIR DUCT (� RETURN AIR DUCT (HIDDEN BEHIND ANOTHER DUCT) ® EXHAUST OR RELIEF AIR DUCT EXHAUST OR RELIEF AIR DUCT (HIDDEN BEHIND ANOTHER DUCT) ##/##SA SUPPLY FIRST NUMBER IS SIDE SHOWN SECOND NUMBER IS SIDE NOT SHOWN SAME NOTATION FOR OA AND EA ##/## RA RETURN TURNING VANES ES:1 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER MOTORIZED DAMPER F SD FIRE DAMPER I SMOKE DAMPER FLEXIBLE DUCT SA SUPPLY AIR RA RETURN AIR OA OUTDOOR AIR EA EXHAUSTAIR TQ THERMOSTAT co CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR EXISTING TO BE REMOVED # EQUIPMENT 8 DEMOLITION BEGINNING/END POINT Q NEW CONNECTION To EXISTING BEGINNING/END POINT UP DUCTWORK UP DN DUCTWORK DOWN Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 w ww.thomasarc hitect.co ni 319-331-0365 Consultant: IEl INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project : Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: ©COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Desc 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: MECHANICAL NOTES & LEGEND Sheet Number: M00 A \ BASEMENT -DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" M� 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' II B \ UPPER LEVEL - DEMOLITION PLAN rl) SCALE 1/8"=1' 9' 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' b�i C \ ATTIC - DEMOLITION PLAN r1l) SCALE 1/8" = 1' 0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' NOTES: 1. DISABLE EXISTING FURNACE UNIT. 2. REMOVE EXISTING DUCTWORK AS NECESSARY TO INSTALL NEW DUCTWORK AND PIPING. 3. COMBINE EXISTING RETURN AIR AND SUPPLY AIR DUCTWORK (IN THE EXISTING SOFFIT) FOR REUSE AS RETURN AIR FOR NEW AHUS. CAP END OF OPEN RETURN AIR DUCTWORK TO BASEMENT AS NECESSARY. A(; Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 Consultant: ISINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project: Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLANS Sheet Number: M01 Architect: Thomas Mclnemey ARCHITECT — T, 1208 Marcy Street 0 Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 r-------------- --------------- I I / www.thomasarchitect.com I I I L_ TURRET AREA NORTO FOYER / thomas@thomasa0365com REPLACE COR DF COVER DR"e LOSE 5 O CATERING la O Consultant: VESTIBULE i I I dp �r IO � ANTR \ R ISINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 0 Fc 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 ----< T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 \ / ERVING BAR \ �- -- CLOSE( C STAIRS <� u Rss 0 \ NEW AM ROOF POWW /\/ \/ VENTILATOR �/ www.innovativeengineersinc.com \\ ^ \\\ "° i' Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and I ASSEMBLY EAST \\\ \\ O \ REFRIGERANTLINES °°°°°"°°°' FROMCONDENSI GUNII$ equitable solution to any problems, NEW GRATING IA \ (APPROX. ___ _. __._ __ __ _ _._ _ _. mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. 9 9 \\ , CUTANDEXIEND HOT AND COLD OPEN MEERNG AREA Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially WATER PIPING ^\\ FAC WIDE ° immediately upon discovery a conflict % CLOSET with the Scope of Work. EXTEND ASSEMBLY wen NATURAL GAS LINE < / Please do not instinctively produce e a solution or proceed with work that / N ATTIC RWF � would result in a change order requiring \ NEWTHExM°sw AND HUMpIYGOMRCI .,,,,- ELIXIR vENnLATOR AHU-I reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be MEC // / MECH rz5 O , ACCU-1O� -_ HILWES TOO OM PRGONDC UNIT with prior approval and will be at the i franchisee's or contractor's expense. • O / / A CLOSET , RR " __ ." 3/f NG PNGb � CLOSET UP AND GOWN ANO DOWN PORCH ASSEMBLY '4 ACCU-R RR m /' NG EXSTINGDOWN UP AND DOWN ACCUa / / DRESSING ROOM '�REFRIGERANTLINESTHRUProject: NEW l STORAGE - -- BASEMENTMECHANICAL ROOM UP TO ATnC BYPI EWI / Ashton House , dTW"aruTrDFH Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 A BASEMENT -MECHANICAL PLAN E3 UPPER LEVEL - MECHANICAL PLAN C ATTIC - MECHANICAL PLAN N IVIU2 N�/� 'Y,02 N �A II02 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' SCALE 1/T=1'-0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' SCALE 1/T I'-0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' SUPPLY AIR Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 DUCT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, CONDENSING UNIT DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION SEE SCHEDULE FOR BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, REFRIGERANT LINES MANUFACTURER IS PROHIBITED. Issue ate: EVAPORATIVE COIL (COOLING) Date Description 2013.04.17 OUT FOR BID 0 07 AIR HANDLING UNIT (FURNACE) SEE SCHEDULE FOR MANUFACTURER CONCRETE BASE WITH 6"x6" 10-10 WWM NON INSULATED LIQUID LINE FILTER VENT ,• Sheet Title: 82 UNION / CONDENSATE fff DRAIN W/ TRAP 3" 6" MI SUCTIONS LINE W/ 1/2" ARMAFLEX INNSULATION &BARRIER MECHANICAL FLOOR 2 -1/2"x2 -1/2"x3`0/16"1/2" ANCHOR BOLTS ANGLE IRON BRACKET 6" OFF CENTER PLANS HOT DIP GALV. 12" 1-1/2" EDGE DISTANCE (TYP) NEOPREME PAD LONG ON 4 SIDES VIBRATION ISOLATORS NOTES: RETURN AIR NOTE: 1. SCREWS, AND ANCHORS TYPICAL FOR ALL FOR SIDES OF CONDENSING UNIT. Sheet Number: DUCT 1. PROVIDE 4" MIN. CLEARANCE AROUND AHU. 2. HILTI #12-24 SELFDRILLING SCREWS. 2. PROVIDE CUTOFF SWITCH FOR PAN OVERFLOW #5 POINT 5/8" FROM EDGE OF D AHU INSTALLATION DETAILSAE STEEL. MIN. 3" OFF CENTER. ACCU INSTALLATION DETAIL M O2 " 02 M02 NO SCALE NO SCALE BASEMENT - CEILING PLAN SCALE 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' NOTES: 1. VERIFY DIMENSIONS IN FIELD. OUTSIDE AIR OPENING DETAIL NO SCALE A; B -� UPPER LEVEL - CEILING PLAN SCALE 1 /8" = 1' - 0' 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' C -� ATTIC - CEILING PLAN O� SCALE 1/8" = 1'- 0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXHAUST DUCT LOCAION IS GENERAL. FINAL LOCATION TO BE DETERMINED IN FIELD BY CONTRAC-OR. Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-036.5 Consultant: 10INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractors expense. Project: Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Descri 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: MECHANICAL CEILING PLANS Sheet Number: M03 ' -------- � �I I � I I I TURREIAREA 1 NORIH FOYER ® ® CFM \ \saaOR OccuPANcr FOa Nv LOS CAIERING IL ns 175 AN7R r J SCM® Rau I RRI ' I / RR z5 I CFM u STAIRS EHI CF -/N \ F I \ OccuPANCY SENSORFOR HVAC OPEN MEETING AREA ' CRM / TYPICAL CFF M , MVE / M w,ocr UCT (UPI yY }{ , NEP r / SA DUCT DNI (UP6DN) 2ao / CFM ® NEW P'0 CFM \ , XHnU CT IUP IN"I \ / \/ CLOSET rn RR '° PORCH ASSEMBLY � CLOSET vm CF / CFM , � I / I � ' / DRESSING ROOM / I � � — B -� UPPER LEVEL - CEILING PLAN SCALE 1 /8" = 1' - 0' 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' C -� ATTIC - CEILING PLAN O� SCALE 1/8" = 1'- 0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXHAUST DUCT LOCAION IS GENERAL. FINAL LOCATION TO BE DETERMINED IN FIELD BY CONTRAC-OR. Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-036.5 Consultant: 10INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractors expense. Project: Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Descri 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: MECHANICAL CEILING PLANS Sheet Number: M03 ROUND[ DIFFUSE BRANCH DUCT DETAIL NO SCALE SUPPLY DUCT AIR SCOOP STAINLESS STEEL DRAW BAND AIR FLOW FLEXIBLE DUCT RUN SPIN—IN FITTING W/VOLUME CONTROL DAMPER (INSULATE) FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION DETAIL 72[01.'1491. TYPICAL 450 TYPICAL 45° TAKE -OFF TAKE -OFF IL PLAN PLAN ROUND RUN OUT DUCT ELBOW - CENTERLINE TURNING RADIUS 1-1/2 xPLI DUCT WIDTHIMAIN SUPPLY ORFLEX DUCT MAIN SUPPLY OR— RETURN DUCT RETURN DUCTVOLUME CONTROL DAMP VOLUME CONTROL DAMPMETAL BAND AND SCREW METAL BAND AND SCREW / SECTION DIFFUSER/GRILL€ -� SECTION NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR HAS THE OPTION TO USE EITHER METHOD SHOWN. 2. FLEXIBLE DUCT SHALL BE ONLY USED FOR ALIGNMENT AND NOT FOR OFFSET OR CHANGE IN DIRECTION. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TRANSITION FROM NECK SIZE INDICATED TO DUCT SIZE INDICATED AS REQUIRED. SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCT TAKE -OFF DETAIL NO SCALE SECURE FAN TO CURB W/ SCREWS 12-O.C.-\ WOOD NAILER PREFAB GALV.ROOF CURB CANT STRIP & ROOFING 16" 0 ROOF OPENING ATTIC ROOF VENTILATOR DETAIL NO SCALE ALUMINUM ROOF POWER VENTILATOR 8" MIN. BIRD SCREEN RECTANGULAR RUN OUT DUCT FLEX DUCT 4"1 LARGE DOUBLE VANE ELBOW USE FOR ELBOWS 36" OR WIDER AND ANY DEPTH INNER SMALL DOUBLE VANE ELBOW USE FOR ELBOWS UP TO 36" IN WIDTH AND/OR DEPTH WIDTH I I nrnru ,n FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW TYPICAL ELBOW NOTES: 1. ALL SQUARE OR RECTANGULAR ELBOWS HAVE ONE OF THE TWO TYPES OF TURNING VANES SHOWN ABOVE. SINGLE VANE ELBOWS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. 2. VANES SHALL BE FACTORY CONSTRUCTED, SUPPORTED AND FASTENED AS RECOMMENDED BY SMACNA. 3. SQUARE ELBOWS ARE TO BE USED ONLY WHERE ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. RADIUS ELBOWS CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS UPSTREAM AND DOWNSTREAM FOR CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF SQUARE ELBOWS. SQUARE OR RECTANGULAR ELBOW DETAIL E NO SCALE M 04 1 1/2- M 11(6 1 1/2" BAND CLAMP TYPICAL TO FLEXMASTER CB OR CBD MAX SPACING NOT TO EXCEED 5' WITH SAG NOT TO EXCEED 1/2" OVER 5' INTERVAL GAUGE / I 1 MAXIMUM LOAD 24 .028 840 168 22 .034 1070 216 20 .040 1298 3 O a AIR SCOOP STAINLESS STEEL DRAW BAND AIR FLOW FLEXIBLE DUCT RUN SPIN—IN FITTING W/VOLUME CONTROL DAMPER (INSULATE) FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION DETAIL 72[01.'1491. TYPICAL 450 TYPICAL 45° TAKE -OFF TAKE -OFF IL PLAN PLAN ROUND RUN OUT DUCT ELBOW - CENTERLINE TURNING RADIUS 1-1/2 xPLI DUCT WIDTHIMAIN SUPPLY ORFLEX DUCT MAIN SUPPLY OR— RETURN DUCT RETURN DUCTVOLUME CONTROL DAMP VOLUME CONTROL DAMPMETAL BAND AND SCREW METAL BAND AND SCREW / SECTION DIFFUSER/GRILL€ -� SECTION NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR HAS THE OPTION TO USE EITHER METHOD SHOWN. 2. FLEXIBLE DUCT SHALL BE ONLY USED FOR ALIGNMENT AND NOT FOR OFFSET OR CHANGE IN DIRECTION. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TRANSITION FROM NECK SIZE INDICATED TO DUCT SIZE INDICATED AS REQUIRED. SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCT TAKE -OFF DETAIL NO SCALE SECURE FAN TO CURB W/ SCREWS 12-O.C.-\ WOOD NAILER PREFAB GALV.ROOF CURB CANT STRIP & ROOFING 16" 0 ROOF OPENING ATTIC ROOF VENTILATOR DETAIL NO SCALE ALUMINUM ROOF POWER VENTILATOR 8" MIN. BIRD SCREEN RECTANGULAR RUN OUT DUCT FLEX DUCT 4"1 LARGE DOUBLE VANE ELBOW USE FOR ELBOWS 36" OR WIDER AND ANY DEPTH INNER SMALL DOUBLE VANE ELBOW USE FOR ELBOWS UP TO 36" IN WIDTH AND/OR DEPTH WIDTH I I nrnru ,n FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW TYPICAL ELBOW NOTES: 1. ALL SQUARE OR RECTANGULAR ELBOWS HAVE ONE OF THE TWO TYPES OF TURNING VANES SHOWN ABOVE. SINGLE VANE ELBOWS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. 2. VANES SHALL BE FACTORY CONSTRUCTED, SUPPORTED AND FASTENED AS RECOMMENDED BY SMACNA. 3. SQUARE ELBOWS ARE TO BE USED ONLY WHERE ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. RADIUS ELBOWS CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS UPSTREAM AND DOWNSTREAM FOR CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF SQUARE ELBOWS. SQUARE OR RECTANGULAR ELBOW DETAIL E NO SCALE M 04 1 1/2- M 11(6 1 1/2" BAND CLAMP TYPICAL TO FLEXMASTER CB OR CBD MAX SPACING NOT TO EXCEED 5' WITH SAG NOT TO EXCEED 1/2" OVER 5' INTERVAL GAUGE THK. 1" STRAP CAPABIUTY MAXIMUM LOAD 24 .028 840 168 22 .034 1070 216 20 .040 1298 259 * ELASTIC LIMIT ASSUMED 30ksi; RECOMMEND MAX LOAD (20% OF YIELD STRENGTH). DUCT SUPPORT FOR FLEXIBLE DUCTS DETAILS NO SCALE '—W PRESSURE DUCTWORK DUCT MOUNTED SUPPLY GRILLE (QTY. AS NOTED ON FLOOR PLAN) GRILLE FLANGE DIMENSION SHALL NOT EXCEED TAKEOFF BOOT OUTER DIMENSION DUCT MOUNTED SUPPLY GRILLE DETAIL NO SCALE 1" X 22 GUAGE BAND FLEXIBLE DUCT,SEE 1 PLANS FOR SIZE. MINIMUM RADIUS EQUAL TO ONE DUCT DIAMETER. INSULATION DIFFUSER SUPPORT DETAIL NO SCALE TYPICAL Z -BAR AND WIRE DUCT HANGING TYPICAL STRAP AND SADDLE DUCT HANGING TYPICAL CHANNEL AND STRAP DUCT HANGING EYE SCREW #12 WIRE CEILING DIFFUSER SEE PLANS AND SCHEDULE. CONNECT FLEXIBLE DUCT TO COLLAR WITH 22 GUAGE CLAMP AND FOUR SHEET METAL SCREWS AND SEAL WITH DUCT TAPE CEILING INSULATED BACK OF DIFFUSER NOTES: 1. HANG DUCTS ACCORDING TO SMACNA STANDARDS. 2. ALL STRAPS SHALL BE MINIMUM 1-1/2", 26 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL WITH 6 FT MAX. SPACING. HH� METHODS OF HANGING DUCTS DETAILS NO SCALE Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, lava 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect. coni 319-331-0365 Consultant: MINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Description 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: MECHANICAL DETAILS Sheet Number: M04 SUPPLY AIR SUPPLY AIR SUPPLY AIR RETURN AIR (FORMERLY THE SUPPLY AIR DUCT) VENTILATION SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM NO SCALE COMBINATION STARTERS & DISCONNECTS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION TAG TOTAL COOLING TONS AHU-1 AHU-2 TYPE REMARKS GAS FURNACE GAS FURNACE LOCATION PHASE RLA ATTIC ATTIC MANUFACTURER BASIS OF DESIGN CARRIER CARRIER MODEL BASIS OF DESIGN 26.4 1±19.9 59SC2B120S24-22 59SC2B100S21-22 ARRANGEMENT ACCU-2 VERTICAL VERTICAL SUPPLY FAN :FAN I,MOTOR 1 1.4 208/230 1 1 QUANTITY 1 1 BLOWER WHEEL- DIAX WIDTH 11 X 11 11 X 10 AIRFLOW CFM 2,275 1,425 OUTDOOR AIRFLOW CFM 550 350 FAN SPEED RPM 500-1,150 500-1,150 E.S.P. IN WG - HEATING 0.2 0.2 E.S.P. IN WG - COOLING 0.5 0.5 40 QUANTITY 1 1 HORSEPOWER HP 14.1 13.8 VOLTS/PHASE/HERTZ 115/1/60 115/1/60 FULL LOAD AMPS 14.9 14.6 MAX. CIRCUIT BREAKER/FUSE 20 20 2-2-5 12 COOLING DATA COIL TITUS OMNI REFRIGERANT R -134a R -134a AHU-2 OPPOSED HEATING DATA FURNACE 0.05 TYPE CONDENSING CONDENSING FUEL NATURAL GAS NATURAL GAS BURNERS 6 5 IGNITION SILICON NITRIDE SILICON NITRIDE WHITE FINISH 7 FILTER 24"X24" FILTER KGAWF**06UFR KGAWF"06UFR MOD -213 AHU-2 MAX. UNIT DIMENSIONS ' LENGTH IN 2'-5 1/2" 2'-5 1/2" WIDTH IN 2'-01/2" 1'4" HEIGHT IN 2'-11" 2'-11" WEIGHT LBS 184 166 ACCESSORIES 9 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 24"X24" 8"0 DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION CO2 SENSOR 300 PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 4-6-12 HUMIDIFIER WHITE FINISH ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR ERV TITUS OMNI 24"X24" 10"0 REMARKS 400 0.08 5-7-13 1. COOILING COILS MOUNTED EXTERNAL TOGAS FURNACE. SEE EVAPORATIVE COOLING COIL SCHEDULE. 2. HORIZONTAL GAS FURNACE ARRANGEMENT IS PREFERRED. COMBINATION STARTERS & DISCONNECTS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE MARK DESCRIPTION NOTES TOTAL COOLING TONS CONDENSER MOTOR COMPRESSOR MOTOR, REFRIG MCA DESIGN BASIS REMARKS NO. FLA VOLTS PHASE NO. VOLTS PHASE RLA ACCU-1 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT 1 5 1 1.2 208/230 1 1 208/230 26.4 1±19.9 R -134a 50 CARRIER 497 ACCU-2 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT 1 4 1 1.4 208/230 1 1 208/230 1 R -134a 40 CARRIER CARRIER ACCU-3 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT 1 4 1 1 1.4 208/230 1 1 208/230 1 1 1 19.9 R -134a 40 CARRIER <25 NOTES: SIZE REFRIGERANT LINES PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION. (SPLIT) EVAPORATIVE COOLING COIL SCHEDULE MARK DESCRIPTION LOCATION TOTAL SENSIBLE NOTES CAPACITY CAPACITY TONS TONS AIR QTY CFM FACE VEL FPM EAT "F LAT "F DESIGN BASIS REMARKS CC -1 COOLING COIL AHU-1 1 5 X 2,230 487 95/78 64 CARRIER (IN) CC -2A COOLING COIL AHU-2 1,2 4 X 2,280 497 95/78 64 CARRIER <25 CC -26 COOLING COIL AHU-2 1, 2 4 X 2,280 497 95/78 64 CARRIER 1 NOTES: 1. SIZE REFRIGERANT LINES PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION. 2. INTERTWINED COOLING COILS. DAMPER SCHEDULE MARK FUNCTION TYPE MAX C.F.M. MAX S.P. FREE AREA HEIGHT WIDTH DEPTH REMARKS FACE SIZE NECK SIZE AIR PATTERN VELOCITY (FPM) S.P. (WATER) (IN W.C.) (SQ FT) (IN) (IN) (IN) DUCT MOUNTED GRILLE MOD -1A AHU-1 OPPOSED 550 0.05 1/15 <25 16" 0 2 WALL MOUNTED GRILLE (EXISTING) 20"X12" OUTSIDE AIR BLADE 400 0.03 1 <25 EXISTING 3 WALL MOUNTED GRILLE (EXISTING) MOD -1B AHU-1 OPPOSED 750 1,425 0.05 <25 EXISTING 4 TITUS OMNI 12"X12" 4110 RETURN AIR BLADE 0.08 2-2-5 12 WHITE FINISH 5 TITUS OMNI 12"X12" 4"0 MOD -2A AHU-2 OPPOSED ' 350 0.05 6 TITUS OMNI 12"X12" 6"0 4 -WAY 175 OUTSIDE AIR BLADE 24 WHITE FINISH 7 TITUS OMNI 24"X24" 6"0 4 -WAY 200 MOD -213 AHU-2 OPPOSED ' 1,075 0.05 24"X24" 8"0 4 -WAY 250 0.06 3-5-10 RETURN AIR BLADE 9 TITUS OMNI 24"X24" 8"0 4 - WAY 300 0.09 4-6-12 * DENOTES VALUES TO BE DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR. GRILLE AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE QTY FUNCTION TYPE C.F.M. VOLTS HP FLA OPENING BLADE MARK DESCRIPTION FACE SIZE NECK SIZE AIR PATTERN C.F.M. S.P. (WATER) THROW (FEET) NOISE LEVEL (NC) REMARKS 1 DUCT MOUNTED GRILLE 12"X6" 12"X6" 2 -WAY 50 0.03 1/15 <25 16" 0 2 WALL MOUNTED GRILLE (EXISTING) 20"X12" 10"0 2 -WAY 400 0.03 1 <25 EXISTING 3 WALL MOUNTED GRILLE (EXISTING) 20"X12" 14"0 2 - WAY 750 0.03 <25 EXISTING 4 TITUS OMNI 12"X12" 4110 4 -WAY 50 0.08 2-2-5 12 WHITE FINISH 5 TITUS OMNI 12"X12" 4"0 4 - WAY 75 1 0.13 2-3-6 1 21 WHITE FINISH 6 TITUS OMNI 12"X12" 6"0 4 -WAY 175 0.25 5-7-14 24 WHITE FINISH 7 TITUS OMNI 24"X24" 6"0 4 -WAY 200 0.10 3-4-9 21 WHITE FINISH 8 TITUS OMNI 24"X24" 8"0 4 -WAY 250 0.06 3-5-10 12 WHITE FINISH 9 TITUS OMNI 24"X24" 8"0 4 - WAY 300 0.09 4-6-12 21 WHITE FINISH 10 TITUS OMNI 24"X24" 10"0 4 -WAY 400 0.08 5-7-13 15 WHITE FINISH ATTIC ROOF POWER VENTILATOR SCHEDULE QTY FUNCTION TYPE C.F.M. VOLTS HP FLA OPENING BLADE MANUFACTURER REMARKS PHASE (IN) DIA (IN) MODEL 2 ATTIC POWER 850 115 1/15 1.1 16" 0 14" 0 JETFAN INCLUDE SNAP ACTION THERMOSTAT VENTILATOR (EACH) 1 707 INCLUDE FIRESTAT Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, lava 52240-3331 ww w.thomasarchitect. com 319-331-036.5 thomasCthomasarc h i tett. com Consultant: IMINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovafiveengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project : Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: MECHANICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM SCHEDULES Sheet Number: M05 PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION NOTES: CONTRACTOR IS ADVISED THAT ALL LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE EXISTING CONDITIONS AT PROJECT BEFORE SUBMITTING COST PROPOSAL. PLUMBING WORK INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: A. DOMESTIC WATER: REMOVE WASHER VALVE BOXES AND ASSOCIATED PIPING AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. B. DOMESTIC WATER: INSTALL NEW WALL -MOUNTED UTILITY FAUCET, GRATING, AND ASSOCIATED PIPING AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. C. DOMESTIC WATER: INSTALL NEW BACKFLOW PREVENTER. D. DOMESTIC HOT WATER: REMOVE EXISTING WATER HEATER AND ASSOCIATED PIPING AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. E. DOMESTIC HOT WATER: INSTALL NEW TANKLESS WATER HEATER AND ASSOCIATED PIPING AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. F. NATURAL GAS: REMOVE EXISTING UNIT HEATER IN GARAGE AND ASSOCIATED NATURAL GAS PIPING INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. G. NATURAL GAS: INSTALL FLEXIBLE PIPING TO NEW TANKLESS WATER HEATER AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. H. VENTS AND DRAINS: REMOVE EXISTING DRAIN AND VENT IN HARL COMMONS AND INSTALL NEW DRAIN AND VENT PIPING ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH FEDERAL, STATE, AND CITY CODES, ORDINANCES, AND STANDARDS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY ALL PERMIT FEES, PLAN REVIEW FEES, LICENSE FEES, INSPECTIONS AND TAXES APPLICABLE AND INCLUDED BID. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL LABOR, MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF ALL WORK SHOWN ON S AND/OR DESCRIBED HEREIN, INCLUDING ALL FIXTURES, DEVICES, CONTROLS AND APPURTENANCES REQUIRED TO SET NEW SYSTEMS OPERATION. I6. AN ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO SHOW PIPING, FIXTURES, DUCTWORK, AND OUTLETS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE TO VERIFY COMPONENTS, LOCATIONS AND SIZES SHOWN OR NOT SHOWN. ALL COMPONENTS NEED TO BE REMOVED IN THE DEMOLITION AREA UNLESS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THEIR OWN DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, CAPPING, STORING, ABANDONING, DISCONNECTING, OCATING, AND RECONNECTION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL. A. REMOVE ANY PIPES PROTRUDING ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR OR THROUGH WALL AND CAP AND FINISH OVER WITH MATERIAL TO MATCH EXISTING. B. REMOVE ALL FIXTURES, CARRIERS, SUPPLY & WASTE & VENT PIPING, STEAM, HEATING HOT WATER, HVAC SUPPLY, RETURN & EXHAUST AS NOTED. CAP AT NEAREST ACTIVE MAIN. SUPPLY & RETURN MAINS TO BE VALVED & CAPPED. VALVES AND CAP ALL CONTROL AIR LINES AT MAIN. C. IN REMODELED/ALTERED AREAS ANY PIPING OR DUCTWORK PASSING THROUGH THE REMODELED AREAS TO SERVE (OR BEING SERVED FROM EXISTING ADJACENT, REMOTE, OR SURROUNDING AREA THAT ARE TO REMAIN) SHALL BE RETAINED AND KEPT OPERATIONAL AND SHALL BE REROUTED IN ALL CASES WHERE THEY INTERFERE WITH ANY NEW WORK OR USAGE TO BE ACCOMPLISHED IN THE REMODELED AREA. D. PENETRATIONS THROUGH EXISTING WALLS AND FLOORS FORMERLY OCCUPIED BY REMOVED PIPING SHALL BE PATCHED TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. E. ALL CUTTING, PATCHING, REPAIRING, REPLACEMENT AND REFINISHING SHALL MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS NEARLY AS POSSIBLE. I. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL MOUNTING, ALL ARRANGEMENTS, HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. ANY MENTION OF iPECIFIC MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT, HEIGHT OR LOCATION SHALL NOT RELIEVE CONTRACTOR OF RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT FURNISHED OR OTHER TRADES WORKING IN THE SAME AREA. NO ADDITIONS TO CONTRACT SUM WILL BE PERMITTED FOR ITEMS NSTALLED IN WRONG LOCATIONS, IN CONFLICT WITH OTHER WORK, ETC. THESE DRAWINGS ARE NECESSARILY DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE. NOT ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, OR DRAINS ARE SHOWN. NTRACTOR SHALL VISIT SITE PRIOR TO BIDDING AND INCLUDE ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, AND DRAINS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE MPLETE AND FUNCTIONING SYSTEM. 0. SHOULD CONDITIONS NECESSITATE ANY REARRANGEMENTS, OR IF PIPING CAN BE RUN TO BETTER ADVANTAGE, PREPARE AND SUBMIT iHOP DRAWINGS SHOWING CHANGES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. IF SUCH CHANGES ARE APPROVED BY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER, THEY iHALL BECOME A PART OF CONTRACT AFTER THEIR APPROVAL. 1. UPON COMPLETION OF WORK, CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW AND CHECK ENTIRE PORTION OF WORK, CLEAN EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES, ZEMOVE SURPLUS MATERIALS AND RUBBISH FROM OWNER'S PROPERTY, LEAVING WORK IN NEAT AND CLEAN ORDER; AND IN COMPLETE VORKING CONDITION. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL OF ANY CARTON, DEBRIS, ETC. FOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED BY ;ONTRACTOR INCLUDING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER OR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS. 2. PATCHING SHALL MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AND CONSTRUCTION TO THE GREATEST POSSIBLE EXTENT. 3. IN AREAS WITH UNFINISHED CEILINGS, PIPING SHALL BE RUN ALONG THE UNDERSIDE OF SUPPORT JOIST OR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. 11PING SHOULD BE GENERALLY HIDDEN AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE. THEREFORE, IT SHOULD BE LOCATED ABOVE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OR ALONG TOP SIDE OF STRUCTURAL FLANGES. 4. ENGINEER RESERVES RIGHT TO CHANGE LOCATION OF ALL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING AND CONDUIT FIVE FEET IN ANY DIRECTION NITHOUT THESE CHANGES BEING MADE SUBJECT OF AN EXTRA CHARGE PROVIDED SUCH CHANGES ARE MADE BEFORE FINAL INSTALLATION. PLUMBING SYMBOL LIST SYMBOL DESCRIPTION PIPE MATERIAL NEW CONNECTION TO EXISTING BEGINNING/END POINT CONDENSATE ELBOW TURNED UP C — ELBOW TURNED DOWN �+ TEE - TOP OUTLET NATURAL GAS TEE -BOTTOM OUTLET HW VACUUM OUTLET COPPER, PEX COMPRESSED AIR OUTLET ® BALANCING VALVE a GATE VALVE — b�- BALL VALVE —iw- CHECK VALVE �- BACKFLOW PREVENTER i} HB HOSE BIBB ® 2TD-A FLOOR DRAIN, DESIGNATION NUMBER & SIZE ROOF DRAIN, DESIGNATION NUMBER & SIZE CLEANOUT - FLOOR OR YARD ;0IR CLEANOUT - PLUGTYPE CLEANOUT - WALL o OSD OPEN SITE DRAIN F-1 FIXTURE DESIGNATION & NUMBER FLOW ITEM # I DESCRIPTION I WASTE I TRAP MBU-1 I WALL -MOUNT FLOOR - UTILITY FAUCET DRAIN PLUMBING DESIGNATIONS DESIG. DESCRIPTION PIPE MATERIAL COND CONDENSATE PVC CW DOMESTIC COLD WATER COPPER, PEX NG NATURAL GAS FLEX. SS CORRUGATED TUBING HW DOMESTIC HOT WATER COPPER, PEX HWR DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION COPPER, PEX VENT VENT PVC FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE VENT I CW 1 HW I TW FURNISHED BY 1/2" 1/2" PLUMBING CONTRACTOR INSTALLED BY PLUMBING CONTRACTOR FINAL CONNECTION PLUMBING CONTRACTOR REMARKS MOUNTING HEIGHT = 2'-8" Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Dlarey Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www,thom asarchitect.com 319-331-0365 thomasLth omasarch itect. co m Consultant: __ I INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project: Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Description 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: PLUMBING NOTES & LEGEND Sheet Number: 11--I r ------I BASEMENT -DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE 1/8"=1'-T 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' B UPPER LEVEL - DEMOLITION PLAN NP01 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" 0' S 10' 20' 30' ATTIC - DEMOLITION PLAN N SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 Consultant: 10INNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project : Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Desc 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLANS Sheet Number: P01 -- -----I I A \ BASEMENT - PLUMBING PLAN P� SCALE 1 /8" = 1' - 0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' A(; TEST C I:$1NS 3/4" COLD WATER PIPE SL E UPPER LEVEL - PLUMBING PLAN SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE BACKFLOW PREVENTER DETAIL PO2/ NO SCALE FLOOR C ATTIC - PLUMBING PLAN A(; NP02 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' APPROX. 3'-0" / BAR GRATE 1-1/2"x3/16"xl-3/16 1/2" GAP MAX TYP. GRATE SUPPORT DETAIL Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 Consultant: ISINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovafiveengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project : Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date DescriDti 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: PLUMBING PLANS Sheet Number: P01 Architect: Tomas McInerney ARCHITECT _._. _ 1208 Marcy Street r Iowa qty, Iowa 52240-3331 r – \ - www.thomasarchitect.com 0365 thomas@thomasa com OVEN TO BE REMOVED. REMOVE WIRING BACK � � VES�I3ULE TO SERVING PANEL. Consultant: l O r is MINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 - -; A�2 ATTIC ROOF POWER VENTILATOR FRACTIONA HP MOTOR, 1PH, 120V. PROVI E FINAL CONNECTIO S. CONNECT TO T 319.855.41 15 1 F 319.351.0070 www ' o f iv n i i m .Irmo a ee neers nc.co g SEBvfNGB ��, ,- ®'CLOSET \ i 0 AHU EXISTING CI CUIT. ELM] _- 2 , -- ---------------- \ = ® �/ A EIMBLYEASJ`.\ w LLWI LBEDEMo ISHEo: REMOVE L Thomas MclnerneyArchitect reserves \ R CEP El REMOVED. REM G BACK TO SERVING COAXI CABLE IN THE IC the right to determine a fair and PA (TYP. ALL RECEPTACLES PROVIDE DUCT equitable solution to any problems, HIS W ) DETECTO mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. REFERENCE SHEET E01 ' i — \ AIR HAN SHUTDO N Y Please do not hesitate to phone our FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION , � ,' a!SEI// office at 319-331-0365, especially < o; immediately upon discovery a conflict ASSEMBLY WEST DTI/i,' / ,' ��� , REFERENCE SHEET E02 FOR ADDITIONAL INFO TION ATTIC RO F PO ER VENTILATOR ❑F a FRACTIONAL HP TOR, 1PH, with the Scope of Work. p 120V. PROVIDE FINA'Q Please do not instinctively produce a ' \`✓ CONNECI IONS. CONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT. \ �l�fiU PROVIDE DUCT solution or proceed with work that MEC / _ N-1,3 N-13 DETECTOR AND 1 AIR HANDLER would result in a change order requiring g q 9 ,� i _ \ / - eccu� ACC ACC / SHUTDOWN RELAY reimbursement by the owner. RCOITR% Nor Any solutions outside this policy shall be with approval and will be at the a� ` .ccu- A-12,14 �V SHOWN IN THIS AR I EXISTING TO REM N prior franchisee's or contractor's expense. ( ACC \ , / EXHAUST FAN, FRACTIONAL HP MOTOR,'2 cc -- eccw�RE-USE 1 i / r 1PH, 120V. PROVIDE FINAL CONNECTIONS. CONNECT EXISTING CIRCUIT FEEDING A-38,40 REMOVED AIR COMPRESSOR TO FEED STORAGE /TO EXISTING CIRCUIT. \ ACC NEW COMPRESSOR. PROVIDE CONDUI AND WIRING PER DISCONNECT SWITCh Project: 3 AND STARTER SCHEDULE. Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 A ELECTRICAL - BASEMENT PLAN B ELECTRICAL - UPPER LEVEL PLAN C ELECTRICAL - ATTIC PLAN EUO N C GOO NC Eo0 N SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' 0' 5' 10' 20' 30' Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION GENERAL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES: GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES: WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, 1. E.C. SHALL VERIFY THE EXISTING CONDITIONS AT 1. TYPICAL LIGHTING HOMERUN CIRCUITS SHALL BE IS PROHIBITED. THE PROJECT SITE BEFORE SUBMITTING COST #12 PHASE WIRE, #12 NEUTRAL WIRE, #12 GND, PROPOSAL. 3/4"C. FOR 120V, 20A HOMERUN CIRCUITS THAT Issue date: 2. THE E.C. SHALL VISIT THE SITE TO VERIFY DEVICES EXCEED 100 FOOT FEEDER LENGTH, OVERSIZE CONDUCTOR TO #10 DUE TO VOLTAGE DROP. Date Description AND EQUIPMENT NOT SHOWN. 2013.04.17 OUT FORBID 2. 120V LIGHTING HOMERUN CIRCUITS SHALL mH 3. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE CONTAIN NO MORE THAN (3) HOT OR SWITCHED FOR HIS OWN DEMOLITION REMOVAL, CAPPING, CONDUCTORS PER CONDUIT. ABANDONING, DISCONNECTING OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL. ALL CUTTING, PATCHING, REPAIRING, REPLACEMENT AND 3. EXIT SIGNS THAT ARE NOT WALL MOUNTED SHALL REFINISHING, SHALL MATCH THE EXISTING BE PENDENT MOUNTED. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONSTRUCTION AS NEARLY AS POSSIBLE. SUPPLY WALL MOUNT, CEILING MOUNT, OR 4. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE THE FIRST CHOICE TO PENDANT MOUNT ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED. ACCEPT EXISTING DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT BEING q EXIT LIGHTS AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS TO BE FED REMOVED AND NOT REUSED. FROM UNSWITCHED LIGHTING CIRCUIT. 5. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF LIGHT SWITCHES WITH OWNER REPRESENTATIVE. GENERAL POWER NOTES: Sheet Title: 1. ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE GROUND CONDUCTORS. GENERAL FIRE ALARM NOTES: ELECTRICAL 2. PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL FOR EACH 1. ALL FIRE ALARM CABLE ASSEMBLIES, BRANCH CIRCUIT PHASE CONDUCTOR. INCLUDING THOSE INSTALLED IN RACEWAY, PLANS ° p GENERAL SHALL BE PLENUM RATED. 3. MAXIMUM OF THREE (3) CURRENT CARRYING CONDUCTORS TO A CONDUIT. 2. ALL FIRE ALARM WIRING SHALL BE INSTALLED NOTES IN RACEWAY. 4. HOMERUN CIRCUITS SHALL CONTAIN NO MORE THAN THREE (3) HOT CONDUCTORS PER 3. THE FIRE ALARM RACEWAY SYSTEM SHALL BE CONDUIT. AN ENTIRELY NEW RACEWAY SYSTEM. Sheet Number: EXISTING RACEWAY SHALL NOT BE RE -USED FOR THE NEW SYSTEM. E00 Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 GENERAL NOTES: www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 1. ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS ON THIS thomas@thomasarchitect.com r------- i _________ r , LEVEL TO BE FED BY EXISTING I L____ --___ ____________________________________________J PANEL A UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. ALL FIRE ALARM WIRING SHALL BE IN Consultant: WIREMOLD CONDUIT. j r------------------------------------------------------------ 3. ALL FIRE ALARM DEVICES SHALL BE WHITE COLOR. MINNOVATIVE L___ _____� ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 POWER AND CIRCUITRY NOT SHOWN IN THIS RACEWAY NOTES: T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 AREA IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. www.innovativeengineersinc.com LIGHTING AND CIRCUITRY IN THIS AREA IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. 1. PLASTER CEILING: PROVIDE WIREMOLD I I #700 SERIES MINIMUM (PANTED) STEEL t SURFACE RACEWAY. I I GARAGE 0l 2. EXPOSED STRUCTURE: PROVIDEO Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves N-9{11 EXPOSED EMT CONDUIT (3/4" MINIMUM) the right to determine a fair and I (PA P TIGHT TO STRUCTURE. PROVIDE equitable solution to any problems, $— WIREMOLD #700 SERIES MINIMUM mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. L-� (PANTED) STEEL SURFACE RACEWAY Please do not hesitate to phone our -J FOR DEVICE DROPS office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict CONDUIT ROUTING IS DIAGRAMMATIC. with the Scope of Work. VERIFY EXACT ROUTING IN FIELD. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF THE Please do not instinctively produce a PENETRATION IN THE FILED. solution or proceed with work that I COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES. would result in a change order requiring l O reimbursement by the owner. J Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the 7 i I franchisee's or contractor's expense. xf 6 .' VING BA < CLOSET KEYED ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS NOTES: i i 4 198 ELIC g I 5 O NEW SPLICE BOX (REFERENCE ONE -LINE DIAGRAM ON Project SHEET E03 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION) 2 NEW PULL BOX / S1 5 O REFERENCE FIRST FLOOR PLAN FOR THE REST OF ----------------J F \ CONDUIT ROUTE Ashton House S1 e A55 MSL EAST P ^. \\ O J -BOX FOR FUTURE SITE LIGHTING _________---------------------------- r-- Community Center ��`� �` `.� O EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TO REMAIN. RETROFIT WITH OS X1 ` PHILIPS LAMP 13PAR30L/END/F36-3000-DIM I ______ +649'-10" S1 ` ` OEXISTING FIXTURE TO REMAIN._____ H2O West Park Road NISH FLOOR 7 a -I`,\ 11 TI f ' /� 7 > RELOCATE EXISTING RECEPTACLE TO MAINTAIN A 52" Iowa City, Iowa 52246 1 i AFF. ELEVATION (ABOVE 500 YEAR FLOOD ELEVATION). 1 i / PROVIDE EQUIPMENT GROUND TO RECEPT. (TYP. OF 8). IDS Od Oe I i Q �EXISTING RECEPTACLE TO REMAIN. NO ELEVATION T1 I i % ; CHANGE IS REQUIRED. 1 jS1�F S ` PROVIDE 1 FOR 1 REPLACEMENT. REPLACE EXISTING OaAS E BLY WEST /E1 ` Ob CLO LIGHT FIXTURE WITH NEW FIXTURE S2 (REFER TO LIGHT 102 / FIXTURE SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION). \` CONNECT FIXTURE TO EXISTING LIGHTING CIRCUIT. ALL S1 7 i2 0 FIXTURES ON THIS FLOOR SHALL BE PENDANT MOUNTED Project number: 13.04 S1 O d �/ /, WITH A 24" STEM. SWITCHING CONFIGURATION TO J i i REMAIN. (TYP. OF 13 ON THIS FLOOR). Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 10 :' 10 PROVIDE AN IDNET ADDRESSABLE MODULE FOR THE UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, ALARM PANEL. 4-20MA ANALOGUE MONITOR ZONE I I OS 10S EIS 12 /1 \�`� i ADAPTOR MODULE (ZAM). CONNECT A PRESSURE DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION / 200A 200A TRANSDUCER WITH A 4-20 MA INTERFACE TO THE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION Wry METER MAIN MODULE. PROVIDE SENSOR CS460-L MANUFACTURED BY BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, MECH / CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC (CSI). INSTALL SENSOR IN IS PROHIBITED. D H 192 / i PERFORATED CONDUIT. ' Issue date: j 11 CONNECT MONO POINT FIXTURES TO EXISTING LIGHTING Si // CIRCUIT. Date Description i S1 1 c / / 12 TANKLESS WATER HEATER (GAS). CONNECT TO EXISTING 2013.04.17 OUT FOR BID a Ob I I , I ' I I ❑FS i C 120V CIRCUIT. ' I i 1800 POWER, LIGHTING AND CIRCUITRY j 7 / NOT SHOWN IN THIS ROOM IS I I EXISTING TO REMAIN UNLESS ri L------------------ --------------------- - -- ----� S2 OTHERWISE NOTED. STORAGE ; I ` 196 L------------------------------------------------------'� Sheet Title: ' ELECTRICAL BASEMENT LEVEL 4Q , N-9,111 i (PART 2/21,/ Sheet Number: A ELECTRICAL - BASEMENT PLAN E01 SCALE 1/4"=1'-0" E01 A \ ELECTRICAL - UPPER LEVEL PLAN SCALE 1/4"=1'-0" KEYED ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS NOTES: REFERENCE LOWER LEVEL FLOOR 1 PLAN FOR CONDUIT CONTINUATION. OREFERENCE ONE -LINE DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ORELOCATED PANEL -A, 120/240V , 1 PH, 3W, 200A. EXTEND ALL EXISTING CIRCUITRY FROM SPLICE BOX ON FLOOR BELOW TO NEW PANEL LOCATION. RELOCATED PANEL SHALL BE FLUSH WITH WALL. 4O NEW PANEL -N, 120/240V , 1 PH, 3W, 60A. OEXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TO REMAIN. RETROFIT WITH PHILIPS LAMP 13PAR30UEND/F36-3000-DIM . OCONTRACTOR TO INSTALL FIXTURE FURNISHED BY OWNER. CONNECT TO EXISTING J -BOX AND CIRCUITRY. 7O ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM PANEL SIMPLEX 4010. PANEL SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH DACT FOR COMMUNICATION. O8 PROVIDE (2) PHONE LINES FOR FIRE ALARM PANEL. OREPLACE EXISTING FIXTURE WITH NEW FIXTURE TYPE W1. CONNECT TO EXISTING LIGHTING CIRCUIT. Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 Consultant: ISINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project : Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date 2013.04.17 Sheet Title: MID] ELECTRICAL UPPER LEVEL Sheet Number: E02 LIGHTING FIXTURES SYMBOL DESCRIPTION F1 23-1 a FIXTURE TYPE CIRCUIT -RELAY CONTROL DEVICE I-_" SURFACE/SUSPENDED MOUNTED FLUORESCENT STRIP OR LINEAR, NORMAL POWER O SURFACE MOUNTED OR PENDANT FIXTURE, NORMAL POWER WP EXIT SIGN - FACES AND ARROWS AS SHOWN Q TRACK LIGHTING - HEADS AS SHOWN QJ JUNCTION BOX RECEPTACLES SYMBOL DESCRIPTION Q DUPLEX RECEPTACLE TV❑ QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE G GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER WP WEATHER PROOF Q SIMPLEX SPECIAL RECEPTACLE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION Q DATAITELEPHONE OUTLET ROUGH -IN, WALL MOUNTED TV❑ TV OUTLET EF 3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION WITH DESIGNATION POWER SYSTEMS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ® DISTRIBUTION PANEL WITH DESIGNATION Vd43 BRANCH PANEL WITH DESIGNATION EF 3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION WITH DESIGNATION %4 T MOTOR WITH DESIGNATION Q DISCONNECT SWITCH QJ JUNCTION BOX ULTRASONIC SENSOR Q LIGHTING CONTROLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION Hyo SINGLE POLE (LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES SWITCH LEG) Vd43 THREE WAY HA 4 FOUR WAY %4 T SINGLE POLE TIMER SWITCH Q INFARED SENSOR Q AUDIBLENISUAL ALARM - HORN STROBE ULTRASONIC SENSOR Q DUAL TECHNOLOGY SENSOR DENOTES WALL MOUNTING FIRE ALARM SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL ❑F H AUTOMATIC SENSOR - HEAT DETECTOR E P MANUAL PULL STATION 10 S AUTOMATIC SENSOR - SMOKE DETECTOR �V VISUAL ALARM EF )H AUDIBLENISUAL ALARM - HORN STROBE DA ANNUNCIATOR PANEL NEW - EXISTING ® TO BE REMOVED FEEDER SCHEDULE MARK PHASE CONDUCTORS NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS GROUND CONDUCTORS SETS & SIZE CONDUIT 200-3 2 #3/0 1 #3/0 1 #6 (1)2' 60-3 2#6 1 #6 1 #10 (1)1" ELECTRICAL - ONE LINE DIAGRAM SCALE = NTS RELOCATED PANEL -A 120/240V 200A, 1PH, 3W NEW PANEL -N 120/240V 100A, 1PH, 3W ATTIC EXISTING EXISTING 200A 200A MAIN METER REPLACE EXISTING PANEL WITH A NEW SPLICE BOX RATED NEMA 3R. EXTEND ALL EXISTING CIRCUITRY TO NEW PANEL LOCATION ON THE FLOOR ABOVE LOWER LEVEL GRADE -t TO UTILITY POWER POLE Architect: Thomas McInerney ARCHITECT 1208 Marcy Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-3331 www.thomasarchitect.com 319-331-0365 thomask'Nhomasarc h i tect.com Consultant: MINNOVATIVE ENGINEERS, INC. 2871 Heinz Rd. Suite B, Iowa City, IA 52240 T 319.855.4115 1 F 319.351.0070 www.innovativeengineersinc.com Thomas Mc Inerney Architect reserves the right to determine a fair and equitable solution to any problems, mistakes, oversights or hidden damage. Please do not hesitate to phone our office at 319-331-0365, especially immediately upon discovery a conflict with the Scope of Work. Please do not instinctively produce a solution or proceed with work that would result in a change order requiring reimbursement by the owner. Any solutions outside this policy shall be with prior approval and will be at the franchisee's or contractor's expense. Project: Ashton House Community Center 820 West Park Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Project number: 13.04 Note: © COPYRIGHT 2013 UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY THOMAS MCINERNEY, ARCHITECT, IS PROHIBITED. Issue date: Date Descriptio) 2013.04.171 OUT FOR BID Sheet Title: ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS & ONE -LINE Sheet Number: IN II E03